2011_chevrolet_equinox

Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)
2011 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2 Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Performance and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1 Warning Lights, Gauges, and Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-27
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-34
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-30 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-40
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-45
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-64
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-32
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
2011 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-13
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43 Recommended Fluids, Vehicle Data Recording and
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-6 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76 Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Introduction iii
Please refer to the purchase worldwide patents issued &

documentation relating to your pending. DTS and the Symbol are
specific vehicle to confirm each of registered trademarks and DTS
the features found on your vehicle. Digital Surround and the DTS logos
For vehicles first sold in Canada, are trademarks of DTS, Inc. Product
substitute the name “General includes software. All Rights
Motors of Canada Limited” for Reserved.
The names, logos, emblems, Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it
slogans, vehicle model names, and appears in this manual.
vehicle body designs appearing in
this manual including, but not limited Keep this manual in the vehicle for
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, quick reference.
the CHEVROLET Emblem, and
EQUINOX are trademarks and/or
service marks of General Motors
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, Manufactured under license from
or licensors. Dolby® Laboratories. Dolby and the
This manual describes features that double-D symbol are registered
may or may not be on your specific trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
vehicle either because they are Manufactured under license
options that you did not purchase or under U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;
due to changes subsequent to the 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
printing of this owner manual. 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 20781752 B Second Printing 2010 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv Introduction
Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this
manual can be obtained from your
dealer or from:
This product incorporates copyright "Made for iPod" means that an
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
protection technology that is electronic accessory has been
ce guide en français auprès du
protected by U.S. patents and other designed to connect specifically
concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
intellectual property rights. Use of to iPod and has been certified by
suivante:
this copyright protection technology the developer to meet Apple
must be authorized by Macrovision, performance standards. Apple is Helm, Incorporated
and is intended for home and other not responsible for the operation of P.O. Box 07130
limited viewing uses only unless this device or its compliance with Detroit, MI 48207
otherwise authorized by safety and regulatory standards. 1-800-551-4123
Macrovision. Reverse engineering iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, and Numéro de poste 6438
or disassembly is prohibited. iPod touch are trademarks of Apple de langue française
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other www.helminc.com
countries.
Introduction v
Using this Manual Symbols

{ WARNING
To quickly locate information about The vehicle has components and
the vehicle, use the Index in the These mean there is something labels that use symbols instead of
back of the manual. It is an that could hurt you or other text. Symbols are shown along with
alphabetical list of what is in the people. the text describing the operation or
manual and the page number where information relating to a specific
it can be found. component, control, message,
Notice: This means there is
gauge, or indicator.
something that could result in
Danger, Warnings, and property or vehicle damage. This M : This symbol is shown when
Cautions would not be covered by the you need to see your owner manual
vehicle's warranty. for additional instructions or
Warning messages found on vehicle
information.
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or * : This symbol is shown when
reduce them. you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
Danger indicates a hazard with a
information.
high level of risk which will result in
serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a A circle with a slash through it is a
hazard that could result in injury or safety symbol which means “Do
death. Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let
this happen.”
vi Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Chart B : Engine Coolant Temperature J : OnStar®

Here are some additional symbols O : Exterior Lamps } : Power
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more # : Fog Lamps / : Remote Vehicle Start
information on the symbol, refer to . : Fuel Gauge > : Safety Belt Reminders
the Index.
+ : Fuses % : Steering Wheel Controls
9 : Airbag Readiness Light 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam 7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
# : Air Conditioning Changer d : Traction Control
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) j : LATCH System Child M : Windshield Washer Fluid
$ : Brake System Warning Light Restraints
" : Charging System *: Malfunction Indicator Lamp
I : Cruise Control :: Oil Pressure
In Brief 1-1
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

In Brief Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Performance and Maintenance
Traction Control
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-14 System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Instrument Panel
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16 Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-24
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-25
Initial Drive Information Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-25
Vehicle Features Driving for Better Fuel
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19 Roadside Assistance
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-19
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-20
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Driver Information
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 1-22
Head Restraint Rear Vision
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-23
Sensing System for Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Passenger Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Steering Wheel
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
In Brief 1-3
A. Air Vents on page 8‑5. I. Data Link Connector (DLC) R. Fuel Economy Mode on
B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever. (Out of View). See Malfunction page 9‑36 (If Equipped).
See Turn and Lane-Change Indicator Lamp on page 5‑13. S. StabiliTrak® System on
Signals on page 6‑3. J. Cruise Control on page 9‑42. page 9‑41.
Exterior Lamp Controls on K. Instrument Panel Illumination T. Cupholders on page 4‑1.
page 6‑1. Control on page 6‑4. U. Power Outlets on page 5‑6.
Fog Lamps on page 6‑4 L. Steering Wheel Adjustment on V. CD Player on page 7‑18.
(If Equipped). page 5‑2.
W. Driver Information Center
C. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑8. M. Horn on page 5‑3. Buttons (If Equipped). See
D. Windshield Wiper/Washer on N. Steering Wheel Controls on Driver Information Center (DIC)
page 5‑3. page 5‑2. on page 5‑20.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer on O. Ignition Positions on page 9‑27. X. Hazard Warning Flashers on
page 5‑4. P. Climate Control Systems on page 6‑3.
E. Power Door Locks on page 2‑7. page 8‑1 (If Equipped). Y. Glove Box on page 4‑1.
F. Instrument Panel Storage on Automatic Climate Control
page 4‑1. System on page 8‑3
G. Safety Locks on page 2‑7. (If Equipped).
H. Infotainment on page 7‑2. Q. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into

Park on page 9‑31.
Navigation System
(If Equipped). See Navigation
System Manual.
1-4 In Brief
Initial Drive Remote Keyless Entry Q: Press to lock all doors.

Information (RKE) System Lock and unlock feedback can be
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) personalized.
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the transmitter will work up to V : For vehicles with the power
important features that may or may 60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle. liftgate, press and hold until the
not be on your specific vehicle. liftgate begins to move to open the
liftgate.
For more detailed information, refer
to each of the features which can be For vehicles without the power
found later in this owner manual. liftgate, first press K, then press
and hold V to unlock the liftgate.
7 : Press and release to locate the
vehicle. Press and hold for at least
two seconds to sound the panic
alarm. Press 7 again to cancel the
panic alarm.
See Keys on page 2‑2 and Remote
Press this button to extend the key. Keyless Entry (RKE) System
The key can be used for the ignition Operation on page 2‑3.
and all locks.
K : Press to unlock the driver door
or all doors.
In Brief 1-5
Remote Vehicle Start Canceling a Remote Start

With this feature the engine can be To cancel a remote start, do one of
started from outside of the vehicle. the following:
Starting the Vehicle . Press / until the parking lamps

turn off.
1. Press Q on the Remote Keyless .
Entry transmitter. Turn on the hazard warning
flashers.
2. Press and hold / for about . Insert the key and turn it to ON/
two seconds. The turn signal RUN and then back to
lamps will briefly flash to confirm LOCK/OFF.
the vehicle has been started.
The parking lamps will turn on See Remote Vehicle Start on The power door lock switches are
and remain on as long as the page 2‑4. on the instrument panel.
engine is running. The vehicle's K: Press to unlock the doors.
doors will be locked. Door Locks
Q: Press to lock the doors. See
3. The key must be inserted and To lock or unlock a door, use the Door Locks on page 2‑6.
turned to ON/RUN before Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
driving. transmitter from outside the vehicle. { : Press for Safety Locks. See
Safety Locks on page 2‑7.
The engine will shut off after From inside the vehicle with the
10 minutes unless a time extension doors locked, pull once on the door
is done or the key is inserted and handle to unlock it, and a second
turned to ON/RUN. time to open it or use the power
door lock switch.
1-6 In Brief
Liftgate Power Liftgate Operation Notice: If you open the liftgate

without checking for overhead
Manual Liftgate Operation obstructions such as a garage
Unlock the vehicle before opening door, you could damage the
the liftgate. liftgate or the liftgate glass.
Always check to make sure the
Press the touchpad located in the area above and behind the liftgate
handle of the liftgate, above the is clear before opening it.
license plate, and lift up to open.
Choose the power liftgate mode by
Do not press the touchpad while turning the dial on the switch to
closing the liftgate. This will cause either the 3/4 or MAX position.
the liftgate to be unlatched. Press the button to open or close
the liftgate.
See Liftgate (Manual) on page 2‑8
On vehicles with a power liftgate, or Liftgate (Power) on page 2‑8.
the switch is on the overhead
console. The vehicle must be in
P (Park) to use the power feature.
The taillamps flash when the power
liftgate moves.
In Brief 1-7
Windows Pushing or pulling the switch part of To adjust the seat:

the way will open or close the . Move the seat forward or
window as long as the switch is rearward using the handle under
operated. the front of the seat cushion (A).
See Power Windows on page 2‑16. See Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑3.
Seat Adjustment . Raise or lower the entire seat by
Four‐Way Power Driver Seat moving the control (B) up
or down.
See Power Seat Adjustment on
page 3‑3 for more information.
The power window controls are on

each of the side doors.
The driver door also has switches
that control the passenger and rear
windows.
Operate the switch for the window
by pressing to open and pulling to
close. A. Seat Position Handle
B. Height Adjustment Control
1-8 In Brief
Eight‐Way Power Driver Seat See Power Seat Adjustment on Reclining Seatbacks
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
Lumbar Adjustment
To adjust a power seat, if equipped:

. Move the seat forward or Eight-Way Power Seat Shown, To recline a manual seatback:
rearward by sliding the control Four-Way Similar
forward or rearward. 1. Lift the lever.
A. Lumbar Switch 2. Move the seatback to the
. Raise or lower the front or rear
part of the seat cushion by If available, press and hold the front desired position, and then
moving the front or rear of the or rear of the switch (A) to increase release the lever to lock the
control up or down. or decrease lumbar support. seatback in place.
Release the switch when the 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
. Raise or lower the entire seat by seatback reaches the desired level
moving the entire control up make sure it is locked.
of lumbar support.
or down.
See Lumbar Adjustment on
In Brief 1-9
To return the seatback to the upright Memory Features turned off. These automatically
position: stored positions are referred to as
1. Lift the lever fully without RKE Memory positions.
applying pressure to the Storing Button Memory Positions
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position. To save positions into Button
Memory:
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked. 1. Adjust the driver seat, seatback
recliner, and both outside mirrors
Power Reclining Seatbacks to the desired driving positions.
2. Press and release the
MEM (Memory) button.
3. Press “1” until a beep sounds.
On vehicles with the memory 4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for a
feature, the “1” and “2” buttons on second driver using “2.”
the outboard side of the driver seat To recall the manually saved Button
are used to manually save and Memory positions, press and hold
recall the driver seat and outside “1” or “2.” The driver seat and
mirror positions. These manually outside mirrors move to the
stored positions are referred to as positions stored to those buttons
To adjust a power seatback, Button Memory positions. when pressed. Releasing “1” or “2”
if available: The vehicle will also automatically before the stored positions are
. Tilt the top of the control save driver seat and outside mirror reached stops the recall.
rearward to recline. positions to the current driver To automatically recall RKE Memory
. Tilt the top of the control forward Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) positions, unlock the driver door
to raise. transmitter when the ignition is with the RKE transmitter and open
1-10 In Brief
the driver door. If the driver door is Heated Seats Head Restraint
already open, pressing the RKE
transmitter K button will also
Adjustment
activate the RKE Memory recall. Do not drive until the head restraints
The driver seat and outside mirrors for all occupants are installed and
will move to the previously saved adjusted properly.
RKE Memory positions.
To achieve a comfortable seating
See “Memory Seat and Mirrors” position, change the seatback
under Power Seat Adjustment on recline angle as little as necessary
page 3‑3 for more information. while keeping the seat and the head
restraint height in the proper
Easy Exit Driver Seat
position.
This feature moves the seat
For more information see Head
rearward allowing the driver more
Uplevel Climate Control System Restraints on page 3‑2 and Seat
room to exit the vehicle.
Shown, Base Similar Adjustment on page 3‑3.
To activate, turn the ignition off and
open the driver door. If the driver If available, the buttons are near the
door is already open, turning the climate controls. To operate, the
ignition off will activate the easy exit ignition must be in ON/RUN.
driver seat. Press z or J to heat the driver or
This feature can be turned on or off passenger seat cushion and
using the vehicle personalization seatback.
menu. See “Easy Exit Driver Seat” Indicator lights on the button show
under Vehicle Personalization on the temperature setting.
See Heated Front Seats on
page 3‑8.
In Brief 1-11
Safety Belts Sensing System for The passenger airbag status

indicator will be visible on the
Passenger Airbag overhead console when the vehicle
is started. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 3‑31 for more
information.
United States
Refer to the following sections for

important information on how to use
safety belts properly. Canada
. Safety Belts on page 3‑10. The passenger sensing system will
. How to Wear Safety Belts turn off the right front passenger
Properly on page 3‑14. frontal airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbag, seat‐
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑18. mounted side impact airbags, and
. Lower Anchors and Tethers for roof‐rail airbags are not affected by
Children (LATCH System) on the passenger sensing system.
page 3‑46.
1-12 In Brief
Mirror Adjustment 3. Return the selector switch to the Steering Wheel

middle position.
Exterior Adjustment
See Power Mirrors on page 2‑14.
Interior
Manual inside rearview mirrors can
be adjusted by holding in the center
to move the mirror for a clearer view
of behind the vehicle. Adjust the
mirror to avoid glare from the
headlamps behind you. Push the
tab forward for daytime use and pull
it for nighttime use.
See Manual Rearview Mirror on
page 2‑15.
Controls for the outside power Vehicles with an automatic dimming To adjust the steering wheel:
mirrors are on the driver door. inside rearview mirror can 1. Pull the lever (A) down.
automatically reduce the glare from
To adjust the mirrors: the headlamps of the vehicle behind 2. Move the steering wheel up
1. Move the selector switch to you. The dimming feature comes on or down.
L (left) or R (right) to choose the and the indicator light comes on 3. Pull or push the steering wheel
driver or passenger mirror. each time the vehicle is started. closer or away from you.
2. Press the arrows on the control See Automatic Dimming Rearview 4. Pull the lever (A) up to lock the
pad to move each mirror in the Mirror on page 2‑15. steering wheel in place.
desired direction.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
In Brief 1-13
Interior Lighting For more information on interior 5 : Turns on the headlamps,

lighting, See Instrument Panel together with the parking lamps,
Reading Lamps Illumination Control on page 6‑4. sidemarker lamps, taillamps, license
These lamps are located on the plate lamps, and instrument panel
overhead console. These lamps Exterior Lighting lights.
come on automatically when any For more information, see:
door is opened.
. Exterior Lamp Controls on
For manual operation, press the page 6‑1.
button next to each lamp to turn it
on or off. . Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
on page 6‑2.
Center Dome Lamps . Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.
There are front and rear dome The exterior lamp control is located
lamps. on the turn signal/lane change lever.
The dome lamp controls are located O : Turn to operate the exterior
in the overhead console. To change lamps.
the settings, press the following:
O: Turns the exterior lamps off.
*: Turns the lamp off, even when
AUTO: Turns the exterior lamps on
a door is open.
and off automatically depending on
1 : The lamps come on the exterior light.
automatically when a door is
opened. ; : Turns on the parking lamps,
together with the sidemarker lamps,
+: Turns the dome lamps on. taillamps, license plate lamps, and
The dome lamps can also be turned instrument panel lights.
on and off by pressing the buttons
next to the lamps.
1-14 In Brief
Windshield Wiper/Washer Windshield Washer The system turns off when the
Pull the lever toward you to spray button is returned to the middle
washer fluid on the windshield. The position.
spray continues until the lever is Z : For continuous rear window
released. wipes.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer 5: To set a delay between wipes.
=: Push the windshield wiper
lever forward to spray washer fluid
The windshield wiper/washer lever on the rear window. The lever
is located on the right side of the returns to its starting position when
steering column. released.
Move the lever to one of the See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
following positions: page 5‑3 and Rear Window Wiper/
8 : Single wipe, move the lever Washer on page 5‑4.
to 8 and then release. The wipers
stop after one wipe.
( : Turns the wipers off.
& : Adjusts the time between
The rear wiper controls are on the
wipes. Turn the & band up for end of the windshield wiper lever.
more frequent wipes or down for
less frequent wipes. Press the upper or lower portion of
the button to control the rear wiper
1: Slow wipes. and rear wiper delay.
2: Fast wipes.
In Brief 1-15
Climate Controls
The vehicle's heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation can be controlled
with these systems.
Climate Control System E. Defrost

A. Fan Control F. Rear Window Defogger
B. Air Delivery Mode Controls G. Recirculation
C. Temperature Control H. Air Conditioning
D. Outside Air
1-16 In Brief
Automatic Climate Control System Parking Brake
A. Fan Control H. Driver and Passenger Heated To set the parking brake, hold the
Seats regular brake pedal down, then
B. AUTO (Automatic Operation) push the parking brake pedal down.
C. Air Delivery Mode Controls I. Rear Window Defogger
If the ignition is on, the brake
D. Defrost J. Air Conditioning system warning light will come on.
E. Recirculation See Climate Control Systems on See Brake System Warning Light on
page 8‑1 (If Equipped) or Automatic page 5‑15.
F. Temperature Control Climate Control System on page 8‑3
G. Power (If Equipped).
In Brief 1-17
To release the parking brake, hold To use this feature:

the regular brake pedal down, then 1. Move the shift lever to
push down momentarily on the M (Manual Mode).
parking brake pedal until you feel
the pedal release. Slowly pull your 2. Press the plus/minus button on
foot up off the park brake pedal. the shift lever, to increase or
decrease the gear range
See Parking Brake on page 9‑38. available.
Transmission See Manual Mode on page 9‑36 for
more information.
Electronic Range Select
(ERS) Mode Fuel Economy Mode
Vehicles with a 2.4L engine have a Press the “eco” (economy) button by
ERS or manual mode allows for
Fuel Economy Mode. When the shift lever to turn this feature on
the selection of the range of gear
engaged, fuel economy mode can or off. The “eco” light in the
positions. Use this mode when
improve the vehicle's fuel economy. instrument cluster will come on
driving down hill or towing a trailer
to limit the top gear and vehicle when engaged, and a Driver
speed. Information Center (DIC) message
“ECO MODE ON” displays. See
Fuel Economy Mode on page 9‑36.
1-18 In Brief
Vehicle Features For more information about these Setting the Clock
and other radio features, see
The vehicle has a digital and an
Operation on page 7‑7.
Radio(s) analog clock.
For more information about the Rear
VOL/ O : Press to turn the system For detailed instructions on setting
Seat Entertainment (RSE) System,
either clock, see Clock (With Date
on and off. Turn to increase or see Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
Display) on page 5‑5 or Clock
decrease the volume. System on page 7‑32.
(Without Date Display) on page 5‑6.
RADIO/BAND: Press to choose For more information about the Rear
between FM, AM, or XM™, Seat Audio (RSA) System, see Rear Turning the Digital Clock On or Off
if equipped. Seat Audio (RSA) System on 1. Press the CONFIG button.
page 7‑41.
TUNE/INFO: Turn to select radio 2. Select Time and Date Settings.
stations. Storing a Favorite Station 3. Select Clock Displayed.
Press to show available information Stations from all bands can be 4. Press the MENU/SELECT
about the current station or track. stored in the favorite lists in any button to turn the clock on or off.
g SEEK: Press to seek the order. Up to six stations can be
previous station or track. stored in each favorite page and the Setting the Time and Date
number of available favorite pages 1. Press the CONFIG button.
l SEEK: Press to seek the next can be set.
station or track. 2. Select Time and Date Settings.
To store the station to a position in
/ BACK or BACK / (depending the list, press the corresponding 3. Select Set Time or Set Date.
on system): Press to exit or move numeric button 1-6 until the station 4. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to
backwards in a menu. can be heard again. adjust the highlighted value.
Buttons 1 ‐ 6: Press to save and For more information, see “Storing a 5. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
select favorite stations Station as a Favorite” in AM-FM to select the next value.
Radio on page 7‑11.
In Brief 1-19
6. To save the time or date and Setting the Auto Time Adjust For more information refer to:
return to the Time and Date 1. Press the CONFIG button. . www.xmradio.com or call
Settings menu, press the BACK 1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).
button at any time or press the 2. Select Time and Date Settings.
MENU/SELECT knob after 3. Highlight Auto Time Adjust.
. www.xmradio.ca or call
adjusting the minutes or year. 1-877-438-9677 (Canada).
4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format to turn Auto Time Adjust on For more information, see Satellite
or off. Radio on page 7‑13.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
2. Select Time and Date Settings. Satellite Radio Portable Audio Devices
3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format. This vehicle has a 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite
4. Press the MENU/SELECT Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite auxiliary input and a USB port
button to select the 12 hour or Radio subscription can receive XM located in the center console.
24 hour display format. programming. External devices such as iPods®,
laptop computers, MP3 players, CD
Setting the Month & Day Format XM Satellite Radio Service changers, and USB storage devices
1. Press the CONFIG button. may be connected, depending on
XM is a satellite radio service based
the audio system.
2. Select Time and Date Settings. in the 48 contiguous United States
and 10 Canadian provinces. XM For more information, see Auxiliary
3. Highlight Month & Day Format. Satellite Radio has a wide variety of Devices (Radio with CD) on
4. Press the MENU/SELECT knob programming and commercial-free page 7‑27 or Auxiliary Devices
to select MM/DD (month/day) or music, coast to coast, and in (Radio with CD/DVD/MEM) on
DD/MM (day/month). digital-quality sound. A fee is page 7‑30.
required to receive the XM service.
1-20 In Brief
Bluetooth® Steering Wheel Controls $ c : Press to silence the

® vehicle speakers only. Press again
The Bluetooth system allows users
to turn the sound on. For vehicles
with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
with OnStar or Bluetooth systems,
to make and receive hands-free
press to reject an incoming call,
calls using the vehicle audio
or end a current call.
system, microphone, and controls.
The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
_ SRC ^ : Press to select an audio
source.
must be paired with the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system before it can be Toggle up or down to select the next
used in the vehicle. Not all phones or previous favorite radio station,
will support all functions. CD, or MP3 track.
See Bluetooth (Overview) on + x −: Press + to increase the
page 7‑43 or Bluetooth volume; press − to decrease the
(Infotainment Controls) on Some audio steering wheel controls volume.
page 7‑44 or Bluetooth (Voice can be adjusted at the steering
Recognition) on page 7‑48. For more information, see Steering
wheel. Wheel Controls on page 5‑2.
b g : Press to interact with the
available Bluetooth or OnStar
systems.
In Brief 1-21
Cruise Control RES/+: Move the thumbwheel up The navigation system provides
to make the vehicle resume to a detailed maps of most major
previously set speed or to freeways and roads. After a
accelerate. destination has been set, the
SET/− : Move the thumbwheel system provides turn-by-turn
down toward SET/- to set a speed instructions for reaching the
and activate cruise control, or to destination. In addition, the system
make the vehicle decelerate. can help locate a variety of points of
interest (POIs), such as banks,
See Cruise Control on page 9‑42. airports, restaurants, and more.
See the Navigation System Manual
Navigation System for more information.
If the vehicle has a navigation
system, there is a separate
Navigation System Manual that
5 : Press to turn the cruise control includes information on the radio,
system on and off. audio players, and navigation
system.
*: Press to disengage cruise
control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
1-22 In Brief
. Lighting
Driver Information wx: Use these buttons to scroll
Center (DIC) through the items in each menu. . Power Door Locks
A small marker will move along the . Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
The DIC display is located in the page as you scroll through the
center of the instrument panel items. This shows where each page . Return to Factory Settings
cluster. It shows the status of many is in the menu. See Vehicle Personalization on
vehicle systems. page 5‑30.
SET/CLR: Use this button to set or
clear the menu item when it is
displayed. Rear Vision
For more information, see Driver Camera (RVC)
Information Center (DIC) on If available, the rear vision camera
page 5‑20. displays a view of the area behind
the vehicle when the vehicle is
Vehicle Personalization shifted into R (Reverse). The
Some vehicle features can be display will appear on either the
programmed by using the audio inside rearview mirror or navigation
system controls. These features screen, if equipped.
include: To clean the camera lens, located
. Climate and Air Quality above the license plate, rinse it with
The DIC buttons are located below water and wipe it with a soft cloth.
the climate control system. . Comfort and Convenience
See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on
MENU: Press this button to get to . Collision/Detection Systems page 9‑46.
the Trip/Fuel Menu and the Vehicle . Language
Information Menu.
In Brief 1-23
Ultrasonic Parking Assist Roof Rack System Power Outlets

If available, Ultrasonic Rear Parking The roof rack cross rails can be The accessory power outlets can
Assist (URPA) uses sensors on the locked in four positions along the be used to connect electrical
rear bumper to detect objects while roof rack side rails. Lift the lever to equipment, such as a cell phone
parking the vehicle. URPA comes release and move the cross rail. or MP3 player.
on automatically when the shift lever Push the lever down to completely There are four accessory power
is moved into R (Reverse) and engage into the side rail holes. Slide outlets in the following locations:
operates at speeds less than 8 km/h the cross rails back and forth until below the CD slot, inside the center
(5 mph). URPA uses audio beeps to the lock pins engage in the holes console storage, on the rear of the
provide distance and system and a click is heard. center console storage, and in the
information. When the roof rack is not in use, rear cargo compartment.
Keep the sensors on the vehicle's lock one cross rail at the furthest To use the outlets, remove the cover
rear bumper clean to ensure proper forward position and lock the other and close when not in use.
operation. cross rail at the furthest rearward
position to reduce wind noise. See See Power Outlets on page 5‑6.
The URPA system can be turned on
and off using the infotainment Roof Rack System on page 4‑2.
system controls. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑30 for
more information.
See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
1-24 In Brief
Performance and StabiliTrak® System Tire Pressure Monitor

Maintenance The StabiliTrak system assists with This vehicle may have a Tire
directional control of the vehicle in Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
difficult driving conditions. The
Traction Control system is on when the vehicle is
System (TCS) started.
The traction control system limits . To turn off both Traction Control
wheel spin. The system is on when and StabiliTrak, press and hold
the vehicle is started. g until g and i illuminate and
. To turn off traction control, press the appropriate DIC message
displays. See Vehicle Messages The TPMS warning light alerts you
and release g located on the to a significant loss in pressure of
on page 5‑23.
console. i illuminates and the one of the vehicle's tires. If the
appropriate DIC message
. Press g again to turn on both warning light comes on, stop as
displays. See Vehicle Messages systems. soon as possible and inflate the
on page 5‑23. For more information, see tires to the recommended pressure
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑41. shown on the Tire and Loading
. Press and release g again to Information label. See Vehicle Load
turn traction control back on. Limits on page 9‑21. The warning
For more information, see Traction light will remain on until the tire
Control System (TCS) on pressure is corrected.
page 9‑40.
In Brief 1-25
During cooler conditions, the low tire Resetting the Oil Life System Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
pressure warning light may appear 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
when the vehicle is first started and Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
with the engine off. and a yellow fuel cap can use either
then turn off. This may be an early
indicator that the tire pressures are 2. Press the DIC MENU button to unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
getting low and the tires need to be display the Vehicle containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
inflated to the proper pressure. Information menu. See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
page 9‑53. For all other vehicles,
The TPMS does not replace normal 3. Press either the up or down use only the unleaded gasoline
monthly tire maintenance. It is the arrows to view REMAINING
described under Recommended
driver’s responsibility to maintain OIL LIFE.
Fuel on page 9‑51.
correct tire pressures. 4. Press the SET/CLEAR button
See Tire Pressure Monitor System until 100% is displayed. Driving for Better Fuel
on page 10‑50. 5. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF. Economy
Engine Oil Life System Or: Driving habits can affect fuel
1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with mileage. Here are some driving tips
The engine oil life system calculates to get the best fuel economy
the engine off.
engine oil life based on vehicle use possible.
and displays the CHANGE ENGINE 2. Fully press and release the
OIL SOON message when it is time accelerator pedal three times
. Avoid fast starts and accelerate
to change the engine oil and filter. within five seconds. smoothly.
The oil life system should be reset See Engine Oil Life System on
. Brake gradually and avoid
to 100% only following an oil page 10‑13. abrupt stops.
change.
1-26 In Brief
. Avoid idling the engine for long
periods of time.
Roadside Assistance Online Owner Center
.
Program The Online Owner Center is a
When road and weather complimentary service that includes
conditions are appropriate, U.S.: 1-800-243-8872 online service reminders, vehicle
use cruise control. TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438 maintenance tips, online owner
. Always follow posted speed manual, special privileges,
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
limits or drive more slowly when and more.
conditions require. As the owner of a new Chevrolet,
Sign up today at:
you are automatically enrolled in the
. Keep vehicle tires properly www.chevyownercenter.com
Roadside Assistance program.
inflated. (U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
See Roadside Assistance Program
. Combine several trips into a
single trip.
on page 13‑6 for more information. OnStar®
Roadside Assistance and OnStar
. Replace the vehicle's tires with
the same TPC Spec number If you have an active OnStar
molded into the tire's sidewall subscription, press the Q button
near the size. and the current GPS location will be
. Follow recommended scheduled sent to an OnStar advisor who will
maintenance. assess your problem, contact
Roadside Assistance, and relay
your exact location to get the help For vehicles with an active OnStar
you need. subscription, OnStar uses several
innovative technologies and live
Advisors to provide a wide range
of safety, security, navigation,
diagnostics, and calling services.
In Brief 1-27
Automatic Crash Response Automatic Crash Response, OnStar service requires wireless
In a crash, built‐in sensors can Emergency Services, Crisis Assist, communication networks and the
automatically alert an OnStar Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle Global Positioning System (GPS)
Advisor who is immediately Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock, satellite network. Not all OnStar
connected to the vehicle to see if Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐Turn services are available everywhere
you need help. Navigation, and Hands‐Free Calling or on all vehicles at all times.
are available on most vehicles. Not OnStar service can’t work unless
How OnStar Service Works all OnStar services are available on the vehicle is in a place where
all vehicles. For more information,
Q : Push this blue button to see the OnStar Owner's Guide; visit
OnStar has an agreement with a
connect to a specially trained wireless service provider for service
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or in that area, and the wireless
OnStar Advisor to verify your
www.onstar.ca (Canada); contact service provider has coverage,
account information and to answer
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1‐888‐ network capacity, reception, and
questions.
466‐7827) or TTY 1‐877‐248‐2080; technology compatible with OnStar
] : Push this red emergency or push the Q button to speak with service. Service involving location
button to get priority help from an OnStar Advisor 24 hours a day, information about the vehicle can’t
specially trained OnStar Emergency 7 days a week. work unless GPS signals are
Advisors.
For a full description of OnStar available, unobstructed, and
X: Push this button for hands‐free, services and system limitations, see compatible with the OnStar
voice‐activated calling and to give the OnStar Owner's Guide in the hardware. The vehicle has to have
voice commands for Hands‐Free glove box. a working electrical system and
Calling and Turn‐by‐Turn adequate battery power for the
Navigation. OnStar service is subject to the OnStar equipment to operate.
OnStar Terms and Conditions OnStar service may not work if the
included in the OnStar Glove OnStar equipment isn’t properly
Box Kit. installed or you haven’t maintained
1-28 In Brief
it and the vehicle is in good working OnStar Steering Wheel Your Responsibility
order and in compliance with all Controls Increase the volume of the radio if
government regulations. If you try
This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute the OnStar Advisor cannot be
to add, connect, or modify any
button that can be used to interact heard.
equipment or software in the
vehicle, OnStar service may not with OnStar Hands-Free calling. If the light next to the OnStar
work. Other problems OnStar can’t See Steering Wheel Controls on buttons is red, the system may
control may prevent service to you, page 5‑2 for more information. not be functioning properly.
such as hills, tall buildings, tunnels, On some vehicles, the Talk button Push the Q button and request a
weather, electrical system design can be used to dial numbers into vehicle diagnostic check. If the light
and architecture of the vehicle, voice mail systems, or to dial phone appears clear (no light appears),
damage to important parts of the extensions. See the OnStar Owner's your OnStar subscription has
vehicle in a crash, or wireless phone Guide for more information. expired and all services have been
network congestion or jamming.
deactivated. Push the Q button to
See Radio Frequency Statement on confirm that the OnStar equipment
page 13‑16 for information is active.
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors and Doors

Liftgate (Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-15
Windows Liftgate (Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Windows
Keys and Locks Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . 2-12 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-13 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Exterior Mirrors Roof
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys and Locks

Keys
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the ignition key is dangerous for
many reasons. Children or others
could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls
The key that is part of the Remote Press the button on the RKE
or even make the vehicle move.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can transmitter to extend the key. Press
The windows will function with the be used for the ignition and all the button and the key blade to
keys in the ignition and children locks. retract the key.
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing See your dealer if a new key is
window. Do not leave the keys in needed.
a vehicle with children. Notice: If the keys get locked in
the vehicle, it may have to be
damaged to get them out. Always
carry a spare key.
If you are locked out of the vehicle,
see Roadside Assistance Program
on page 13‑6.
Remote Keyless Entry Remote Keyless Entry indicate locking. See “Remote
Lock Feedback” under Vehicle
(RKE) System (RKE) System Operation Personalization on page 5‑30. If a
See Radio Frequency Statement on The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) passenger door is open when Q is
page 13‑16 for information transmitter will work up to 60 m pressed, all doors lock. If the driver
regarding Part 15 of the Federal (195 ft) away from the vehicle.
door is open when Q is pressed, all
Communications Commission (FCC) There are other conditions which doors lock except the driver door.
rules and Industry Canada can affect the performance of the These settings can be modified.
Standards RSS-210/220/310. transmitter. See Remote Keyless See “Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out”
If there is a decrease in the RKE Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑3. under Vehicle Personalization on
operating range: page 5‑30.
. Check the distance. The Pressing Q may also arm the
transmitter may be too far from theft-deterrent system. See
the vehicle. Anti-Theft Alarm System on
. Check the location. Other page 2‑12.
vehicles or objects may be K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
blocking the signal. driver door or all doors. See
. Check the transmitter's battery. “Remote Door Unlock” under
See “Battery Replacement” later Vehicle Personalization on
in this section. page 5‑30. The turn signal
. If the transmitter is still not indicators flash to indicate unlocking
working correctly, see your RKE Without Remote Start Shown has occurred. For more information
dealer or a qualified technician see “Remote Unlock Light
The following may be available: Feedback” under Vehicle
for service.
Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors. Personalization on page 5‑30.
The turn signal indicators may flash
and/or the horn may sound to
Pressing K may also disarm the using the RKE transmitter. See The battery is not rechargeable.
theft-deterrent system. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2‑4 To replace the battery:
Anti-Theft Alarm System on for additional information. 1. Push the button on the
page 2‑12. Programming Transmitters to transmitter to extend the key.
V (Remote Liftgate Release): the Vehicle 2. Remove the battery cover by
First press K, then press and hold Only RKE transmitters programmed prying with a finger.
V to unlock the liftgate. For to this vehicle will work. If a 3. Remove the battery by pushing
vehicles with the power liftgate, transmitter is lost or stolen, a on the battery and sliding it
press and hold V until the liftgate replacement can be purchased and toward the keyblade.
begins to move to open the liftgate. programmed through your dealer.
4. Insert the new battery, positive
When the replacement transmitter
7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic is programmed to this vehicle, all
side facing up. Push the battery
Alarm): Press and release one down until it is held in place.
remaining transmitters must also be
time to locate the vehicle. The Replace with a CR2032 or
reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen
exterior lamps flash and the horn equivalent battery.
transmitters will no longer work
chirps. Press and hold 7 for at least once the new transmitter is 5. Snap the battery cover back on
two seconds to sound the panic programmed. to the transmitter.
alarm. The horn sounds and the
turn signals flash until 7 is pressed Battery Replacement Remote Vehicle Start
again or the key is placed in the Replace the battery if the REPLACE
The vehicle may have this feature
ignition and turned to ON/RUN. BATTERY IN REMOTE KEY
that allows you to start the engine
message displays in the DIC. See
/ (Remote Vehicle Start): For
“Replace Battery in Remote Key”
from outside the vehicle.
vehicles with this feature, first press / (Remote Vehicle Start): This
under Key and Lock Messages on
Q then press and hold / to start page 5‑27. button will be on the RKE
the engine from outside the vehicle transmitter if the vehicle has remote
start.
Vehicles with an automatic climate Starting the Engine Using Remote When the remote start is extended,
control system will default to a Start the second 10 minutes will start
heating or cooling mode depending To start the engine using the remote immediately.
on the outside temperature during a start feature: For example, if the engine has
remote start. Once the key is turned been running for 5 minutes, and
to ON/RUN, the system will turn on 1. Press Q on the RKE transmitter. 10 minutes are added, the engine
at the setting the vehicle was last will run for a total of 15 minutes.
set to. If the vehicle has heated 2. Press and hold / for about
seats, they may come on during a two seconds. The turn signal A maximum of two remote starts or
remote start. See Heated Front lamps will briefly flash to confirm remote start attempts are allowed
Seats on page 3‑8 for more the vehicle has been started. between ignition cycles.
information. The parking lamps will turn on
and remain on as long as the The vehicle's ignition switch must
Laws in some local communities engine is running. The vehicle's be turned to ON/RUN and then back
may restrict the use of remote doors will be locked. to LOCK/OFF using the key, before
starters. For example, some laws the remote start procedure can be
require a person using remote start 3. The key must be inserted and used again.
to have the vehicle in view. Check turned to ON/RUN before
driving. Shutting the Engine Off After a
local regulations for any Remote Start
requirements. The engine will shut off after
10 minutes unless a time To shut off the engine:
There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of the extension is done or the key is . Press / until the parking lamps
transmitter. See Remote Keyless inserted and turned to ON/RUN. turn off.
Entry (RKE) System on page 2‑3 for Extending Engine Run Time . Turn on the hazard warning
additional information. flashers.
For a 10-minute extension, repeat
Steps 1 and 2 while the engine is . Insert the key and turn it to
still running. The remote start can ON/RUN and then back to
be extended once. LOCK/OFF.
Conditions in Which Remote Start This feature allows your dealer to

Will Not Work add the manufacturer's remote WARNING (Continued)
The remote vehicle start feature will vehicle start feature. See your
dealer to add the manufacturer's
. Young children who get into
not operate if: unlocked vehicles may be
remote vehicle start feature to the
. The key is in the ignition. vehicle. unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
. The hood or doors are not and can suffer permanent
closed. Door Locks injuries or even death from
. The hazard warning flashers heat stroke. Always lock the
are on. { WARNING vehicle whenever leaving it.
. Outsiders can easily enter
. There is an emission control Unlocked doors can be
system malfunction. dangerous. through an unlocked door
when slowing or stopping the
. The engine coolant temperature . Passengers, especially vehicle. Lock the doors to
is too high. children, can easily open the help prevent this from
. The oil pressure is low. doors and fall out of a moving happening.
vehicle. The chance of being
. Two remote vehicle starts have thrown out of the vehicle in a
already been used. crash is increased if the To lock or unlock a door from the
. The vehicle is not in P (Park). doors are not locked. So, all outside of the vehicle, use the
passengers should wear Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Remote Start Ready safety belts properly and the transmitter. Pull the handle once
If the vehicle does not have the doors should be locked from the inside to unlock the door,
remote vehicle start feature, it may whenever the vehicle is and a second time to open it.
have the remote start ready feature. driven.
(Continued)
Power Door Locks Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors. Safety Locks
When locking the doors with the
power lock switch and a door or the
liftgate is open, the doors will lock
five seconds after the last door is
closed. Three chimes sound to
signal that the delayed locking
feature is in use.
Pressing the power lock switch
twice or Q on the RKE transmitter
twice will override the delayed
locking feature and immediately
lock all the doors.
The power door lock switches are This feature will not operate if the Rear door safety locks prevent
on the instrument panel. key is in the ignition. passengers from opening the rear
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the This feature can be programmed. doors from inside the vehicle.
doors. See “Delayed Door Lock” under Press { to activate the safety locks.
Vehicle Personalization on When activated, the LED light in the
page 5‑30. switch changes to amber.
Pressing the button again
deactivates the safety locks.
Doors WARNING (Continued)

Press the touchpad located in the
handle of the liftgate, above the
license plate, and lift up to open.
Liftgate (Manual) . Adjust the Climate Control
system to a setting that Do not press the touchpad while
closing the liftgate. This will cause
{ WARNING brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the the liftgate to be unlatched.
Exhaust gases can enter the highest setting. See Climate Always close the liftgate before
vehicle if it is driven with the Control System in the Index. driving.
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with For more information about
any objects that pass through the carbon monoxide, see Engine Liftgate (Power)
seal between the body and the Exhaust on page 9‑33.
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine Power Liftgate Operation
exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot be
Notice: If you open the liftgate
without checking for overhead
{ WARNING
seen or smelled. It can cause obstructions such as a garage
unconsciousness and even death. Exhaust gases can enter the
door, you could damage the vehicle if it is driven with the
If the vehicle must be driven with liftgate or the liftgate glass. liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: Always check to make sure the any objects that pass through the
area above and behind the liftgate seal between the body and the
. Close all of the windows. is clear before opening it.
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
. Fully open the air outlets on Unlock the vehicle before opening exhaust contains carbon
or under the instrument the liftgate. monoxide (CO) which cannot be
panel.
seen or smelled. It can cause
(Continued) unconsciousness and even death.
(Continued)
On vehicles with a power liftgate,

WARNING (Continued) the switch is on the overhead
console. The vehicle must be in
If the vehicle must be driven with P (Park) to use the power feature.
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: The taillamps flash when the power
. Close all of the windows. liftgate moves.
. Fully open the air outlets on
or under the instrument { WARNING
panel.
You or others could be injured if
. Adjust the Climate Control caught in the path of the power
system to a setting that liftgate. Make sure there is no one
brings in only outside air and in the way of the liftgate as it is
set the fan speed to the Choose the power liftgate mode by
opening and closing. turning the dial on the switch until
highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index. the indicator lines up with the
Notice: If you open the liftgate desired position. The vehicle must
. If the vehicle is equipped with without checking for overhead be in P (Park).
a power liftgate, disable the obstructions such as a garage
power liftgate function. The three modes are:
door, you could damage the
For more information about liftgate or the liftgate glass. MAX: The liftgate power opens to
carbon monoxide, see Engine Always check to make sure the the full open height.
Exhaust on page 9‑33. area above and behind the liftgate 3/4: The liftgate power opens to a
is clear before opening it. reduced open height that can be set
The power liftgate has three modes by the vehicle operator. Use this
of operation. Mode selection is setting to prevent the liftgate from
controlled by the interior mode opening into overhead obstructions
switch. such as a garage door or roof
mounted cargo during power

. Pressing the touchpad switch on There is a minimum distance that
operation. The liftgate can still be the liftgate outside handle, with the power liftgate must already be
fully opened manually. all doors unlocked, to open the open for the system to hold it open.
liftgate. If movement is stopped below that
OFF: The liftgate only operates
manually in this position. minimum, the liftgate closes.
Manual operation of a liftgate that Do not force the liftgate open or

also has power operation requires closed during a power cycle.
more effort than a standard manual The power liftgate may be
liftgate. temporarily disabled under extreme
In either the MAX or the 3/4 mode, temperatures or low battery
the liftgate can be power opened conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate
and closed by: can still be operated manually.
If you shift the transmission out of
. First pressing K and then P (Park) while the power function is
pressing and holding V on the in progress, the liftgate power
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) function will continue to completion.
transmitter until the liftgate starts Press and release & on the If you shift the transmission out of
moving. See Remote Keyless liftgate adjacent to the latch to close P (Park) and accelerate before the
Entry (RKE) System Operation the liftgate. power liftgate latch is closed, the
on page 2‑3. liftgate may reverse to the open
Pressing any button, or the position. Cargo could fall out of the
. Pressing the power liftgate touchpad switch, while the liftgate is vehicle. Always make sure the
button in the center of the mode moving stops it. Pressing the button
switch on the overhead console, power liftgate is closed and latched
or RKE switch again reverses the before you drive away.
with the driver door unlocked. direction. The touchpad switch
will stop the liftgate from moving.
If you power open the liftgate and Pinch sensors are located on the When power opened with the
the liftgate support struts have lost side edges of the liftgate. If an 3/4 mode selected, the liftgate
pressure, the turn signals flash and object is caught between the liftgate stops at the new set position.
a chime sounds. The liftgate stays and the body and presses against If you do not hear the audible and
open temporarily, then slowly this sensor, the liftgate will reverse visual feedback when setting the
closes. See your dealer for service direction and open fully. The liftgate intermediate stop position, you are
before using the liftgate. will remain open until it is activated attempting to set the height below
again or closed manually. the 3/4 open height minimum
Obstacle Detection Features
Power Liftgate 3/4 Mode (approximately 1.5 m or 5 ft). The
If the liftgate encounters an obstacle liftgate cannot be set below that
during a power open or close cycle, To program the liftgate opening minimum and the new setting will
a warning chime will sound and the height: not be recorded.
liftgate will automatically reverse 1. Turn the liftgate switch to either
direction to the full closed or open the MAX, or the 3/4 mode Manual Operation of Power
position. After removing the position and power open the Liftgate
obstruction, the power liftgate liftgate. To change the liftgate to manual
operation can be used again. If the
2. Stop the liftgate movement at operation, turn the mode switch to
liftgate encounters multiple
the desired height by pressing the OFF position.
obstacles on the same power cycle,
the power function will deactivate. any liftgate switch. Manually With the power liftgate disabled and
The MANUALLY CLOSE POWER adjust the liftgate position if all of the doors unlocked, the liftgate
LIFTGATE warning message in the required. can be manually opened and
Driver Information Center (DIC) will 3. Press and hold the button on the closed. Manual operation of a
display. After removing the liftgate adjacent to the latch until liftgate that also has power
obstructions, the liftgate will resume the turn signals flash and a beep operation requires more effort than
normal power operation. sounds to indicate that the new a standard manual liftgate.
setting is recorded.
To open the liftgate, press the Vehicle Security Press V on the RKE transmitter to
touchpad on the handle on the open the liftgate without setting off
outside of the liftgate, and lift the This vehicle has theft-deterrent the alarm. The system rearms when
gate open. To close the liftgate, use features; however, they do not make the liftgate is closed.
the pull cup to lower the liftgate and it impossible to steal.
close. With the power liftgate Disarming the System
disabled, the liftgate electric latch Anti-Theft Alarm System To disarm the system, do one of the
will still power latch once contact is following:
made with the striker. Always close This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm
system.
the liftgate before driving. . Press K on the RKE transmitter.
If the RKE button is pressed while Arming the System . Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
power operation is disabled, the turn To arm the system, do one of the
signals flash and the liftgate will
. Allow the alarm to time out after
following: about 30 seconds and reset
not move.
. Press Q on the RKE transmitter. itself.
The liftgate has an electric latch.
. Lock the vehicle using the key in The alarm automatically disarms.
If the battery is disconnected or has
low voltage, the liftgate will not the driver door. If the system is armed and any door
open. The liftgate will resume The alarm automatically arms after is unlocked without pressing K on
operation when the battery is about 30 seconds. The security the RKE transmitter, the alarm
reconnected and charged. light, located on the instrument sounds.
panel, flashes.
How to Detect a Tamper The vehicle is automatically When trying to start the vehicle, the
Condition immobilized when the key is security light comes on briefly when
removed from the ignition. the ignition is turned on.
If K is pressed and the horn
The system is automatically If the engine does not start and the
sounds, an attempted break-in has
disarmed when the vehicle is security light stays on, there is a
occurred while the system was
started with the correct key. The key problem with the system. Turn the
armed.
uses a transponder that matches an ignition off and try again.
If the alarm has been activated, the immobilizer control unit in the If the engine still does not start, and
THEFT ATTEMPTED message will vehicle and automatically disarms the key appears to be undamaged
appear on the DIC. See Key and the system. Only an authorized key or the light continues to stay on, try
Lock Messages on page 5‑27 for starts the vehicle. The vehicle may another ignition key. If the engine
additional information. not start if the key is damaged. does not start with the other key, the
vehicle needs service. If the vehicle
Immobilizer does start, the first key may be
See Radio Frequency Statement on damaged. See your dealer who can
page 13‑16 for information service the theft-deterrent system
regarding Part 15 of the Federal and have a new key made.
Communications Commission (FCC) Do not leave the key or device that
rules and Industry Canada disarms or deactivates the
Standards RSS-210/220/310. The security light, located in the
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
instrument panel cluster, comes on
Immobilizer Operation if there is a problem with arming or
disarming the theft-deterrent
This vehicle has a passive system.
theft-deterrent system.
The system does not have to be
manually armed or disarmed.
Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors 2. Press the arrows on the control

pad to move each mirror in the
desired direction.
Convex Mirrors
3. Return the selector switch to the
middle position.
{ WARNING
A convex mirror can make things, Heated Mirrors
like other vehicles, look farther For vehicles with heated mirrors:
away than they really are. If you
The heated outside rearview mirrors
cut too sharply into the right lane,
turn on when the rear window
you could hit a vehicle on the
defogger is on and help to clear fog
right. Check the inside mirror or or frost from the surface of the
glance over your shoulder before mirrors.
changing lanes.
Controls for the outside power < (Rear Window Defogger): This
mirrors are on the driver door. button is on the climate control
The passenger side mirror is convex panel.
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is To adjust the mirrors:
curved so more can be seen from 1. Move the selector switch to See “Rear Window Defogger” under
the driver seat. L (left) or R (right) to choose Automatic Climate Control System
the driver or passenger mirror. on page 8‑3 for more information.
Park Tilt Mirrors Interior Mirrors vehicle behind you. The dimming
feature comes on and the indicator
If the vehicle is equipped with light comes on each time the vehicle
memory mirrors, there is an option Manual Rearview Mirror is started.
to have the mirrors tilt down, when Hold the inside rearview mirror in
in R (Reverse), to more easily see O : Press to turn automatic
the center and move it for a clearer dimming on or off.
the ground near the vehicle. view behind the vehicle. Adjust the
When the vehicle is shifted to mirror to avoid glare from the If the vehicle has a rear vision
R (Reverse), both the driver and headlamps behind you. Push the camera (RVC) the O button for
passenger mirrors will tilt downward. tab forward for daytime use and pull turning the automatic dimming
They will return to their previous it for nighttime use. feature on or off will not be
position when the vehicle is shifted Vehicles with OnStar® have three available. See Rear Vision Camera
out of R (Reverse), the ignition is additional control buttons located at (RVC) on page 9‑46 for more
turned to OFF, or the vehicle is left the bottom of the mirror. See your information.
in R (Reverse) for an extended dealer for more information on the Vehicles with OnStar® have three
period of time. system and how to subscribe to additional control buttons located at
This feature can be turned on OnStar. See the OnStar Owner's the bottom of the mirror. See your
or off. See Vehicle Personalization Guide for more information about dealer for more information on the
on page 5‑30. the services OnStar provides. system and how to subscribe to
OnStar. See the OnStar Owner's
Automatic Dimming Guide for more information about
the services OnStar provides.
Rearview Mirror
The vehicle may have an automatic Cleaning the Mirror
dimming inside rearview mirror. Do not spray glass cleaner directly
Automatic dimming reduces the on the mirror. Use a soft towel
glare from the headlamps of the dampened with water.
Windows Power Windows
{ WARNING { WARNING
Leaving children, helpless adults, Leaving children in a vehicle with
or pets in a vehicle with the the keys is dangerous for many
windows closed is dangerous. reasons. Children or others could
They can be overcome by the be badly injured or even killed.
extreme heat and suffer They could operate the power
permanent injuries or even death windows or other controls or even
from heat stroke. Never leave a make the vehicle move. The
child, a helpless adult, or a pet windows will function and they
alone in a vehicle, especially with The vehicle aerodynamics are could be seriously injured or killed
designed to improve fuel economy if caught in the path of a closing
the windows closed in warm or
performance. This may result in a window. Do not leave keys in a
hot weather.
pulsing sound when either rear vehicle with children.
window is down and the front
windows are up. To reduce the When there are children in the
sound, open either a front window rear seat use the window lockout
or the sunroof (if equipped). button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.
ACC/ACCESSORY, or in Retained Window Lockout

Accessory Power (RAP). See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
on page 9‑30.
Press or pull on the switch to lower
or raise the window.
Express Down Windows
Windows that have the express‐
down feature allow the windows to
be lowered without holding the
switch. Press the window switch
The power window controls are on fully and release it to activate the
each of the side doors. express‐down feature. The express
mode can be canceled at any time
The driver door also has switches o (Window Lockout): The window
by briefly pressing, or pulling the
that control the passenger and rear lockout switch is on the driver door.
switch.
windows. The power windows work This feature prevents the rear
when the ignition is in ON/RUN or passenger windows from operating,
except from the driver position.
Press the switch to turn the lockout
feature on or off. An indicator light
shows the feature is on.
Sun Visors Roof

Sunroof
On vehicles with a sunroof, the
switches used to operate it are on
the headliner above the rearview
mirror. The ignition must be in ON/
RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or in
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) to
operate the sunroof. See Ignition
Positions on page 9‑27 and
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) . Press and hold the front or rear
on page 9‑30. of the driver side switch to open
or close the sunroof. The
Pull the sun visor down to block sunshade automatically opens
glare. Detach the sun visor from the with the sunroof, but must be
center mount to pivot to the side closed manually.
window, or to extend along the rod,
if available. . Press and hold the rear of the
passenger side switch to vent
the sunroof. Press and hold the
front of the switch to close.
Express-open/Express-close Periodically open the sunroof and

remove any obstacles or loose
Press and release the front or
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
rear of the driver side switch to
roof sealing area using a clean
express-open or express-close
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
the sunroof.
remove grease from the sunroof.
Anti-Pinch Feature
If an object is in the path of the
sunroof when it is closing, the
anti-pinch feature detects the object
and stops the sunroof from closing
at the point of the obstruction. The
sunroof then returns to the full-open Dirt and debris may collect on the
position. sunroof seal or in the track. This
could cause an issue with sunroof
operation, noise, or plugging
the water drainage system.
2 NOTES
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-22

Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Restraints Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-42
Airbag System Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-44
Head Restraints Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Lower Anchors and Tethers
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-26 for Children (LATCH
Front Seats When Should an Airbag System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Replacing LATCH System
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-3 What Makes an Airbag Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Securing Child Restraints
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 How Does an Airbag (Rear Seat ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 Securing Child Restraints
What Will You See After an (Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-54
Rear Seats Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Safety Belts Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
How to Wear Safety Belts Adding Equipment to the
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-36
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-37
Safety Belt Use During Replacing Airbag System
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front and rear seats
have head restraints in all outboard
seating positions.
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not Adjust the head restraint so that the 1. Pull the head restraint up to
drive until the head restraints for top of the restraint is at the same raise it. To lower the head
all occupants are installed and height as the top of the occupant's restraint, press the release
adjusted properly. head. This position reduces the button, located on the head
chance of a neck injury in a crash. restraint post on the top of the
seatback, while you push the
head restraint down.
2. Push down on the head restraint
after the button is released to
make sure that it is locked in
place.
The vehicle's rear seat head
restraints are not adjustable.
The head restraints are not
designed to be removed.
Front Seats Power Seat Adjustment

Four‐Way Power Driver Seat
Seat Adjustment
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
To adjust a manual seat:
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when 1. Pull the handle at the front of the
the vehicle is not moving. seat cushion.
2. Move the seat forward or A. Seat Position Handle
rearward to adjust the seat B. Height Adjustment Control
position.
To adjust a power seat, if equipped:
3. Release the handle to stop the
seat from moving.
. Move the seat forward or
rearward using the handle under
4. Try to move the seat back and the front of the seat cushion (A).
forth to be sure it is locked in See Seat Adjustment on
place. page 3‑3.
. Raise or lower the entire seat by
moving the control (B) up
or down.
To adjust the seatback, see

. Raise or lower the entire seat by mirror positions. These manually
Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑6. moving the entire control up stored positions are referred to as
or down. Button Memory positions.
To adjust the lumbar support, see
Lumbar Adjustment on page 3‑6. To adjust the seatback, see The vehicle will also automatically
Reclining Seatbacks on page 3‑6. save driver seat and outside mirror
Eight‐Way Power Seats positions to the current driver
To adjust the lumbar support, see
Lumbar Adjustment on page 3‑6. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter when the ignition is
Memory Seat and Mirrors turned off. These automatically
stored positions are referred to as
RKE Memory positions. See
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation on page 2‑3 for
more information.
Storing Button Memory Positions
To save positions into Button
Memory:
1. Adjust the driver seat, seatback
To adjust a power seat, if equipped: recliner, and both outside mirrors
. Move the seat forward or to the desired driving positions.
rearward by sliding the control 2. Press and release the
forward or rearward. On vehicles with the memory MEM (Memory) button.
feature, the “1” and “2” buttons on
. Raise or lower the front or rear the outboard side of the driver seat 3. Press “1” until a beep sounds.
part of the seat cushion by are used to manually save and
moving the front or rear of the 4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for a
recall the driver seat and outside second driver using “2.”
control up or down.
Recalling Button Memory Recalling RKE Memory Positions This feature is turned on or off using
Positions (Memory Remote Recall) the vehicle personalization menu.
To recall the manually saved The Memory Remote Recall feature See “Memory Remote Recall” under
Button Memory positions, press and can recall the driver seat and Vehicle Personalization on
hold “1” or “2.” The driver seat and outside mirrors to previously stored page 5‑30 for more information.
outside mirrors move to the RKE Memory positions when To stop recall movement, press any
positions stored to those buttons entering the vehicle. of the memory, power mirror,
when pressed. Releasing “1” or “2” Every time the ignition is turned off, or power seat controls.
before the stored positions are the positions of the driver seat and If something has blocked the driver
reached stops the recall. outside mirrors are automatically seat while recalling a memory
If something has blocked the driver stored to the RKE transmitter that position, the recall may stop.
seat while recalling a memory was used to start the vehicle. These Remove the obstruction; then press
position, the recall may stop. positions are called RKE Memory and hold the appropriate manual
Remove the obstruction; then press positions and may be different than control for the memory item that is
and hold the appropriate manual the previously mentioned Button not recalling for two seconds. Try
control for the memory item that is Memory positions saved to the recalling the memory position again
not recalling for two seconds. Try “1” or “2” buttons. To automatically by opening the driver door and
recalling the memory position again recall RKE Memory positions, pressing the RKE K button. If the
by pressing the appropriate memory unlock the driver door with the RKE memory position is still not recalling,
button. If the memory position is still transmitter and open the driver door. see your dealer for service.
not recalling, see your dealer for If the driver door is already open,
service. pressing the RKE transmitter K
button will also activate the RKE
Memory recall. The driver seat and
outside mirrors will move to the
previously saved RKE Memory
positions.
Easy Exit Driver Seat Lumbar Adjustment Reclining Seatbacks

This feature moves the seat
Power Lumbar
rearward allowing the driver more
room to exit the vehicle.
{ WARNING
To activate, turn the ignition off and Sitting in a reclined position when
open the driver door. If the driver the vehicle is in motion can be
door is already open, turning the dangerous. Even when buckled
ignition off will activate the easy exit up, the safety belts cannot do
driver seat. their job when reclined like this.
This feature can be turned on or off The shoulder belt cannot do its
using the vehicle personalization job because it will not be against
menu. See “Easy Exit Driver Seat” your body. Instead, it will be in
under Vehicle Personalization on front of you. In a crash, you could
page 5‑30 for more information. go into it, receiving neck or other
To stop recall movement, press one Eight-Way Power Seat Shown, injuries.
of the memory or power seat Four-Way Similar The lap belt cannot do its job
controls. either. In a crash, the belt could
A. Lumbar Switch
If something has blocked the driver go up over your abdomen. The
If available, press and hold the front belt forces would be there, not at
seat while recalling the exit position,
or rear of the switch (A) to increase your pelvic bones. This could
the recall may stop. Remove the
or decrease lumbar support. cause serious internal injuries.
obstruction; then press and hold the
Release the switch when the
power seat control rearward for (Continued)
seatback reaches the desired level
two seconds. Try recalling the exit
of lumbar support.
position again. If the exit position is
still not recalling, see your dealer for
service.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks

WARNING (Continued)
For proper protection when the { WARNING
vehicle is in motion, have the
You can lose control of the
seatback upright. Then sit well
vehicle if you try to adjust a
back in the seat and wear the
manual driver seat while the
safety belt properly.
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving. To recline a manual seatback:
1. Lift the lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
{ WARNING desired position, and then
release the lever to lock the
If either seatback is not locked, it seatback in place.
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause 3. Push and pull on the seatback
to make sure it is locked.
injury to the person sitting there.
Do not have a seatback reclined if Always push and pull on the
the vehicle is moving. seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
To return the seatback to the upright Heated Front Seats

position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
{ WARNING
seatback, and the seatback will If you cannot feel temperature
return to the upright position. change or pain to the skin, the
2. Push and pull on the seatback to seat heater may cause burns
make sure it is locked. even at low temperatures. To
reduce the risk of burns, people
Power Reclining Seatbacks with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater,
especially for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on Uplevel Climate Control System
the seat that insulates against Shown, Base Similar
heat, such as a blanket, cushion, If available, the buttons are near the
cover, or similar item. This may climate controls. To operate, the
cause the seat heater to ignition must be in ON/RUN.
overheat. An overheated seat
Press z or J to heat the driver or
heater may cause a burn or may
passenger seat cushion and
damage the seat.
seatback.
To adjust a power seatback, Press the button once for the
if available: highest setting. With each press of
. Tilt the top of the control the button, the heated seat will
rearward to recline. change to the next lower setting,
and then the off setting. Three lights
. Tilt the top of the control forward indicate the highest setting, and
to raise. one light indicates the lowest.
The passenger seat may take Rear Seats

longer to heat up. WARNING (Continued)
Remote Start Heated Seats Split Folding Seatbacks seriously injured. After raising the
When it is cold outside, the heated With this feature, either side of the rear seatback, always check to be
seats can be programmed to turn rear seatback can be folded down sure that the safety belts are
on automatically during a remote for more cargo space. properly routed and attached, and
vehicle start. The heated seats will are not twisted.
be canceled when the ignition is { WARNING
turned on. Press the heated seat To fold the seatback down:
button to use the heated seats after If either seatback is not locked, it
the vehicle is started. could move forward in a sudden Notice: Folding a rear seat with
stop or crash. That could cause the safety belts still fastened may
The heated seat button lights will injury to the person sitting there. cause damage to the seat or the
not turn on during a remote start. safety belts. Always unbuckle the
Always push and pull on the
The temperature of an unoccupied seatbacks to be sure they are safety belts and return them to
seat may be reduced. locked. their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
To program the heated seat feature
to enabled, see “Remote Start Auto 1. Unbuckle the rear safety belts
Heat Seats” under Vehicle and place the front seatbacks in
Personalization on page 5‑30 for { WARNING the upright position. See
more information. A safety belt that is improperly Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3‑6.
routed, not properly attached,
or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
(Continued)
Keep the seatback in the upright, Safety Belts

locked position when not in use.
This section of the manual
To recline the seatback:
describes how to use safety belts
1. Lift and hold the lever on top of properly. It also describes some
the seatback. things not to do with safety belts.
2. Tilt the seatback rearward, then
release the lever when the { WARNING
seatback is in the desired
position. Do not let anyone ride where a
safety belt cannot be worn
To slide the entire seat forward or properly. In a crash, if you or your
rearward:
2. Lift the lever on the top of the passenger(s) are not wearing
1. Lift and hold the release bar safety belts, the injuries can be
seatback.
under the front of the seat much worse. You can hit things
3. Fold the seatback forward. cushion to unlock the seat. inside the vehicle harder or be
The filler panel behind the seat 2. Slide the seat to the desired ejected from the vehicle. You
will fold with the seatback to position. and your passenger(s) can be
span the gap between the rear seriously injured or killed. In the
3. Release the bar.
of the seat and the cargo area, same crash, you might not be,
creating a flat load floor. Do not 4. Try to move the seat back and if you are buckled up. Always
lift the filler panel. forth to ensure the seat is locked fasten your safety belt, and check
into place. that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
In most states and in all Canadian Why Safety Belts Work

{ WARNING provinces, the law requires wearing
When you ride in or on anything,
safety belts. Here is why:
It is extremely dangerous to ride you go as fast as it goes.
in a cargo area, inside or outside You never know if you will be in a
of a vehicle. In a collision, people crash. If you do have a crash, you
riding in these areas are more do not know if it will be a
likely to be seriously injured or serious one.
killed. Do not allow people to ride A few crashes are mild, and some
in any area of your vehicle that is crashes can be so serious that even
not equipped with seats and buckled up, a person would not
safety belts. Be sure everyone in survive. But most crashes are in
the vehicle is in a seat and using between. In many of them, people
a safety belt properly. who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
This vehicle has indicators as a badly hurt or killed.
reminder to buckle the safety belts.
After more than 40 years of safety Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose
See Safety Belt Reminders on
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear. it is just a seat on wheels.
page 5‑10 for additional information.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the The person keeps going until
vehicle. The rider does not stop. stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
With safety belts, you slow down as them. Whether or not an airbag
the vehicle does. You get more time is provided, all occupants still
to stop. You stop over more have to buckle up to get the
distance, and your strongest bones most protection. That is true not
take the forces. That is why safety only in frontal collisions, but
belts make such good sense. especially in side and other
collisions.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts Q: If I am a good driver, and I
never drive far from home,
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle why should I wear safety
after a crash if I am wearing a belts?
safety belt?
A: You may be an excellent driver,
or the instrument panel... A: You could be — whether you are but if you are in a crash — even
wearing a safety belt or not. But one that is not your fault — you
your chance of being conscious and your passenger(s) can be
during and after an accident, so hurt. Being a good driver does
you can unbuckle and get out, is not protect you from things
much greater if you are belted. beyond your control, such as
And you can unbuckle a safety bad drivers.
belt, even if you are
Most accidents occur within
upside down.
40 km (25 mi) of home. And the
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why greatest number of serious
should I have to wear safety injuries and deaths occur at
belts? speeds of less than
A: Airbags are supplemental 65 km/h (40 mph).
systems only; so they work with Safety belts are for everyone.
or the safety belts! safety belts — not instead of
How to Wear Safety Belts First, before you or your bones and you would be less likely
passenger(s) wear a safety belt, to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
Properly there is important information you under it, the belt would apply force
This section is only for people of should know. on your abdomen. This could cause
adult size. serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the
Be aware that there are special
shoulder and across the chest.
things to know about safety belts
These parts of the body are best
and children. And there are different
able to take belt restraining forces.
rules for smaller children and
infants. If a child will be riding in the The shoulder belt locks if there is a
vehicle, see Older Children on sudden stop or crash.
page 3‑38 or Infants and Young
Children on page 3‑40. Follow those
rules for everyone's protection.
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are Sit up straight and always keep your
wearing safety belts. feet on the floor in front of you. The
lap part of the belt should be worn
Occupants who are not buckled up low and snug on the hips, just
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a touching the thighs. In a crash, this
crash. And they can strike others in applies force to the strong pelvic
the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.
Q: What is wrong with this? Q: What is wrong with this?

{ WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if the
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
you could slide under the lap belt
and apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
lap belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching
the thighs.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. A: The lap belt is too loose. It will
It will not give as much not give nearly as much
protection this way. protection this way.
{ WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if the
shoulder belt is too loose. In a
crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase
injury. The shoulder belt should fit
snugly against your body.
Q: What is wrong with this?

WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
the pelvic bones. This could You can be seriously injured if the
cause serious internal injuries. belt goes over an armrest like
Always buckle the belt into the this. The belt would be much too
buckle nearest you. high. In a crash, you can slide
under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied on the
Q: What is wrong with this? abdomen, not on the pelvic
bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong

buckle.
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if the
belt is buckled in the wrong place
like this. In a crash, the belt would
go up over your abdomen. The A: The belt is over an armrest.
belt forces would be there, not on
(Continued)
Q: What is wrong with this?

WARNING (Continued) { WARNING
belt would apply too much force You can be seriously injured by
to the ribs, which are not as not wearing the lap-shoulder belt
strong as shoulder bones. You properly. In a crash, you would
could also severely injure internal not be restrained by the shoulder
organs like your liver or spleen. belt. Your body could move too
The shoulder belt should go over far forward increasing the chance
the shoulder and across the of head and neck injury. You
chest. might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
Q: What is wrong with this? applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
A: The shoulder belt is worn under injuries. The shoulder belt should
the arm. It should be worn over go over the shoulder and across
the shoulder at all times. the chest.
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
you wear the shoulder belt under
your arm. In a crash, your body
would move too far forward,
which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the
(Continued) A: The belt is behind the body.
Q: What is wrong with this? Lap-Shoulder Belt

All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see “Seats”
in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull
the belt across you. Do not let it 3. Push the latch plate into the
get twisted. buckle until it clicks.
A: The belt is twisted across
the body. The lap-shoulder belt may lock if Pull up on the latch plate to
you pull the belt across you very make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
{ WARNING quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Belt Extender on page 3‑22.
You can be seriously injured by a Then pull the belt across you Position the release button on
twisted belt. In a crash, you would more slowly. the buckle so that the safety belt
not have the full width of the belt If the shoulder portion of a could be quickly unbuckled if
to spread impact forces. If a belt passenger belt is pulled out all necessary.
is twisted, make it straight so it the way, the child restraint
can work properly, or ask your locking feature may be engaged.
dealer to fix it. If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt Adjust the height so the shoulder

height adjuster, move it to the portion of the belt is on the shoulder
height that is right for you. See and not falling off of it. The belt
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster” should be close to, but not
later in this section for contacting, the neck. Improper
instructions on use and shoulder belt height adjustment
important safety information. could reduce the effectiveness of
the safety belt in a crash. See How
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
page 3‑14.
To unlatch the belt, push the button

on the buckle.
Before a door is closed, be sure the
safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
up on the shoulder belt.
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
height adjuster for the driver and
Move the height adjuster up to the
right front passenger seating
desired position by pushing up on
positions.
the height adjuster.
After the height adjuster is set to the Pretensioners work only once. If the There is one guide for each outside
desired position, try to move it down pretensioners are activated in a passenger position in the rear seat.
without pressing the release crash, the pretensioners and Here is how to install a comfort
button (A) to make sure it has possibly other parts of the safety guide to the safety belt:
locked into position. Press the belt system will need to be replaced.
release button to lower the height See Replacing Safety Belt System
adjuster. Parts After a Crash on page 3‑23.
Safety Belt Pretensioners Rear Safety Belt Comfort
This vehicle has safety belt Guides
pretensioners for front outboard This vehicle may have rear shoulder
occupants. Although the safety belt belt comfort guides. If not, they are
pretensioners cannot be seen, they available through your dealer. The
are part of the safety belt assembly. guides may provide added safety
They can help tighten the safety belt comfort for older children who
belts during the early stages of a have outgrown booster seats and
moderate to severe frontal and near for some adults. When installed and
frontal crash if the threshold properly adjusted, the comfort guide 1. Remove the guide from its
conditions for pretensioner positions the belt away from the storage pocket on the side of the
activation are met. And, if the neck and head. seatback.
vehicle has side impact airbags,
safety belt pretensioners can help
tighten the safety belts in a side
crash or a rollover event.
WARNING (Continued)
and across the chest. These parts
of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
2. Place the guide over the belt, 3. The belt should not be twisted
and insert the two edges of the and it should lie flat. The elastic
belt into the slots of the guide. cord must be under the belt and
the guide on top.
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is not properly
worn may not provide the 4. Buckle, position, and release
protection needed in a crash. The the safety belt as described
person wearing the belt could be previously in this section. Make
sure the shoulder portion of the
seriously injured. The shoulder
belt is on the shoulder and not
belt should go over the shoulder
falling off of it. The belt should
(Continued) be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
To remove and store the comfort Safety Belt Extender

guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt can If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
be removed from the guide. Slide around you, you should use it.
the guide back into its storage But if a safety belt is not long
pocket located on the side of the enough, your dealer will order you
seatback. an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you
Safety Belt Use During will wear, so the extender will be
Pregnancy long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone
Safety belts work for everyone, else use it, and use it only for the
including pregnant women. Like all seat it is made to fit. The extender
occupants, they are more likely to A pregnant woman should wear a
lap-shoulder belt, and the lap has been designed for adults. Never
be seriously injured if they do not use it for securing child seats. To
wear safety belts. portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding, wear it, attach it to the regular safety
throughout the pregnancy. belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with
The best way to protect the fetus is the extender.
to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely Safety System Check
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for Now and then, check that the safety
anyone, the key to making safety belt reminder light, safety belts,
belts effective is wearing them buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
properly. anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system Replacing Safety Belt See your dealer to have the safety
from doing its job. See your dealer belt assemblies inspected or
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
System Parts After a replaced.
safety belts may not protect you in a Crash New parts and repairs may be
crash. They can rip apart under necessary even if the safety belt
impact forces. If a belt is torn or
frayed, get a new one right away.
{ WARNING system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Make sure the safety belt reminder A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle. Have the safety belt pretensioners
light is working. See Safety Belt checked if the vehicle has been in a
Reminders on page 5‑10 for more A damaged safety belt system
may not properly protect the crash, or if the airbag readiness light
information. stays on after you start the vehicle
person using it, resulting in
Keep safety belts clean and dry. serious injury or even death in a or while you are driving. See Airbag
See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑23. Readiness Light on page 5‑11.
crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
Safety Belt Care properly after a crash, have them
Keep belts clean and dry. inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
{ WARNING possible.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.

After a minor crash, replacement of
It may severely weaken them. In safety belts may not be necessary.
a crash, they might not be able to But the safety belt assemblies that
provide adequate protection. were used during any crash may
Clean safety belts only with mild have been stressed or damaged.
soap and lukewarm water.
Airbag System For frontal airbags, the word

AIRBAG will appear on the middle
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
The vehicle has the following part of the steering wheel for the
airbags: driver and on the instrument panel
for the right front passenger.
{ WARNING
. A frontal airbag for the driver.
With seat-mounted side impact You can be severely injured or
. A frontal airbag for the right front killed in a crash if you are not
passenger. airbags, the word AIRBAG will
appear on the side of the seatback wearing a safety belt — even if
. A seat-mounted side impact closest to the door. the vehicle has airbags. Airbags
airbag for the driver. are designed to work with safety
With roof-rail airbags, the word
. A seat-mounted side impact belts, but do not replace them.
AIRBAG will appear along the trim.
airbag for the right front Also, airbags are not designed to
passenger. Airbags are designed to supplement deploy in every crash. In some
the protection provided by safety crashes safety belts are the only
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver belts. Even though today's airbags restraint. See When Should an
and the passenger seated are also designed to help reduce Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑27.
directly behind the driver. the risk of injury from the force of an
. A roof-rail airbag for the right inflating bag, all airbags must inflate Wearing a safety belt during a
front passenger and the very quickly to do their job. crash helps reduce your chance
passenger seated directly of hitting things inside the vehicle
behind the right front passenger. or being ejected from it. Airbags
are “supplemental restraints” to
All of the airbags in the vehicle will the safety belts. Everyone in the
have the word AIRBAG embossed vehicle should wear a safety belt
in the trim or on an attached label
properly — whether or not there is
near the deployment opening.
an airbag for that person.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Airbags inflate with great force, Children who are up against,
faster than the blink of an eye. or very close to, any airbag when
Anyone who is up against, or very it inflates can be seriously injured
close to, any airbag when it or killed. Airbags plus
There is an airbag readiness light
inflates can be seriously injured lap-shoulder belts offer protection
on the instrument panel cluster,
or killed. Do not sit unnecessarily for adults and older children, but
which shows the airbag symbol.
close to any airbag, as you would not for young children and infants.
be if you were sitting on the edge Neither the vehicle's safety belt The system checks the airbag
of the seat or leaning forward. system nor its airbag system is electrical system for malfunctions.
Safety belts help keep you in designed for them. Young The light tells you if there is an
position before and during a children and infants need the electrical problem. See Airbag
crash. Always wear a safety belt, protection that a child restraint Readiness Light on page 5‑11 for
even with airbags. The driver system can provide. Always more information.
should sit as far back as possible secure children properly in the
while still maintaining control of vehicle. To read how, see Older
the vehicle. Children on page 3‑38 or Infants
Occupants should not lean on or and Young Children on
sleep against the door or side page 3‑40.
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
Where Are the Airbags?
The right front passenger frontal Driver Side Shown, Passenger

airbag is in the instrument panel on Side Similar
The driver frontal airbag is in the the passenger side. The seat-mounted side impact
middle of the steering wheel. airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
WARNING (Continued)
When Should an Airbag
Inflate?
that person causing severe injury Frontal airbags are designed to
or even death. The path of an inflate in moderate to severe frontal
inflating airbag must be kept or near-frontal crashes to help
clear. Do not put anything reduce the potential for severe
between an occupant and an injuries mainly to the driver's or right
airbag, and do not attach or put front passenger's head and chest.
anything on the steering wheel However, they are only designed to
hub or on or near any other inflate if the impact exceeds a
airbag covering. predetermined deployment
Driver Side Shown, Passenger threshold. Deployment thresholds
Do not use seat accessories that are used to predict how severe a
Side Similar block the inflation path of a crash is likely to be in time for the
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, seat-mounted side impact airbag. airbags to inflate and help restrain
right front passenger, and second the occupants.
Never secure anything to the roof
row outboard passengers are in the
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags Whether the frontal airbags will or
ceiling above the side windows.
by routing a rope or tie down should deploy is not based on how
through any door or window fast your vehicle is traveling.
{ WARNING opening. If you do, the path of an It depends largely on what you hit,
inflating roof-rail airbag will be the direction of the impact, and how
If something is between an
blocked. quickly your vehicle slows down.
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
(Continued)
Frontal airbags may inflate at Frontal airbags are not intended to the system's designed threshold
different crash speeds. For inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear level. The threshold level can vary
example: impacts, or in many side impacts. with specific vehicle design.
. If the vehicle hits a stationary In addition, the vehicle has Seat-mounted side impact airbags
object, the airbags could inflate dual-stage frontal airbags. are not intended to inflate in frontal
at a different crash speed than if Dual-stage airbags adjust the impacts, near-frontal impacts,
the vehicle hits a moving object. restraint according to crash severity. rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-rail
. If the vehicle hits an object that The vehicle has electronic frontal airbags are not intended to inflate in
deforms, the airbags could sensors, which help the sensing rear impacts. A seat-mounted side
inflate at a different crash speed system distinguish between a impact airbag is intended to deploy
than if the vehicle hits an object moderate frontal impact and a more on the side of the vehicle that is
that does not deform. severe frontal impact. For moderate struck. Both roof-rail airbags will
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags deploy when either side of the
. If the vehicle hits a narrow object inflate at a level less than full vehicle is struck, or if the sensing
(like a pole), the airbags could deployment. For more severe frontal system predicts that the vehicle is
inflate at a different crash speed impacts, full deployment occurs. about to roll over, or in a severe
than if the vehicle hits a wide frontal impact.
object (like a wall). The vehicle has seat-mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags. See In any particular crash, no one can
. If the vehicle goes into an object Airbag System on page 3‑24. say whether an airbag should have
at an angle, the airbags could Seat-mounted side impact and inflated simply because of the
inflate at a different crash speed roof-rail airbags are intended to damage to a vehicle or because of
than if the vehicle goes straight inflate in moderate to severe side what the repair costs were. For
into the object. crashes. In addition, these roof-rail frontal airbags, inflation is
Thresholds can also vary with airbags are intended to inflate determined by what the vehicle hits,
specific vehicle design. during a rollover or in a severe the angle of the impact, and how
frontal impact. Seat-mounted side quickly the vehicle slows down. For
impact and roof-rail airbags will seat-mounted side impact and
inflate if the crash severity is above roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and How Does an Airbag full or partial ejection in rollover
severity of the side impact. In a events, although no system can
rollover event, roof-rail airbag
Restrain? prevent all such ejections.
deployment is determined by the In moderate to severe frontal or But airbags would not help in many
direction of the roll. near frontal collisions, even belted types of collisions, primarily
occupants can contact the steering because the occupant's motion is
What Makes an Airbag wheel or the instrument panel. In not toward those airbags. See When
Inflate? moderate to severe side collisions, Should an Airbag Inflate? on
even belted occupants can contact page 3‑27 for more information.
In a deployment event, the sensing the inside of the vehicle.
system sends an electrical signal Airbags should never be regarded
Airbags supplement the protection as anything more than a supplement
triggering a release of gas from the
provided by safety belts. Frontal to safety belts.
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
airbags distribute the force of the
airbag causing the bag to break out
impact more evenly over the
of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
occupant's upper body, stopping the
What Will You See After
the airbag, and related hardware are an Airbag Inflates?
occupant more gradually. Seat‐
all part of the airbag module.
mounted side impact and roof-rail After the frontal airbags and
Frontal airbag modules are located airbags distribute the force of the seat-mounted side impact airbags
inside the steering wheel and impact more evenly over the inflate, they quickly deflate, so
instrument panel. For vehicles with occupant's upper body. quickly that some people may not
seat-mounted side impact airbags, even realize an airbag inflated.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags
there are airbag modules in the side Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
are designed to help contain the
of the front seatbacks closest to the partially inflated for some time after
head and chest of occupants in the
door. For vehicles with roof-rail they deploy. Some components of
outboard seating positions in the
airbags, there are airbag modules in the airbag module may be hot for
first and second rows. The rollover
the ceiling of the vehicle, near the several minutes. For location of the
capable roof-rail airbags are
side windows that have occupant airbag modules, see What Makes
designed to help reduce the risk of
seating positions. an Airbag Inflate? on page 3‑29.
The parts of the airbag that come

into contact with you may be warm, WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming If you experience breathing systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
from the vents in the deflated problems following an airbag appears to be drivable after a
airbags. Airbag inflation does not deployment, you should seek moderate crash, there may be
prevent the driver from seeing out of medical attention. concealed damage that could
the windshield or being able to steer make it difficult to safely operate
the vehicle, nor does it prevent the vehicle.
people from leaving the vehicle. The vehicle has a feature that may
automatically unlock the doors, turn Use caution if you should attempt
on the interior lamps, turn on the to restart the engine after a crash
{ WARNING hazard warning flashers, and shut has occurred.
off the fuel system after the airbags
When an airbag inflates, there
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn In many crashes severe enough to
may be dust in the air. This dust off the interior lamps, and turn off
could cause breathing problems inflate the airbag, windshields are
the hazard warning flashers by broken by vehicle deformation.
for people with a history of using the controls for those
asthma or other breathing trouble. Additional windshield breakage may
features. also occur from the right front
To avoid this, everyone in the
passenger airbag.
vehicle should get out as soon as
it is safe to do so. If you have
{ WARNING . Airbags are designed to inflate
breathing problems but cannot A crash severe enough to inflate only once. After an airbag
get out of the vehicle after an the airbags may have also inflates, you will need some new
airbag inflates, then get fresh air damaged important functions in parts for the airbag system.
by opening a window or a door. If you do not get them, the
the vehicle, such as the fuel
airbag system will not be there
(Continued) system, brake and steering
to help protect you in another
(Continued) crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly The passenger sensing system

other parts. The service manual turns off the right front passenger
for your vehicle covers the need frontal airbag under certain
to replace other parts. conditions. The driver airbag, seat‐
. The vehicle has a crash sensing mounted side impact airbags and
and diagnostic module which the roof-rail airbags are not affected
records information after a United States by the passenger sensing system.
crash. See Vehicle Data The passenger sensing system
Recording and Privacy on works with sensors that are part of
page 13‑14 and Event Data the right front passenger seat. The
Recorders on page 13‑14. sensors are designed to detect the
. Let only qualified technicians presence of a properly-seated
work on the airbag systems. occupant and determine if the right
Improper service can mean that front passenger frontal airbag
Canada should be enabled (may inflate)
an airbag system will not work
properly. See your dealer for The words ON and OFF, or the or not.
service. symbol for on and off, are visible According to accident statistics,
during the system check. If you are children are safer when properly
Passenger Sensing using remote start, if equipped, to secured in a rear seat in the correct
start the vehicle from a distance, child restraint for their weight
System you may not see the system check. and size.
The vehicle has a passenger When the system check is
complete, either the word ON or We recommend that children be
sensing system for the right front
OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will secured in a rear seat, including:
passenger position. The passenger
be visible. See Passenger Airbag an infant or a child riding in a
airbag status indicator will be visible
Status Indicator on page 5‑11. rear-facing child restraint; a child
on the overhead console when the
vehicle is started.
riding in a forward-facing child seat; The passenger sensing system is

an older child riding in a booster WARNING (Continued) designed to turn off the right front
seat; and children, who are large passenger frontal airbag if:
enough, using safety belts. Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
. The right front passenger seat is
A label on the sun visor says, front passenger frontal airbag, no unoccupied.
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in system is fail-safe. No one can . The system determines that an
the front.” This is because the risk to guarantee that an airbag will not infant is present in a child
the rear-facing child is so great, deploy under some unusual restraint.
if the airbag deploys.
circumstance, even though the . A right front passenger takes
airbag is turned off.
{ WARNING Secure rear-facing child restraints
his/her weight off of the seat for
a period of time.
A child in a rear-facing child in a rear seat, even if the airbag . Or, if there is a critical problem
restraint can be seriously injured is off. If you secure a with the airbag system or the
or killed if the right front forward-facing child restraint in passenger sensing system.
passenger airbag inflates. This is the right front seat, always move
When the passenger sensing
because the back of the the front passenger seat as far
system has turned off the right front
rear-facing child restraint would back as it will go. It is better to passenger frontal airbag, the off
be very close to the inflating secure the child restraint in a indicator will light and stay lit to
airbag. A child in a forward-facing rear seat. remind you that the airbag is off.
child restraint can be seriously See Passenger Airbag Status
injured or killed if the right front Indicator on page 5‑11.
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
(Continued)
The passenger sensing system is 4. Reinstall the child restraint

designed to turn on (may inflate) the { WARNING following the directions provided
right front passenger frontal airbag by the child restraint
anytime the system senses that a If the airbag readiness light ever manufacturer and refer to
person of adult size is sitting comes on and stays on, it means Securing Child Restraints (Rear
properly in the right front that something may be wrong Seat ) on page 3‑52 or Securing
passenger seat. with the airbag system. To help Child Restraints (Front
avoid injury to yourself or others, Passenger Seat) on page 3‑54.
When the passenger sensing have the vehicle serviced right
system has allowed the airbag to be 5. If, after reinstalling the child
away. See Airbag Readiness
enabled, the on indicator will light restraint and restarting the
Light on page 5‑11 for more
and stay lit to remind you that the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
airbag is active. information, including important turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
safety information. recline the vehicle seatback and
For some children, including
children in child restraints, and for adjust the seat cushion,
very small adults, the passenger If the On Indicator is Lit for a if adjustable, to make sure that
sensing system may or may not turn Child Restraint the vehicle seatback is not
off the right front passenger frontal pushing the child restraint into
If a child restraint has been installed the seat cushion.
airbag, depending upon the and the on indicator is lit:
person’s seating posture and body Also make sure the child
build. Everyone in the vehicle who 1. Turn the vehicle off. restraint is not trapped under the
has outgrown child restraints 2. Remove the child restraint from vehicle head restraint. If this
should wear a safety belt the vehicle. happens, adjust the head
properly — whether or not there is restraint. See Head Restraints
an airbag for that person. 3. Remove any additional items on page 3‑2.
from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
6. Restart the vehicle. because that person is not sitting Additional Factors Affecting
The passenger sensing system properly in the seat. If this happens, System Operation
may or may not turn off the use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and Safety belts help keep the
airbag for a child in a child passenger in position on the seat
restraint depending upon the enable the right front passenger
frontal airbag: during vehicle maneuvers and
child’s seating posture and body braking, which helps the passenger
build. It is better to secure the 1. Turn the vehicle off. sensing system maintain the
child restraint in a rear seat. 2. Remove any additional material passenger airbag status. See
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an from the seat, such as blankets, “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
cushions, seat covers, seat in the Index for additional
Adult-Size Occupant information about the importance of
heaters, or seat massagers.
proper restraint use.
3. Place the seatback in the fully
upright position. A thick layer of additional material,
such as a blanket or cushion,
4. Have the person sit upright in or aftermarket equipment such as
the seat, centered on the seat seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
cushion, with legs comfortably massagers can affect how well the
extended. passenger sensing system
5. Restart the vehicle and have the operates. We recommend that you
person remain in this position for not use seat covers or other
two to three minutes after the on aftermarket equipment except when
indicator is lit. approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
If a person of adult-size is sitting in page 3‑36 for more information
the right front passenger seat, but about modifications that can affect
the off indicator is lit, it could be how the system operates.
A wet seat can affect the The on indicator may be lit if an Your dealer and the service manual
performance of the passenger object, such as a briefcase, have information about servicing the
sensing system. Here is how: handbag, grocery bag, laptop or vehicle and the airbag system. To
. The passenger sensing system other electronic device, is put on an purchase a service manual, see
may turn off the passenger unoccupied seat. If this is not Service Publications Ordering
airbag when liquid is soaked into desired remove the object from Information on page 13‑12.
the seat. If this happens, the off the seat.
indicator will be lit, and the { WARNING
airbag readiness light on the { WARNING For up to 10 seconds after the
instrument panel will also be lit.
Stowing of articles under the ignition is turned off and the
. Liquid pooled on the seat that passenger seat or between the battery is disconnected, an airbag
has not soaked in may make it passenger seat cushion and can still inflate during improper
more likely that the passenger seatback may interfere with the service. You can be injured if you
sensing system will enable (turn proper operation of the passenger are close to an airbag when it
on) the passenger airbag while a
sensing system. inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
child restraint or child occupant
is on the seat. If the passenger They are probably part of the
airbag is turned on, the on airbag system. Be sure to follow
Servicing the proper service procedures, and
indicator will be lit.
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle make sure the person performing
If the passenger seat gets wet, dry work for you is qualified to do so.
the seat immediately. If the airbag Airbags affect how the vehicle
readiness light is lit, do not install a should be serviced. There are parts
child restraint or allow anyone to of the airbag system in several
occupy the seat. See Airbag places around the vehicle.
Readiness Light on page 5‑11 for
important safety information.
Adding Equipment to the position, which includes sensors for Customer Assistance are in
that are part of the passenger Step Two of the Customer
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle seat. The passenger sensing Satisfaction Procedure in this
Q: Is there anything I might add system may not operate properly manual. See Customer
to or change about the vehicle if the original seat trim is Satisfaction Procedure on
that could keep the airbags replaced with non-GM covers, page 13‑1.
from working properly? upholstery or trim, or with GM If the vehicle has rollover
covers, upholstery or trim roof-rail airbags, see Different
A: Yes. If you add things that
designed for a different vehicle. Size Tires and Wheels on
change the vehicle's frame,
Any object, such as an page 10‑59 for additional
bumper system, height, front end
aftermarket seat heater or a important information.
or side sheet metal, they may
comfort enhancing pad or
keep the airbag system from Q: Because I have a disability,
device, installed under or on top
working properly. Changing or I have to get my vehicle
of the seat fabric, could also
moving any parts of the front modified. How can I find out
interfere with the operation of
seats, safety belts, the airbag whether this will affect my
the passenger sensing system.
sensing and diagnostic module, airbag system?
This could either prevent proper
steering wheel, instrument
deployment of the passenger A: If you have questions, call
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
airbag(s) or prevent the Customer Assistance. The
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
passenger sensing system from phone numbers and addresses
trim, overhead console, front
properly turning off the for Customer Assistance are in
sensors, side impact sensors,
passenger airbag(s). See Step Two of the Customer
rollover sensor module, or airbag
Passenger Sensing System on Satisfaction Procedure in this
wiring can affect the operation of
page 3‑31. manual. See Customer
the airbag system.
If you have questions, call Satisfaction Procedure on
In addition, the vehicle has a page 13‑1.
Customer Assistance. The
passenger sensing system
phone numbers and addresses
for the right front passenger
In addition, your dealer and the Replacing Airbag System If the airbag readiness light stays on
service manual have information after the vehicle is started or comes
about the location of the airbag
Parts After a Crash on when you are driving, the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic system may not work properly. Have
module and airbag wiring. { WARNING the vehicle serviced right away. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
Airbag System Check A crash can damage the airbag page 5‑11 for more information.
systems in the vehicle.
The airbag system does not need A damaged airbag system may
regularly scheduled maintenance or not work properly and may not
replacement. Make sure the airbag protect you and your
readiness light is working. See passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
Airbag Readiness Light on in serious injury or even death.
page 5‑11 for more information. To help make sure the airbag
Notice: If an airbag covering is systems are working properly
damaged, opened, or broken, the after a crash, have them
airbag may not work properly. Do inspected and any necessary
not open or break the airbag replacements made as soon as
coverings. If there are any possible.
opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the If an airbag inflates, you will need to
location of the airbag modules, replace airbag system parts. See
see What Makes an Airbag your dealer for service.
Inflate? on page 3‑29. See your
dealer for service.
Child Restraints booster. Use a booster seat with a

lap-shoulder belt until the child
Q: What is the proper way to
wear safety belts?
passes the fit test below:
Older Children A: An older child should wear a
. Sit all the way back on the seat. lap-shoulder belt and get the
Do the knees bend at the seat additional restraint a shoulder
edge? If yes, continue. If no, belt can provide. The shoulder
return to the booster seat. belt should not cross the face or
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. neck. The lap belt should fit
Does the shoulder belt rest on snugly below the hips, just
the shoulder? If yes, continue. touching the top of the thighs.
If no, try using the rear safety This applies belt force to the
belt comfort guide. See “Rear child's pelvic bones in a crash.
Safety Belt Comfort Guides” It should never be worn over the
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on abdomen, which could cause
page 3‑18 for more information. severe or even fatal internal
If the shoulder belt still does not injuries in a crash.
rest on the shoulder, then return Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Older children who have outgrown
to the booster seat. Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
booster seats should wear the
. Does the lap belt fit low and page 3‑18.
vehicle safety belts.
snug on the hips, touching the According to accident statistics,
The manufacturer's instructions that
thighs? If yes, continue. If no, children and infants are safer when
come with the booster seat state the
return to the booster seat. properly restrained in a child
weight and height limitations for that
. Can proper safety belt fit be restraint system or infant restraint
maintained for the length of the system secured in a rear seating
trip? If yes, continue. If no, position.
return to the booster seat.
In a crash, children who are not

buckled up can strike other people WARNING (Continued)
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older The child could move too far
children need to use safety belts forward increasing the chance of
properly. head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
{ WARNING belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
Never do this. That could cause serious or fatal
Never allow two children to wear injuries. The shoulder belt should
the same safety belt. The safety go over the shoulder and across
belt can not properly spread the the chest.
impact forces. In a crash, the two
{ WARNING
children can be crushed together Never do this.
and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one Never allow a child to wear the
person at a time. safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
(Continued)
Infants and Young Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offer

WARNING (Continued)
protection for adults and older
Children children, but not for young children
Everyone in a vehicle needs and infants. Neither the vehicle's For example, in a crash at only
protection! This includes infants and safety belt system nor its airbag 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
all other children. Neither the system is designed for them. Every infant will suddenly become a
distance traveled nor the age and time infants and young children ride 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
size of the traveler changes the in vehicles, they should have the arms. An infant should be
need, for everyone, to use safety protection provided by appropriate secured in an appropriate
restraints. In fact, the law in every child restraints. restraint.
state in the United States and in Children who are not restrained
every Canadian province says properly can strike other people,
children up to some age must be or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING { WARNING
Never do this.
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is Never hold an infant or a child
wrapped around their neck and while riding in a vehicle. Due to
the safety belt continues to crash forces, an infant or a child
tighten. Never leave children will become so heavy it is not
unattended in a vehicle and never possible to hold it during a crash.
allow children to play with the (Continued)
safety belts.
For most basic types of child

{ WARNING restraints, there are many
different models available. When
Never do this. purchasing a child restraint, be
Children who are up against, sure it is designed to be used in
or very close to, any airbag when a motor vehicle. If it is, the
it inflates can be seriously injured restraint will have a label saying
or killed. Never put a rear-facing that it meets federal motor
child restraint in the right front vehicle safety standards.
seat. Secure a rear-facing child The restraint manufacturer's
restraint in a rear seat. It is also instructions that come with the
better to secure a forward-facing restraint state the weight and
child restraint in a rear seat. If you Q: What are the different types of height limitations for a particular
must secure a forward-facing add-on child restraints? child restraint. In addition, there
child restraint in the right front are many kinds of restraints
A: Add-on child restraints, which
seat, always move the front available for children with
are purchased by the vehicle
passenger seat as far back as it special needs.
owner, are available in four basic
will go. types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
Child Restraint Systems

{ WARNING { WARNING
To reduce the risk of neck and A young child's hip bones are still
head injury during a crash, infants so small that the vehicle's regular
need complete support. This is safety belt may not remain low on
because an infant's neck is not the hip bones, as it should.
fully developed and its head Instead, it may settle up around
weighs so much compared with the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the rest of its body. In a crash, an the belt would apply force on a
infant in a rear-facing child body area that is unprotected by
restraint settles into the restraint, any bony structure. This alone
so the crash forces can be could cause serious or fatal
distributed across the strongest injuries. To reduce the risk of
part of an infant's body, the back serious or fatal injuries during a (A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat
and shoulders. Infants should crash, young children should A rear-facing infant seat (A)
always be secured in rear-facing always be secured in appropriate provides restraint with the seating
child restraints. child restraints. surface against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
Securing an Add-On Child

Restraint in the Vehicle
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat (C) Booster Seats instructions that came with that
A forward-facing child seat (B) A booster seat (C) is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions
provides restraint for the child's designed to improve the fit of the in this manual.
body with the harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of injury,
to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
the LATCH system. See Lower In some areas, Certified Child Where to Put the
Anchors and Tethers for Children Passenger Safety Technicians
(LATCH System) on page 3‑46 for (CPSTs) are available to inspect
Restraint
more information. Children can be and demonstrate how to correctly According to accident statistics,
endangered in a crash if the child use and install child restraints. In children and infants are safer when
restraint is not properly secured in the U.S., refer to the National properly restrained in a child
the vehicle. Highway Traffic Safety restraint system or infant restraint
When securing an add-on child Administration (NHTSA) website to system secured in a rear seating
restraint, refer to the instructions locate the nearest child safety seat position.
that come with the restraint which inspection station. For CPST
We recommend that children and
may be on the restraint itself or in a availability in Canada, check with
child restraints be secured in a rear
booklet, or both, and to this manual. Transport Canada or the Provincial
seat, including: an infant or a child
The child restraint instructions are Ministry of Transportation office.
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
important, so if they are not Securing the Child within the a child riding in a forward-facing
available, obtain a replacement Child Restraint child seat; an older child riding in a
copy from the manufacturer. booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
{ WARNING
A label on your sun visor says,
collision or sudden stop and injure A child can be seriously injured or “Never put a rear-facing child seat in
people in the vehicle. Be sure to killed in a crash if the child is not the front.” This is because the risk to
properly secure any child restraint in properly secured in the child the rear-facing child is so great,
the vehicle — even when no child is restraint. Secure the child if the airbag deploys.
in it. properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.
Depending on where you place the

{ WARNING WARNING (Continued) child restraint and the size of the
child restraint, you may not be able
A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints to access adjacent safety belt
restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the airbag assemblies or LATCH anchors for
or killed if the right front is off. If you secure a additional passengers or child
passenger airbag inflates. This is forward-facing child restraint in restraints. Adjacent seating
because the back of the the right front seat, always move positions should not be used if the
rear-facing child restraint would the front passenger seat as far child restraint prevents access to or
be very close to the inflating back as it will go. It is better to interferes with the routing of the
airbag. A child in a forward-facing secure the child restraint in a safety belt.
child restraint can be seriously rear seat. Wherever a child restraint is
injured or killed if the right front See Passenger Sensing System installed, be sure to secure the child
passenger airbag inflates and the on page 3‑31 for additional restraint properly.
passenger seat is in a forward information.
position. Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
Even if the passenger sensing When securing a child restraint in a collision or sudden stop and injure
system has turned off the right rear seating position, study the people in the vehicle. Be sure to
front passenger frontal airbag, no instructions that came with the child properly secure any child restraint in
system is fail-safe. No one can restraint to make sure it is your vehicle — even when no child
guarantee that an airbag will not compatible with this vehicle. is in it.
deploy under some unusual If you need to secure more than
Child restraints and booster seats
circumstance, even though it is one child restraint in the rear seat,
vary considerably in size, and some
turned off. review the following illustrations.
may fit in certain seating positions
(Continued) better than others. Always make Depending on where you place the
sure the child restraint is properly child restraint or the size of the child
secured. restraint, you may not be able to
access certain safety belt The LATCH system uses anchors in

assemblies or LATCH anchors for the vehicle and attachments on the
additional passengers or child child restraint that are made for use
restraints. with the LATCH system.
Configurations for Use of Child Make sure that a LATCH-compatible
Restraints child restraint is properly installed
A. Child restraint or occupant using the anchors, or use the
using safety belt vehicle's safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with
a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the
A. Child restraint using LATCH safety belts to properly secure the
B. Occupant prohibited A. Child restraint or occupant child restraint. A child restraint must
using safety belt never be installed using only the top
tether and anchor.
B. Child restraint using LATCH
In order to use the LATCH system in
Lower Anchors and your vehicle, you need a child
restraint that has LATCH
Tethers for Children attachments. The child restraint
(LATCH System) manufacturer will provide you with
A. Child restraint using LATCH instructions on how to use the child
The LATCH system holds a child restraint and its attachments. The
B. Occupant prohibited restraint during driving or in a crash. following explains how to attach a
C. Child restraint or occupant This system is designed to make child restraint with these
using safety belt installation of a child restraint easier. attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or Top Tether Anchor Your child restraint may have a
child restraints have lower anchors single tether (A) or a dual tether (C).
and attachments or top tether Either will have a single
anchors and attachments. attachment (B) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Lower Anchors
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top forward-facing child restraints have
of the child restraint to the vehicle. a top tether, and that the tether be
A top tether anchor is built into the attached. Be sure to read and follow
vehicle. The top tether the instructions for your child
attachment (B) on the child restraint restraint.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars connects to the top tether anchor in
built into the vehicle. There are two the vehicle in order to reduce the
lower anchors for each LATCH forward movement and rotation of
seating position that will the child restraint during driving or in
accommodate a child restraint with a crash.
lower attachments (B).
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Do not secure a child restraint in a

Anchor Locations position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
Top Tether Anchors position. See Where to Put the
The top tether anchors for each rear Restraint on page 3‑44 for
seating position are located on the additional information.
Rear Seat
back of the rear seatback. The rear
i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating compartment storage panel/cover
positions with top tether anchors. might need to be adjusted to access
j (Lower Anchor): Seating the anchors. Be sure to use an
positions with two lower anchors. anchor located on the same side of
The rear outboard seating positions the vehicle as the seating position
have exposed metal anchors where the child restraint will be
located in the crease between the placed.
seatback and the seat cushion.
Securing a Child Restraint

Designed for the LATCH { WARNING WARNING (Continued)
System Do not attach more than one child of the retractor to set the lock,
restraint to a single anchor. if the vehicle has one, after the
{ WARNING Attaching more than one child child restraint has been installed.
restraint to a single anchor could
If a LATCH-type child restraint is cause the anchor or attachment
not attached to anchors, the child Notice: Do not let the LATCH
to come loose or even break attachments rub against the
restraint will not be able to protect during a crash. A child or others
the child correctly. In a crash, the vehicle’s safety belts. This may
could be injured. To reduce the damage these parts. If necessary,
child could be seriously injured or risk of serious or fatal injuries
killed. Install a LATCH-type child move buckled safety belts to
during a crash, attach only one avoid rubbing the LATCH
restraint properly using the child restraint per anchor. attachments.
anchors, or use the vehicle safety
belts to secure the restraint, Do not fold the empty rear seat
following the instructions that with a safety belt buckled. This
came with the child restraint and { WARNING could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
the instructions in this manual.
Children can be seriously injured safety belt to its stowed position,
or strangled if a shoulder belt is before folding the seat.
wrapped around their neck and Make sure to attach the child
the safety belt continues to restraint at the proper anchor
tighten. Buckle any unused safety location.
belts behind the child restraint so
This system is designed to make
children cannot reach them. Pull
installation of child restraints easier.
the shoulder belt all the way out When using lower anchors, do not
(Continued) use the vehicle's safety belts.
Instead use the vehicle's anchors 2. If the child restraint manufacturer single tether is being used,
and child restraint attachments to recommends that the top tether route the tether over the
secure the restraints. Some be attached, attach and tighten seatback.
restraints also use another vehicle the top tether to the top tether
anchor to secure a top tether. anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
1. Attach and tighten the lower child restraint instructions and
attachments to the lower the following steps:
anchors. If the child restraint 2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
does not have lower 2.2. Route, attach and tighten
attachments or the desired the top tether according to
seating position does not have your child restraint
lower anchors, secure the child instructions and the
restraint with the top tether and following instructions:
the safety belts. Refer to the
. If the position being used
child restraint manufacturer does not have a headrest
instructions and the instructions or head restraint and a dual
in this manual. tether is being used, route
the tether over the
1.1. Find the lower anchors for seatback.
the desired seating
position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower . If the position being used
attachments on the child does not have a headrest
restraint to the lower or head restraint and a
anchors.
Replacing LATCH System

Parts After a Crash
{ WARNING
A crash can damage the LATCH
system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
. If the position being used . If the position being used secure the child restraint,
has a fixed headrest or has a fixed headrest or resulting in serious injury or even
head restraint and a dual head restraint and a single death in a crash. To help make
tether is being used, route tether is being used, route sure the LATCH system is
the tether around the the tether over the headrest working properly after a crash,
headrest or head restraint. or head restraint. see your dealer to have the
3. Before placing a child in the system inspected and any
child restraint, make sure it is necessary replacements made as
securely held in place. To check, soon as possible.
grasp the child restraint at the
LATCH path and attempt to If the vehicle has the LATCH system
move it side‐to‐side and back‐ and it was being used during a
and‐forth. There should be no crash, new LATCH system parts
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of may be needed.
movement, for proper
installation. New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Securing Child Restraints In Canada, the law requires that

forward-facing child restraints have
(Rear Seat ) a top tether, and that the tether be
When securing a child restraint in a attached.
rear seating position, study the If the child restraint does not have
instructions that came with the child the LATCH system, you will be
restraint to make sure it is using the safety belt to secure the
compatible with this vehicle. child restraint in this position. Be
If the child restraint has the LATCH sure to follow the instructions that
system, see Lower Anchors and came with the child restraint. Secure
Tethers for Children (LATCH the child in the child restraint when
System) on page 3‑46 for how and and as the instructions say.
where to install the child restraint If more than one child restraint 3. Push the latch plate into the
using LATCH. If a child restraint is needs to be installed in the rear buckle until it clicks.
secured in the vehicle using a seat, be sure to read Where to Put Position the release button on
safety belt and it uses a top tether, the Restraint on page 3‑44. the buckle so that the safety belt
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
1. Put the child restraint on could be quickly unbuckled if
Children (LATCH System) on
the seat. necessary.
page 3‑46 for top tether anchor
locations. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
Do not secure a child seat in a the lap and shoulder portions of
position without a top tether anchor the vehicle's safety belt through
if a national or local law requires or around the restraint. The child
that the top tether be anchored, or if restraint instructions will show
the instructions that come with the you how.
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
6. If the child restraint has a top

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3‑46 for more
information.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down safety belt path and attempt to
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the move it side to side and back
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to and forth. When the child
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, restraint is properly installed,
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back there should be no more than
into the retractor. When installing 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
a forward-facing child restraint, it To remove the child restraint,
may be helpful to use your knee unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
to push down on the child let it return to the stowed position.
restraint as you tighten the belt. If the top tether is attached to a top
Try to pull the belt out of the tether anchor, disconnect it.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
Armrest Retaining Strap center armrest before installing a Remove the armrest retaining strap
rear‐facing child restraint in the before installing a forward facing
{ WARNING second row center seat position. child restraint in the center seat
position, as it may interfere with the
A rear center armrest that is not attachment of the top tether to the
properly stowed and secured top tether anchor on the seatback.
could fall forward during a sudden
stop or collision. The armrest Securing Child Restraints
could contact an infant secured in (Front Passenger Seat)
a rear‐facing child restraint in the
This vehicle has airbags. A rear
center seat position. Fasten the
seat is a safer place to secure a
retaining strap onto the stowed forward-facing child restraint. See
armrest before installing a rear‐ Where to Put the Restraint on
facing child restraint in the rear page 3‑44.
center seat position.
In addition, the vehicle has a
Stow the rear seat center armrest. passenger sensing system which is
Attach the retaining strap to the designed to turn off the right front
armrest loop (A) and to the center passenger frontal airbag under
top tether anchor on the certain conditions. See Passenger
seatback (B). Make sure the Sensing System on page 3‑31 and
retaining strap's clips are firmly Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
attached. on page 5‑11 for more information,
including important safety
When new, the vehicle's glove box Install the rear-facing child restraint information.
materials included an armrest using the child restraint
retaining strap. Use it to secure the manufacturer's instructions and the
instructions described previously.
A label on the sun visor says, If the child restraint has the LATCH
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in WARNING (Continued) system, see Lower Anchors and
the front.” This is because the risk to Tethers for Children (LATCH
the rear-facing child is so great, Even if the passenger sensing System) on page 3‑46 for how and
if the airbag deploys. system has turned off the right where to install the child restraint
front passenger frontal airbag, no using LATCH. If a child restraint is
system is fail-safe. No one can
{ WARNING guarantee that an airbag will not
secured using a safety belt and it
uses a top tether, see Lower
A child in a rear-facing child deploy under some unusual Anchors and Tethers for Children
restraint can be seriously injured circumstance, even though it is (LATCH System) on page 3‑46 for
or killed if the right front turned off. top tether anchor locations.
passenger airbag inflates. This is Secure rear-facing child restraints Do not secure a child seat in a
because the back of the in a rear seat, even if the airbag position without a top tether anchor
rear-facing child restraint would is off. If you secure a if a national or local law requires
be very close to the inflating forward-facing child restraint in that the top tether be anchored, or if
airbag. A child in a forward-facing the right front seat, always move the instructions that come with the
child restraint can be seriously the front passenger seat as far child restraint say that the top strap
injured or killed if the right front back as it will go. It is better to must be anchored.
passenger airbag inflates and the secure the child restraint in a In Canada, the law requires that
passenger seat is in a forward rear seat. forward-facing child restraints have
position. a top tether, and that the tether be
See Passenger Sensing System
(Continued) attached.
on page 3‑31 for additional
information.
You will be using the lap-shoulder

belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it
will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag
and seat‐mounted side impact
airbag, the off indicator on the
passenger airbag status 4. Push the latch plate into the 5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way
indicator should light and stay lit buckle until it clicks. out of the retractor to set the
when you start the vehicle. See Position the release button on lock. When the retractor lock is
Passenger Airbag Status the buckle, so that the safety set, the belt can be tightened but
Indicator on page 5‑11. belt could be quickly unbuckled not pulled out of the retractor.
2. Put the child restraint on if necessary.
the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
Try to pull the belt out of the If the airbags are off, the off
retractor to make sure the indicator in the passenger airbag
retractor is locked. If the status indicator will come on and
retractor is not locked, repeat stay on when the vehicle is started.
Steps 5 and 6. If a child restraint has been installed
If the vehicle does not have a and the on indicator is lit, see “If the
rear seat and the child restraint On Indicator is Lit for a Child
has a top tether, follow the child Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
restraint manufacturer's System on page 3‑31 for more
instructions regarding the use of information.
the top tether. See Lower To remove the child restraint,
Anchors and Tethers for unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
6. To tighten the belt, push down Children (LATCH System) on let it return to the stowed position.
on the child restraint, pull the page 3‑46 for more information.
shoulder portion of the belt to 7. Before placing a child in the
tighten the lap portion of the belt, child restraint, make sure it is
and feed the shoulder belt back securely held in place. To check,
into the retractor. When installing grasp the child restraint at the
a forward-facing child restraint, it safety belt path and attempt to
may be helpful to use your knee move it side to side and back
to push down on the child and forth. When the child
restraint as you tighten the belt. restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
2 NOTES
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage Cupholders

Compartments Two cupholders are in the center
console. Cupholders may be located
Storage Compartments in the second row seat armrest. To
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . 4-1 Instrument Panel Storage access, pull the armrest down.
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Center Console Storage
Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-1
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Cargo Tie Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Roof Rack System
Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
There may be a storage

compartment on the instrument
panel. Pull the handle to open.
For vehicles with a center console
storage, use the lever (A) on the
Glove Box front to open.
Open the glove box by lifting up on
the lever.
4-2 Storage
Additional Storage Cargo Tie Downs Roof Rack System

Features
{ WARNING
Cargo Cover If something is carried on top of
For vehicles with a cargo cover, use the vehicle that is longer or wider
it to cover items in the rear of the than the roof rack— like paneling,
vehicle. plywood, or a mattress— the wind
To remove the cover from the can catch it while the vehicle is
vehicle, pull both ends toward each being driven. The item being
other. To reinstall, place each end of carried could be violently torn off,
the cover in the holes behind the and this could cause a collision,
rear seat. and damage the vehicle. Never
carry something longer or wider
The vehicle may be equipped with than the roof rack on top of the
four cargo tie downs (A) located in vehicle unless using a GM
the rear compartment. certified accessory carrier.
Convenience Net
This vehicle may be equipped with a
This vehicle may have a roof rack. For roof racks that do not
convenience net located in the rear have cross rails included, GM
of the vehicle. Attach it to the cargo certified cross rails can be
tie downs for storing small loads. purchased as an accessory. See
Do not use the net to store heavy your dealer for additional
loads. information.
Storage 4-3
Notice: Loading cargo on the vehicle. For more information on

roof rack that weighs more than vehicle capacity and loading, see
100 kg (220 lbs) or hangs over the Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑21.
rear or sides of the vehicle may
damage the vehicle. Load cargo
so that it rests evenly between
the cross rails, making sure to
fasten cargo securely.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo
when driving, check to make sure
cross rails and cargo are securely
fastened. Loading cargo on the roof
rack will make the vehicle's center Lift the lever to release and move
of gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, the cross rail.
sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden
braking, or abrupt maneuvers; Position the cross rail on both sides
otherwise it may result in loss of of the vehicle at the same time.
The roof rack cross rails can be
control. If driving for a long distance, locked in four positions along the
on rough roads, or at high speeds, roof rack side rails. These are the
occasionally stop the vehicle to only positions that the cross rails
make sure the cargo remains in its will lock.
place. Do not exceed the maximum
vehicle capacity when loading the
4-4 Storage
Try sliding the cross rails forward

and backward to ensure that they
are correctly secured and that the
levers stay tight to the cross rails.
Do not stand on the plastic lower
body panels when loading cargo on
the roof rack.
When the roof rack is not in use,
lock one cross rail at the furthest
forward position and lock the other
cross rail at the furthest rearward
position to reduce wind noise.
Push the lever down to completely
engage into the side rail holes. If the
lever is not tight, then the cross rail
is not engaged in a side rail hole.
Slide the cross rails back and forth
until the lock pins engage in the
holes and a click is heard as the
pins align and the cross rail locks.
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Engine Coolant Temperature

Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Information Displays
Driver Information
Controls Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-10
Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-11
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Passenger Airbag Status Vehicle Messages

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Controls Battery Voltage and Charging
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-12
Malfunction Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Brake System Messages . . . . 5-24
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Brake System Warning Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3 Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-24
Rear Window Wiper/ Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Antilock Brake System (ABS) Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Engine Cooling System
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Clock (With Date Display) . . . . . 5-5 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-26
Clock (Without Date StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-16
Traction Control System Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-26
Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-27
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-17
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-27
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-18 Object Detection System
Indicators Fuel Economy Light . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-19 Ride Control System
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-28
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-20 Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . . 5-28
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Anti-Theft Alarm System
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-28 Controls Do not adjust the steering wheel
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28 while driving.
Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-29
Vehicle Reminder Steering Wheel Steering Wheel Controls
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 Adjustment
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-30
For vehicles with audio steering

To adjust the steering wheel: wheel controls, some audio controls
1. Pull the lever (A) down. can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down. b g (Push to Talk): For vehicles
with a Bluetooth® or OnStar®, press
3. Pull or push the steering wheel to interact with those systems. See
closer or away from you. Bluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑43
4. Pull the lever (A) up to lock the or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)
steering wheel in place. on page 7‑44 or Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) on page 7‑48 or the Windshield Wiper/Washer Clear snow and ice from the wiper
OnStar Owner's Guide for more blades before using them. If frozen
information. to the windshield, carefully loosen or
$ i (Mute/End Call): Press to thaw them. Damaged wiper blades
reject an incoming call, or end a should be replaced. See Wiper
current call. Press to silence the Blade Replacement on page 10‑29.
vehicle speakers while using the Heavy snow or ice can overload the
infotainment system. Press again to wiper motor. A circuit breaker will
turn the sound on. stop the motor until it cools down.
The windshield wiper/washer lever
_ SRC ^ (Toggle Switch): Press to is located on the right side of the Windshield Washer
select an audio source. steering column.
Pull the lever toward you to spray
Toggle up or down to select the next Move the lever to one of the washer fluid on the windshield. The
or previous favorite radio station or following positions: spray continues until the lever is
CD/MP3 track. released. The wipers will run a few
8 (Mist): Single wipe, move the
times. See Washer Fluid on
+ x − (Volume): Press + or − to lever to 8 and then release. The page 10‑24 for information on filling
increase or decrease the volume. wipers stop after one wipe. the windshield washer fluid
( (Off): Turns the wipers off. reservoir.
Horn
& (Adjustable Interval Wipes):
Press near the horn symbols or Adjusts the time between wipes. { WARNING
press on the steering wheel pad to
Turn the & band up for more In freezing weather, do not use
sound the horn.
frequent wipes or down for less the washer until the windshield is
frequent wipes. warmed. Otherwise the washer
1 (Low Speed): Slow wipes. fluid can form ice on the
2 (High Speed): Fast wipes. windshield, blocking your vision.
Rear Window Wiper/ 5 (Rear Wiper Delay): Sets a its heading and other information
delay between wipes. from the Global Positioning
Washer System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,
The rear wiper controls are on the = (Rear Washer): Push the and vehicle speed information.
end of the windshield wiper lever. windshield wiper lever forward to
spray washer fluid on the rear Avoid covering the GPS antenna for
window. The lever returns to its long periods of time with objects
starting position when released. that may interfere with the antenna's
ability to receive a satellite signal.
The windshield washer reservoir is See Multi-Band Antenna on
used for the windshield and the rear page 7‑18 for the location of the
window. Check the fluid level in the vehicle's antenna. The compass
reservoir if either washer is not system is designed to operate for a
working. See Washer Fluid on certain number of miles or degrees
page 10‑24. of turn before needing a signal from
the GPS satellites. When the
{ WARNING compass display shows CAL, drive
the vehicle for a short distance in an
In freezing weather, do not use open area where it can receive a
Press the upper or lower portion of the washer until the windshield is GPS signal. The compass system
the button to control the rear wiper warmed. Otherwise the washer will automatically determine when a
and rear wiper delay. fluid can form ice on the GPS signal is restored and provide
windshield, blocking your vision. a heading again. See Compass
The system turns off when the Messages on page 5‑24 for more
button is returned to the middle information on the messages that
position. Compass may be displayed for the compass.
Z (Rear Wiper): For continuous The vehicle may have a compass
rear window wipes. display on the Driver Information
Center (DIC). The compass receives
Clock (With Date Display) 6. To save the time or date and 3. Highlight Month and Day
return to the Time and Date Format.
The infotainment system controls,
Settings menu, press the } 4. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
located on the instrument panel, are
used to access the time and date BACK button at any time or select MM/DD (month/day) or
settings through the menu system. press the MENU/SEL knob after DD/MM (day/month).
See Operation on page 7‑7 for adjusting the minutes or year.
Setting the Auto Time Adjust
information about how to use the Setting the 12/24 Hour Format
menu system. 1. Turn the infotainment
1. Turn the infotainment system ON.
Setting the Time and Date system ON.
2. Press the CONFIG button and
1. Turn the infotainment 2. Press the CONFIG button and select Time and Date Settings.
system ON. select Time and Date Settings.
3. Highlight Auto Time Adjust.
2. Press the CONFIG button and 3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
4. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
select Time and Date Settings. 4. Press the MENU/SEL knob to turn Auto Time Adjust on or off.
3. Select Set Time or Set Date. select the 12 hour or 24 hour
display format. 5. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to select Time Zone, and then
adjust the highlighted value. Setting the Month and Day select the time zone.
5. Press the MENU/SEL knob to Format 6. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
select the next value. 1. Turn the infotainment turn Daylight Savings on or off.
system ON.
2. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time and Date Settings.
Clock (Without Date 6. To save the time and return to There are four accessory power
the Time Settings menu, press outlets in the following locations:
Display) below the CD slot, inside the center
the } BACK button at any time
The infotainment system controls, or press the SELECT button console storage, on the rear of the
located on the instrument panel, are after adjusting the minutes. center console storage, and in the
used to access the time and date rear cargo compartment.
settings through the menu system. Setting the 12/24 Hour Format To use the outlets, remove the cover
See Operation on page 7‑7 for 1. Turn the infotainment and close when not in use.
information about how to use the system ON.
menu system. Notice: Leaving electrical
2. Press the CONFIG button and equipment plugged in for an
Setting the Time select Time Settings, or press extended period of time while the
1. Turn the infotainment the H button. vehicle is off will drain the
system ON. battery. Always unplug electrical
3. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format. equipment when not in use and
2. Press the CONFIG button and 4. Press the MENU/SEL knob to do not plug in equipment that
select Time Settings, or press select the 12 hour or 24 hour exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
the H button. display format. rating.
3. Select Set Time. Certain accessory plugs may not be
Power Outlets compatible with the accessory
4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
The accessory power outlets can be power outlets and could overload
adjust the highlighted value.
used to connect electrical vehicle and adapter fuses. If a
5. Press the MENU/SEL knob to problem is experienced, see your
equipment, such as a cell phone or
select the next value. dealer.
MP3 player.
When adding electrical equipment, Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there
be sure to follow the installation could be a problem with a vehicle
instructions included with the Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
equipment. See Add-On Electrical lights work together to indicate a
Equipment on page 9‑64.
Indicators problem with the vehicle.
Notice: Hanging heavy Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
equipment from the power outlet signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
can cause damage not covered before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
by the vehicle warranty. The to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
power outlets are designed for replacement. Paying attention to the check the section that explains what
accessory power plugs only, such warning lights and gauges could to do. Follow this manual's advice.
as cell phone charge cords. prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Instrument Cluster
English Shown, Metric Similar

Speedometer Tachometer Here are some situations that can

occur with the fuel gauge. None of
The vehicle's speed can be selected The tachometer displays the engine these indicate a problem with the
to display on the Driver Information speed in revolutions per fuel gauge.
Center (DIC) and the speedometer minute (rpm).
. At the service station, the fuel
in either kilometers per hour (km/h)
or miles per hour (mph). Telltales on Fuel Gauge pump shuts off before the gauge
the speedometer indicate whether reads full.
kilometers or miles were chosen. . It takes a little more or less fuel
The DIC will show the vehicle's to fill up than the gauge
speed after the limit on the indicated. For example, the
speedometer has been reached. gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
Odometer English Metric took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill
The odometer shows how far the
When the ignition is on, the fuel the tank.
vehicle has been driven, in either
gauge shows about how much fuel . The gauge moves a little while
kilometers or miles.
the vehicle has left in the fuel tank. turning a corner or speeding up.
This vehicle has a tamper‐resistant
An arrow on the fuel gauge . The gauge takes a few seconds
odometer. The digital odometer will
indicates the side of the vehicle the to stabilize after the ignition is
read 999,999 if it is turned back.
fuel door is on. turned on, and goes back to
If the vehicle needs a new odometer
The gauge will first indicate empty empty when the ignition is
installed, it must be set to the
before the vehicle is out of fuel and turned off.
mileage total of the old odometer.
the low fuel light comes on, but the
vehicle's fuel tank should be
filled soon.
Engine Coolant Safety Belt Reminders Passenger Safety Belt

Temperature Gauge Reminder Light
Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light The passenger safety belt reminder
light is by the passenger airbag
There is a driver safety belt status indicator.
reminder light on the instrument
panel cluster.
English Metric
This gauge measures the

temperature of the vehicle's engine.
If the indicator needle moves to the When the engine is started this light
hot side of the gauge toward the and the chime come on and stay on
colored line, the engine is too hot. When the engine is started this light for several seconds to remind the
and a chime come on and stay on passenger to fasten their safety belt.
If the vehicle has been operated
for several seconds to remind The light also begins to flash.
under normal driving conditions, pull
drivers to fasten their safety belts.
off the road, stop the vehicle, and This cycle repeats if the passenger
The light also begins to flash.
turn off the engine as soon as remains unbuckled and the vehicle
possible. This cycle repeats if the driver is moving.
remains unbuckled and the vehicle
is moving. If the passenger safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor the
If the driver safety belt is already light comes on.
buckled, neither the light nor chime
comes on.
The front passenger safety belt Passenger Airbag Status

warning light and chime may turn on
if an object is put on the seat such
Indicator
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery The vehicle has a passenger
bag, laptop, or other electronic sensing system. See Passenger
device. To turn off the warning light Sensing System on page 3‑31 for
and/or chime, remove the object The airbag readiness light comes on important safety information. The
from the seat or buckle the and stays on for several seconds overhead console has a passenger
safety belt. when the vehicle is started. Then airbag status indicator.
the light goes out.
Airbag Readiness Light
This light shows if there is an { WARNING
electrical problem. The system
check includes the airbag sensor, If the airbag readiness light stays
the pretensioners, the airbag on after the vehicle is started or
modules, the wiring, and the crash comes on while driving, it means United States
sensing and diagnostic module. For the airbag system might not be
more information on the airbag working properly. The airbags in
system, see Airbag System on the vehicle might not inflate in a
page 3‑24. crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. If you are using The light turns off when the engine
remote start to start the vehicle from { WARNING is started. If it does not, have the
a distance, if equipped, you may not vehicle serviced by your dealer.
see the system check. Then, after If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means If the light stays on, or comes on
several more seconds, the status while driving, there may be a
indicator will light either ON or OFF, that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help problem with the electrical charging
or either the on or off symbol to let system. Have it checked by your
you know the status of the right front avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right dealer. Driving while this light is on
passenger frontal airbag. could drain the battery.
away. See Airbag Readiness
If the word ON or the on symbol is When this light comes on, the Driver
Light on page 5‑11 for more
lit on the passenger airbag status Information Center (DIC) also
indicator, it means that the right information, including important
safety information. displays a message.
front passenger frontal airbag is
enabled (may inflate). See Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages on page 5‑24.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is Charging System Light
lit on the passenger airbag status If a short distance must be driven
indicator, it means that the with the light on, be sure to turn off
passenger sensing system has all accessories, such as the radio
turned off the right front passenger and air conditioner.
frontal airbag.
If, after several seconds, both status
indicator lights remain on, or if there
are no lights at all, there may be a The charging system light comes on
problem with the lights or the briefly when the ignition is turned
passenger sensing system. See on, but the engine is not running, as
your dealer for service. a check to show the light is working.
Malfunction Malfunctions often are indicated by these systems could lead to

the system before any problem is costly repairs not covered by the
Indicator Lamp apparent. Being aware of the light vehicle warranty. This could also
A computer system called OBD II can prevent more serious damage result in a failure to pass a
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second to the vehicle. This system assists required Emission Inspection/
Generation) monitors operation of the service technician in correctly Maintenance test. See
the fuel, ignition, and emission diagnosing any malfunction. Accessories and Modifications on
control systems. It ensures that Notice: If the vehicle is page 10‑3.
emissions are at acceptable levels continually driven with this light This light comes on during a
for the life of the vehicle, helping to on, after a while, the emission malfunction in one of two ways:
produce a cleaner environment. controls might not work as well, Light Flashing: A misfire condition
the vehicle fuel economy might has been detected. A misfire
not be as good, and the engine increases vehicle emissions and
might not run as smoothly. This could damage the emission control
could lead to costly repairs that system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
might not be covered by the and service might be required.
vehicle warranty.
The following can prevent more
Notice: Modifications made to the serious damage to the vehicle:
This light comes on when the engine, transmission, exhaust,
ignition is on, but the engine is not intake, or fuel system of the . Reduce vehicle speed.
running, as a check to show it is vehicle or the replacement of the
working. If it does not, have the
. Avoid hard accelerations.
original tires with other than
vehicle serviced by your dealer. those of the same Tire
. Avoid steep uphill grades.
If the check engine light comes on Performance Criteria (TPC) can . If towing a trailer, reduce the
and stays on, while the engine is affect the vehicle's emission amount of cargo being hauled as
running, this indicates that there is controls and can cause this light soon as it is possible.
an OBD II problem and service is to come on. Modifications to
required.
If the light continues to flash, when

. Make sure the electrical system If none of the above have made the
it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. is not wet. The system could be light turn off, your dealer can check
Find a safe place to park the wet if the vehicle was driven the vehicle. The dealer has the
vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at through a deep puddle of water. proper test equipment and
least 10 seconds, and restart the The condition is usually diagnostic tools to fix any
engine. If the light is still flashing, corrected when the electrical mechanical or electrical problems
follow the previous steps and see system dries out. A few driving that might have developed.
your dealer for service as soon as trips should turn the light off.
possible. Emissions Inspection and
. Make sure to fuel the vehicle
with quality fuel. Poor fuel quality Maintenance Programs
Light On Steady: An emission
control system malfunction has causes the engine not to run as Some state/provincial and local
been detected on the vehicle. efficiently as designed and may governments have or might begin
Diagnosis and service might be cause: stalling after start-up, programs to inspect the emission
required. stalling when the vehicle is control equipment on the vehicle.
changed into gear, misfiring, Failure to pass this inspection could
The following may correct an hesitation on acceleration, prevent getting a vehicle
emission system malfunction: or stumbling on acceleration. registration.
. Make sure the fuel cap is fully These conditions might go away Here are some things to know to
installed. See Filling the Tank on once the engine is warmed up. help the vehicle pass an inspection:
page 9‑54. The diagnostic If one or more of these
system can determine if the fuel
. The vehicle will not pass this
conditions occurs, change the inspection if the check engine
cap has been left off or fuel brand used. It will require at
improperly installed. A loose or light is on with the engine
least one full tank of the proper running, or if the key is in ON/
missing fuel cap allows fuel to fuel to turn the light off.
evaporate into the atmosphere. RUN and the light is not on.
A few driving trips with the cap See Recommended Fuel on
properly installed should turn the page 9‑51.
light off.

. The vehicle will not pass this
inspection if the OBD II
Brake System Warning after the parking brake is fully
released, there is a brake problem.
(on-board diagnostic) system Light Have the brake system inspected
determines that critical emission The vehicle brake system consists immediately.
control systems have not been of two hydraulic circuits. If one
completely diagnosed by the
system. The vehicle would be
circuit is not working, the remaining
circuit can still work to stop the
{ WARNING
considered not ready for vehicle. For normal braking The brake system might not be
inspection. This can happen if performance, both circuits need to working properly if the brake
the battery has recently been be working system warning light is on.
replaced or if the battery has run
Driving with the brake system
down. The diagnostic system is
warning light on can lead to a
designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during crash. If the light is still on after
normal driving. This can take the vehicle has been pulled off
several days of routine driving. the road and carefully stopped,
If this has been done and the have the vehicle towed for
English Metric
vehicle still does not pass the service.
inspection for lack of OBD II The brake indicator light should
system readiness, your dealer come on briefly as the engine is If the light comes on while driving, a
can prepare the vehicle for started. If it does not come on have chime sounds. Pull off the road and
inspection. the vehicle serviced by your dealer. stop. The pedal might be harder to
When the ignition is on, the brake push or go closer to the floor.
system warning light comes on It might also take longer to stop.
when the parking brake is set. The If the light is still on, have the
light stays on if the parking brake vehicle towed for service. See
does not fully release. If it stays on Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑76.
Antilock Brake System If the regular brake system warning The traction off light comes on when
light is not on, the vehicle still has the Traction Control System (TCS)
(ABS) Warning Light brakes, but not antilock brakes. has been turned off by pressing and
If the regular brake system warning releasing the traction control button.
light is also on, the vehicle does not This light and the StabiliTrak Off
have antilock brakes and there is a light come on when StabiliTrak is
problem with the regular brakes. turned off.
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 5‑15. If the Traction Control System (TCS)
is off, wheelspin is not limited.
See Brake System Messages on Adjust driving accordingly.
For vehicles with the Antilock Brake page 5‑24 for all brake‐related DIC
System (ABS), this light comes on messages. See Traction Control System (TCS)
briefly when the engine is started. on page 9‑40 and StabiliTrak®
If the light does not come on, have it Traction Off Light System on page 9‑41 for more
fixed so it will be ready to warn if information.
there is a problem.
If the ABS light comes on and stays StabiliTrak® OFF Light
on while driving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off.
Start the engine again to reset the
system. If the light stays on after
driving at a speed above 20 km/h This light comes on briefly while
(13 mph), see your dealer for starting the engine. If it does not,
service. A chime may also sound have the vehicle serviced by your
when the light comes on steady. dealer. If the system is working This light comes on when the
normally, the indicator light then StabiliTrak system is turned off.
turns off. If the Traction Control System (TCS)
is off, wheel spin is not limited. If the
StabiliTrak system is off, the system If the light does not come on, have Tire Pressure Light
does not assist in controlling the the vehicle serviced by the dealer.
vehicle. Turn on the TCS and the If the system is working normally,
StabiliTrak system and the warning the indicator light turns off.
light turns off. If the light is on and not flashing, the
Check the DIC for applicable TCS, and potentially the StabiliTrak
messages. See Ride Control system have been disabled. A DIC
System Messages on page 5‑27 for message may display. Check the
more information. DIC messages to determine which For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
See Traction Control System (TCS) feature(s) is no longer functioning Monitor System (TPMS), this light
on page 9‑40 and StabiliTrak® and whether the vehicle requires comes on briefly when the engine is
System on page 9‑41 for more service. started. It provides information
information. If the indicator/warning light is on about tire pressures and the TPMS.
and flashing, the TCS and/or the When the Light is On Steady
Traction Control System StabiliTrak system is actively
This indicates that one or more of
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light working.
® the tires are significantly
See StabiliTrak System on underinflated.
page 9‑41 and Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 9‑40 for A tire pressure message can
more information. accompany the light. See Tire
Messages on page 5‑28 for more
information. Stop as soon as
possible, and inflate the tires to the
pressure value shown on the Tire
The StabiliTrak system or the and Loading Information label. See
Traction Control System (TCS) Tire Pressure on page 10‑49 for
indicator/warning light come on more information.
briefly when the engine is started.
When the Light Flashes First and Notice: Lack of proper engine oil Fuel Economy Light
Then is On Steady maintenance can damage the
This indicates that there may be a engine. The repairs would not be
problem with the TPMS. The light covered by the vehicle warranty.
flashes for about a minute and stays Always follow the maintenance
on steady for the remainder of the schedule for changing engine oil.
ignition cycle. This sequence
repeats with every ignition cycle.
See Tire Pressure Monitor For vehicles with the fuel economy
Operation on page 10‑52 for more mode light, it comes on when the
information. eco (economy) switch, located on
the center console near the shifter,
Engine Oil Pressure Light is pressed. For vehicles with a
The oil pressure light should come Driver Information Center (DIC) an
on briefly as the engine is started.
{ WARNING If it does not come on have the
ECO MODE ON message displays.
See Fuel System Messages on
Do not keep driving if the oil vehicle serviced by your dealer. page 5‑27 for more information.
pressure is low. The engine can If the light comes on and stays on, it Press the switch again to turn off
become so hot that it catches fire. means that oil is not flowing through the light and exit the fuel
Someone could be burned. Check the engine properly. The vehicle saver mode.
the oil as soon as possible and could be low on oil and might have
have the vehicle serviced. some other system problem. See
your dealer.
Low Fuel Warning Light Security Light High-Beam On Light
English Shown, Metric Similar

The security light comes on briefly The high-beam on light comes on
This light comes on for a few
when the engine is started. If it does when the high-beam headlamps are
seconds when the ignition is turned
not have the vehicle serviced by in use.
on as a check to indicate it is
your dealer. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
working. If it does not come on,
have it fixed. This light comes on if there is a Changer on page 6‑2 for more
problem with the security system, information.
The low fuel warning light is a circle
or if the vehicle has been
located on the fuel gauge. This light
tampered with.
comes on and a chime sounds
periodically when the vehicle is low For more information, see Vehicle
on fuel. The light goes off when fuel Security on page 2‑12.
is added to the fuel tank.
For vehicles with a Driver
Information Center (DIC), see Fuel
System Messages on page 5‑27 for
more information.
Front Fog Lamp Light Cruise Control Light Information Displays

Driver Information
Center (DIC)
The vehicle may have a Driver
Information Center (DIC). It displays
information about the vehicle and
The front fog lamp light comes on The cruise control light is white warning messages if there is a
when the fog lamps are in use. whenever the cruise control is set, system problem detected. DIC
and turns green when the cruise messages display in the center of
The light goes out when the fog the instrument panel cluster. See
lamps are turned off. See Fog control is active.
Vehicle Messages on page 5‑23 for
Lamps on page 6‑4 for more The light turns off when the cruise more information.
information. control is turned off. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑42 for more The vehicle may also have features
Lamps On Reminder information. that can be customized through the
controls on the radio. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 5‑30 for
more information.
DIC Operation and Displays
Use the DIC buttons located in the
center of the instrument panel to
access different displays. The DIC
For vehicles with the lamps on displays trip, fuel, vehicle system
reminder light, it comes on when information, and warning messages.
the lights are in use.
It also shows the shift lever position, SET/CLR (Set/Clear): Use this the last reset for the trip odometer.
the odometer, and the direction the button to set or clear the menu item The trip odometer can be reset to
vehicle is driving. when it is displayed. zero by pressing SET/CLR while the
trip odometer display is showing.
DIC Buttons Trip/Fuel Menu Items
Fuel Range
Press the MENU button until Trip/
Fuel Information Menu is displayed. This display shows the approximate
Then press x to scroll through the distance the vehicle can be driven
following menu items: without refueling. The fuel range
estimate is based on an average of
. Trip 1 the vehicle's fuel economy over
. Trip 2 recent driving history and the
amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
. Fuel Range tank. Fuel range cannot be reset.
. Average Fuel Economy Average Fuel Economy
. Instantaneous Fuel Economy This display shows the approximate
. Average Vehicle Speed average liters per 100 kilometers (L/
MENU: Press this button to get to 100 km) or miles per gallon (mpg).
. Timer
the Trip/Fuel Menu and the Vehicle This number is calculated based on
Information Menu. . Digital Speedometer the number of L/100 km (mpg)
wx: Use these buttons to scroll . Turn-by-Turn recorded since the last time this
through the items in each menu. menu item was reset. The fuel
. Blank Display economy can be reset by pressing
A small marker will move along the
page as you scroll through the Trip 1 and Trip 2 SET/CLR while the Average Fuel
items. This shows where each page Economy display is showing. The
This display shows the current display may not reset to zero.
is in the menu. distance traveled, in either
kilometers (km) or miles (mi), since
Instantaneous Fuel Economy display will show the amount of time Blank Display
This display shows the current fuel that has passed since the timer was This display shows no information.
economy in either liters per last reset, not including time the
100 kilometers (L/100 km) or miles ignition is off. Time will continue to Vehicle Information Menu
per gallon (mpg). This number be counted as long as the ignition is Items
reflects only the fuel economy that on, even if another display is being
shown on the DIC. The timer will Press the MENU button until Vehicle
the vehicle has right now and Information Menu is displayed. Then
changes frequently as driving record up to 99 hours, 59 minutes
and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after press x to scroll through the
conditions change. Unlike average
which the display will return to zero. following menu items:
economy, this display cannot be
reset. To stop the timer, press SET/CLR . Unit
briefly while Timer is displayed. To
. Tire Pressure
Average Vehicle Speed reset the timer to zero, press and
This display shows the average hold SET/CLR. . Remaining Oil Life
speed of the vehicle in kilometers Digital Speedometer . Blank Display
per hour (km/h) or miles per
hour (mph). This average is The speedometer shows how fast Unit
calculated based on the various the vehicle is moving in either
kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles Press SET/CLR to enter the unit
vehicle speeds recorded since the menu. Then press w or x to
last reset of this value. The average per hour (mph). The speedometer
cannot be reset. switch between METRIC or US
speed can be reset by pressing
when the Unit display is active.
SET/CLR while the Average Vehicle Turn-by-Turn Press SET/CLR to confirm the
Speed display is showing.
This display is used for the OnStar setting. This will change the
Timer or Navigation System Turn-by-Turn displays on the cluster and DIC to
guidance. See The OnStar Owner's either metric or English (US)
This display can be used as a timer.
Guide or the Navigation manual, measurements.
To start the timer, press SET/CLR
while Timer is displayed. The if the vehicle has navigation, for
more information.
Tire Pressure Maintenance Schedule in this Vehicle Messages

The display will show a vehicle with manual. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 11‑2 for more Messages are displayed on the DIC
the approximate pressures of all
information. to notify the driver that the status of
four tires. Tire pressure is displayed
the vehicle has changed and that
in either kilopascal (kPa) or in Remember, the Oil Life display must
some action may be needed by the
pounds per square inch (psi). be reset after each oil change. It will
driver to correct the condition.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System not reset itself. Also, be careful not
Multiple messages may appear one
on page 10‑50 and Tire Pressure to reset the Oil Life display
after another.
Monitor Operation on page 10‑52 for accidentally at any time other than
when the oil has just been changed. Some messages may not require
more information.
It cannot be reset accurately until immediate action, but you can press
Remaining Oil Life the next oil change. To reset the SET/CLR to acknowledge that you
engine oil life system, press SET/ received the messages and to clear
This display shows an estimate of
CLR while the Oil Life display is them from the display. Some
the oil's remaining useful life.
active. The display will ask for messages cannot be cleared from
If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is
confirmation of a reset. Press w or the DIC display because they are
displayed, that means 99% of the
x to select Yes or No. Then press more urgent. These messages
current oil life remains.
SET/CLR to confirm the selection. require action before they can be
When the remaining oil life is low, cleared. You should take any
See Engine Oil Life System on
the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON messages that appear on the
page 10‑13.
message will appear on the display. display seriously and remember that
See Engine Oil Messages on Blank Display clearing the messages will only
page 5‑26. The oil should be make the messages disappear, not
This display shows no information.
changed as soon as possible. See correct the problem. You will find the
Engine Oil on page 10‑10. In Compass possible messages that can be
addition to the engine oil life system displayed and some information
The vehicle may have a compass in
monitoring the oil life, additional about them grouped by subject in
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
maintenance is recommended in the the following information.
See Compass on page 5‑4.
Battery Voltage and SERVICE BATTERY Compass Messages

Charging Messages CHARGING SYSTEM
CAL
This message is displayed when
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE there is a fault in the battery This message is displayed when the
This message displays when the charging system. Take the vehicle to compass needs to be calibrated.
vehicle has detected that the battery your dealer for service. See Compass on page 5‑4.
voltage is dropping beyond a –––
reasonable point. The battery saver Brake System Messages
system starts reducing certain Three dashes will be displayed if the
features of the vehicle that you may BRAKE FLUID LOW compass needs service. See your
be able to notice. At the point that This message is displayed when the dealer for service.
features are disabled, this message brake fluid level is low; see Brake
is displayed. It means that the Fluid on page 10‑25. Cruise Control Messages
vehicle is trying to save the charge
in the battery. Turn off unnecessary RELEASE PARKING BRAKE APPLY BRAKE BEFORE
accessories to allow the battery to CRUISE
This message is displayed as a
recharge. reminder that the parking brake is If this message displays when
on. Release it before you attempt to attempting to activate cruise control,
LOW BATTERY
drive. apply the brake pedal and try again.
This message is displayed when the
battery voltage is low. See Battery CRUISE SET TO XXX
on page 10‑27 for more information. This message displays when the
cruise control is set and shows the
speed it was set to. See Cruise
Control on page 9‑42 for more
information.
Door Ajar Messages REAR ACCESS OPEN COOLANT LEVEL LOW ADD
This message will display along with COOLANT
DOOR OPEN
a symbol when the liftgate is open. This message will display if the
A door open symbol will be Close the liftgate completely. coolant is low. See Engine Coolant
displayed on the DIC showing which on page 10‑18.
door is open. If the vehicle has been Engine Cooling System
shifted out of P (Park), a DOOR ENGINE OVERHEATED —
OPEN message will also be Messages IDLE ENGINE
displayed. Close the door A/C OFF DUE TO HIGH This message displays when the
completely. ENGINE TEMP engine coolant temperature is too
HOOD OPEN This message displays when the hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
engine coolant becomes hotter than idle until it cools down.
This message will display along with
a hood open symbol when the hood the normal operating temperature. ENGINE OVERHEATED —
is open. Close the hood completely. To avoid added strain on a hot STOP ENGINE
engine, the air conditioning
MANUALLY CLOSE THE compressor automatically turns off. This message displays and a
POWER LIFTGATE When the coolant temperature continuous chime sounds if the
returns to normal, the air engine cooling system reaches
This message will display if the unsafe temperatures for operation.
power liftgate encounters multiple conditioning compressor turns back
on. You can continue to drive the Stop and turn off the vehicle as
obstacles on the same power cycle. soon as it is safe to do so to avoid
After removing the obstructions, the vehicle.
severe damage. This message
liftgate will resume normal power If this message continues to appear, clears when the engine has cooled
operation. have the system repaired by your to a safe operating temperature.
dealer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to the engine.
HIGH COOLANT ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLE Engine Power Messages

TEMPERATURE ENGINE
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays if the coolant This message displays when the
temperature is hot. See Engine engine oil temperature is too hot. This message displays when the
Overheating on page 10‑21. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle vehicle's engine power is reduced.
until it cools down. Reduced engine power can affect
Engine Oil Messages the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL If this message is on, but there is no
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON This message displays when the reduction in performance, proceed
engine oil level is too low. Check the to your destination. The
This message displays when the
oil level. See Engine Oil on performance may be reduced the
engine oil needs to be changed.
page 10‑10. next time the vehicle is driven. The
When you change the engine oil, be
vehicle may be driven at a reduced
sure to reset the Oil Life System. OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOP speed while this message is on, but
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 10‑13 and Driver Information
ENGINE maximum acceleration and speed
may be reduced. Anytime this
Center (DIC) on page 5‑20 for This message displays if low oil
message stays on, the vehicle
information on how to reset the pressure levels occur. Stop the
should be taken to your dealer for
system. See Engine Oil on vehicle as soon as safely possible
service as soon as possible.
page 10‑10 and Scheduled and do not operate it until the cause
Maintenance on page 11‑2 for more of the low oil pressure has been
information. corrected. Check the oil as soon as
possible and have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
Fuel System Messages Object Detection System warning message, turn the ignition
off and then back on again. If the
ECO MODE ON Messages message stays on, see your dealer
On some models, this message PARK ASSIST OFF right away. See All-Wheel Drive on
displays when the fuel economy page 9‑37 for more information.
This message is displayed when the
mode has been turned on by park assist system has been turned SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE
pressing the eco button near the off. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist
shift lever. See Fuel Economy Mode If your vehicle has the All-Wheel
on page 9‑45. Drive (AWD) system, this message
on page 9‑36 for more information.
SERVICE PARK ASSIST displays if a problem occurs with
FUEL LEVEL LOW this system. If this message
This message is displayed if there is appears, stop as soon as possible
This message displays when the a problem with the park assist
vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as and turn off the vehicle. Restart the
system. Take the vehicle to your vehicle and check for the message
soon as possible. dealer for service. on the DIC display. If the message
TIGHTEN GAS CAP is still displayed or appears again
Ride Control System when you begin driving, the AWD
fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the Messages system needs service. See your
dealer.
fuel cap. ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF
SERVICE TRACTION
Key and Lock Messages If your vehicle has the All-Wheel CONTROL
Drive (AWD) system, this message
REPLACE BATTERY IN displays when the rear drive system This message displays when there
REMOTE KEY is overheating. This message turns is a problem with the Traction
off when the rear drive system cools Control System (TCS). See Traction
This message displays when the down. If the warning message stays Control System (TCS) on
battery in the Remote Keyless Entry on for a while, you need to reset the page 9‑40.
(RKE) transmitter needs to be warning message. To reset the
replaced.
SERVICE STABILITRAK Airbag System Messages Service Vehicle Messages

This message displays if there is a SERVICE AIRBAG SERVICE AC SYSTEM
problem with the StabiliTrak system.
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑41. This message displays if there is a This message is displayed if there is
problem with the airbag system. a problem with the air conditioning
STABILITRAK OFF Take the vehicle to your dealer for system. Take the vehicle to your
This message displays when the service. dealer for service.
StabiliTrak system is turned off. See SERVICE POWER STEERING
StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑41 Safety Belt Messages
for more information. This message is displayed if there is
BUCKLE SEATBELT a problem with the power steering
TRACTION CONTROL OFF This message displays as a system. Take the vehicle to your
This message displays when the reminder when the safety belt is not dealer for service.
Traction Control System (TCS) is buckled. SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
turned off. Adjust your driving
accordingly. Anti-Theft Alarm System This message is displayed if there is
a problem with the vehicle. Take the
TRACTION CONTROL ON Messages vehicle to your dealer for service.
This message displays when the THEFT ATTEMPTED
Traction Control System (TCS) is Tire Messages
This message displays if the vehicle
first turned on. See Traction Control
detects a tamper condition. SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
System (TCS) on page 9‑40 for
more information. SYSTEM
This message displays if there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE You can receive more than one tire Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
pressure message at a time. The allow the transmission to cool. This
DIC also shows the tire pressure message clears when the fluid
system is learning new tires. See
values. See Driver Information temperature reaches a safe level.
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
Center (DIC) on page 5‑20.
Vehicle Reminder
TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE Transmission Messages Messages
This message displays when the SERVICE TRANSMISSION
pressure in one or more of the ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
vehicle tires is low. This message displays if there is a WITH CARE
problem with the transmission. See This message is displayed when ice
This message also displays LEFT your dealer.
FRONT, RIGHT FRONT, LEFT conditions are possible.
REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate SHIFT TO PARK TURN WIPER CONTROL TO
the location of the low tire. This message displays when the INTERMITTENT FIRST
The low tire pressure warning light transmission needs to be shifted to
This message is displayed when
will also come on. See Tire P (Park). This may appear when
attempting to adjust the intermittent
Pressure Light on page 5‑17. attempting to remove the key if the
wiper speed without intermittent
vehicle is not in P (Park).
If a tire pressure message appears selected on the wiper control. See
on the DIC, stop as soon as you TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLE Windshield Wiper/Washer on
can. Inflate the tires by adding air ENGINE page 5‑3.
until the tire pressure is equal to the
values shown on the Tire and This message displays and a chime
Loading Information label. See Tires sounds if the transmission fluid in
on page 10‑43, Vehicle Load Limits the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
on page 9‑21, and Tire Pressure on transmission fluid temperature high
page 10‑49. can cause damage to the vehicle.
Vehicle 2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to

highlight Vehicle Settings.
Climate and Air Quality
Personalization Select the Climate and Air Quality
3. Press the center of the MENU/ menu and the following will be
The audio system controls are used SELECT knob to select the displayed:
to access the personalization Vehicle Settings menu. . Auto Fan Speed
menus for customizing vehicle The following list of menu items will
features. . Air Conditioning Mode
be available:
. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
CONFIG (Configuration): Press to . Climate and Air Quality
access the Configuration
. Comfort and Convenience Auto Fan Speed
Settings Menu.
. Collision/Detection Systems This selection is available on
MENU/SELECT Knob: Press the
vehicles with the Automatic Climate
center of this knob to enter the . Languages Control System. Choose from the
menus and select menu items. Turn . Lighting following blower speed settings:
the knob to scroll through the
menus. . Power Door Locks High: Increased speed.
} BACK: Press to exit or move . Remote Lock/Unlock/Start Low: Reduced speed.
backwards in a menu. Normal: Moderate speed.
. Return to Factory Settings
Entering the Personalization Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to Press the MENU/SELECT knob
Menus highlight the menu. Press the knob when Auto Fan Speed is
1. Turn the infotainment system on to select it. Each of the menus is highlighted. Turn the knob to
and press the CONFIG button to detailed in the following information. highlight “High,” “Normal,” or “Low.”
access the Configuration All of the menus may not be Press the knob to confirm the
Settings menu. available. Only those tied to the selection and go back to the
features on your vehicle will be last menu.
shown.
Air Conditioning Mode Remote Start Auto Heat Seats See the “Easy Exit Driver Seat”
This will allow you to select whether When on, this feature will turn the information under Power Seat
or not the air conditioning comes on heated seats on when using remote Adjustment on page 3‑3 for more
automatically the next time the start on cold days. information.
vehicle is started. “On” means that Press the MENU/SELECT knob This allows you to turn the easy exit
the air conditioning will be on at when “Remote Start Auto Heat seat feature on or off.
start up, regardless of whether it Seats” is highlighted to toggle Press the MENU/SELECT knob
was on or off the last time the between “On” or “Off.” Press when “Easy Exit Driver Seat” is
vehicle was turned off. “Off” means } BACK to confirm the selection highlighted. Turn the knob to select
the air conditioning will be off at the and go back to the last menu. “On” or “Off.” Press the knob to
next start up, regardless of whether confirm and go back to the
it was on or off the last time the Comfort and Convenience last menu.
vehicle was turned off. “Last
Select the Comfort and
Setting” means that when the Chime Volume
Convenience menu and the
vehicle is started, the air This allows the selection of the
following will be displayed:
conditioning will resume whichever chime volume level.
setting it was at the last time the . Easy Exit Driver Seat
vehicle was turned off. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
. Chime Volume
when “Chime Volume” is
Press the MENU/SELECT knob . Reverse Tilt Mirror highlighted. Turn the knob to select
when Air Conditioning Mode is “Normal” or “High.” Press the knob
highlighted. Turn the knob to Easy Exit Driver Seat
to confirm and go back to the
highlight “On,” “Off,” or “Last When on, this feature will move the last menu.
Setting.” Press the knob to confirm driver seat rearward upon turning
the selection and go back to the the ignition off and the driver door
last menu. opening. This may be performed to
make it easier to exit the vehicle.
Reverse Tilt Mirror Collision/Detection Systems Turn the MENU/SELECT knob to

When on, both the driver and select the language. Press the knob
Select the Collision/Detection
passenger mirrors will tilt downward to confirm and go back to the
Systems menu and the following will
when vehicle is shifted to last menu.
be displayed:
R (Reverse) to improve visibility of Lighting
. Park Assist
the ground near the rear wheels.
They will return to their previous Park Assist Select the Lighting menu and the
driving position when the vehicle is following will be displayed:
This allows the Ultrasonic Parking
shifted out of R (Reverse), the . Vehicle Locator Lights
Assist feature to be turned on or off.
ignition is turned to OFF, or the
Press the MENU/SELECT knob
. Exit Lighting
vehicle is left in reverse. See Park
Tilt Mirrors on page 2‑15 for more when “Park Assist” is highlighted. Vehicle Locator Lights
information. Turn the knob to select “On,” “Off,”
or “Tow Bar.” Press the knob to This allows the vehicle locator lights
This allows you to turn the park tilt to be turned on or off.
confirm and go back to the
mirrors feature on or off.
last menu. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
Press the MENU/SELECT knob when “Vehicle Locator Lights” is
See Ultrasonic Parking Assist on
when “Reverse Tilt Mirror” is highlighted to toggle between “On”
page 9‑45 for more information
highlighted. Turn the knob to select or “Off.” Press } BACK to confirm
“On” or “Off.” Press the knob to Languages the selection and go back to the
confirm and go back to the last menu.
last menu. Select the Languages menu and the
. English
. French
. Spanish
Exit Lighting Press the MENU/SELECT knob “On” or “Off.” Press the knob to
This allows the selection of how when “Unlocked Door Anti Lock confirm and go back to the
long the exterior lamps stay on Out” is highlighted to toggle last menu.
when leaving the vehicle when it is between “On” or “Off.” Press
} BACK to confirm the selection Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
dark outside.
and go back to the last menu. Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Start
Press the MENU/SELECT knob and the following will be displayed:
when “Exit Lighting” is highlighted. Auto Door Unlock
. Remote Unlock Light Feedback
Turn the knob to select “Off,” This allows selection of which of the
“30 Seconds,” “1 Minute,” or doors will automatically unlock when . Remote Lock Feedback
“2 Minutes.” Press the knob to the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). . Remote Door Unlock
confirm and go back to the
last menu. Press the MENU/SELECT knob . Memory Remote Recall
when “Auto Door Unlock” is
Power Door Locks highlighted. Turn the knob to select Remote Unlock Light Feedback
“All Doors,” “Driver Door,” or “Off.” When on, the exterior lamps will
Select Power Door Locks and the
Press the knob to confirm and go flash when unlocking the vehicle
back to the last menu. with the RKE transmitter.
. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
Delayed Door Lock Press the MENU/SELECT knob
. Auto Door Unlock when “Remote Unlock Light
When on, this feature will delay the
. Delayed Door Lock locking of the doors. If you want to Feedback” is highlighted. Turn the
override the delay you can press the knob to select “Flash Lights” or
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out “Off.” Press the knob to confirm and
power door lock on the instrument
When on, this feature will keep the panel. go back to the last menu.
driver door from locking when the
door is open. If off is selected, the Press the MENU/SELECT knob
Delayed Door Lock menu will be when “Delayed Door Lock” is
available. highlighted. Turn the knob to select
Remote Lock Feedback Memory Remote Recall Return to Factory Settings

This allows selection of what type of This allows the Memory Remote Select “Return to Factory Settings”
feedback is given when unlocking Recall feature to be turned on or off. to return all of the vehicle
the vehicle with the RKE transmitter. When on, this feature will recall the personalization to the default
Press the MENU/SELECT knob current driver's last seat, outside settings. Turn the knob to select
when “Remote Lock Feedback” is mirrors upon unlocking the driver “Yes” or “No.” Press the knob to
highlighted. Turn the knob to select door with the RKE, and opening that confirm and go back to the
“Lights and Horn,” “Lights Only,” door. The current driver is identified last menu.
“Horn Only,” or “Off.” Press the knob when the RKE transmitter is used to
to confirm and go back to the unlock the driver door. See “Memory
last menu. Remote Recall” under Power Seat
Adjustment on page 3‑3 for more
Remote Door Unlock information.
This allows selection of which doors Memory Remote Recall is when the
will unlock when pressing the unlock memorized settings will be recalled
button on the RKE transmitter. as you unlock the vehicle.
Press the MENU/SELECT knob Press the MENU/SELECT knob
when “Remote Door Unlock” is when “Memory Remote Recall” is
highlighted. Turn the knob to select highlighted to toggle between “On”
“All Doors” or “Driver Door.” Press
the knob to confirm and go back to or “Off.” Press } BACK to confirm
the last menu. the selection and go back to the
last menu.
Lighting 6-1
Lighting Exterior Lighting AUTO (Automatic Headlamps):

Turns the exterior lamps on and off
automatically depending on the
Exterior Lamp Controls exterior light.
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1 ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the
Headlamp High/Low-Beam parking lamps together with the
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 following:
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 . Sidemarker Lamps
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 . Taillamps
Automatic Headlamp . License Plate Lamps
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 The exterior lamp control is on the
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3 turn signal/lane change lever.
. Instrument Panel Lights
Turn and Lane-Change O (Exterior Lamp Control): 5 (Headlamps): Turns on the
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Operates the exterior lamps. Turn to headlamps, together with the
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 one of the following positions: previously listed lamps and lights.
Interior Lighting O (Off): Turns the exterior
Instrument Panel Illumination lamps off.
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Battery Load Management . . . . 6-5
6-2 Lighting
. The light sensor determines it is
Headlamp High/ Flash-to-Pass daytime.
Low-Beam Changer The flash‐to‐pass feature works with . The parking brake is released.
2 3 Headlamp High/Low‐Beam the low beams or Daytime Running
Changer: Push the turn/lane Lamps (DRL) on or off. Fully functional Daytime Running
change lever away from you to turn Lamps (DRL) are required on all
To flash the high beams, pull the
the high beams on. vehicles first sold in Canada.
turn signal/lane change lever all the
Pull the lever toward you to return to way toward you, then release it. When the DRL are on the taillamps,
low beams. sidemarker, instrument panel lights
Daytime Running and other lamps will not be on. The
instrument panel cluster will be lit.
Lamps (DRL)
When the exterior lamp band is
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) turned to the headlamp position, the
system makes the low-beam low-beam headlamps come on. The
headlamps come on at a reduced other lamps that come on with the
brightness in daylight when the headlamps will also come on.
following conditions are met:
This indicator light turns on in the To idle your vehicle with the DRL
instrument panel cluster when the
. The ignition is on. off, move the shift lever to P (Park).
high‐beam headlamps are on. . The exterior lamp band is in the The DRL will stay off until the shift
automatic position. lever is moved out of the P (Park)
. position.
The transmission is not in
P (Park). The regular headlamp system
should be turned on when needed.
Lighting 6-3
Automatic Headlamp Hazard Warning Flashers Turn and Lane-Change

System Signals
When it is dark enough outside, the
headlamps come on automatically.
An arrow on the instrument panel

cluster will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
Do not cover the light sensor on top | (Hazard Warning Flasher):
of the instrument panel or the Raise or lower the lever until the
Press this button, on the center of
headlamps will come on when they arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
the instrument panel, to make the
are not needed. change. Hold it there until the lane
front and rear turn signal lamps
change is complete.
The system may also turn on the flash on and off. This warns others
headlamps when driving through a that you are having trouble. The lever returns to its starting
parking garage or tunnel. position when it is released.
Press | again to turn the
flashers off.
6-4 Lighting
If after signaling a turn or a lane # (Fog Lamps): Turn the fog lamp Interior Lighting
change the arrows flash rapidly or band on the lever to # and release
do not come on, a signal bulb may
be burned out.
it, to turn the fog lamps on or off. Instrument Panel
The band will return to its original Illumination Control
Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb position.
is not burned out, check the fuse; This control is located on the
The parking lamps or low‐beam
see Fuses on page 10‑37 for more instrument panel, to the left of the
headlamps must be on to use the
information. steering column.
fog lamps.
D (Instrument Panel
Fog Lamps The fog lamps will go off whenever
Brightness): Turn clockwise or
the high-beam headlamps are
counterclockwise to brighten or dim
turned on. When the high‐beam
the lights.
headlamps are turned off, the fog
lamps will come on again.
Dome Lamps
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on There are front and rear dome
along with the fog lamps. lamps.
For vehicles with fog lamps, the The dome lamp controls are located
control is located on the turn signal/ in the overhead console. To change
lane change lever. the settings, press the following:
Use the fog lamps for better vision * (Dome Lamp Override): Turns
in foggy or misty conditions. the lamps off, even when a door
is open.
Lighting 6-5
1 (Door): The lamps come on Lighting Features Battery Load

automatically when a door is Management
opened. Entry Lighting The vehicle has Electric Power
+ (On): Turns the dome lamps on.
The dome lamp, cargo lamp, and Management (EPM) that estimates
The dome lamps can also be turned foot lamp inside the vehicle come the battery's temperature and state
on and off by pressing the buttons on when any door is opened, if the of charge. It then adjusts the voltage
next to the lamps. dome lamp is in the door position. In for best performance and extended
addition, these lamps come on life of the battery.
Reading Lamps when the Remote Keyless Entry When the battery's state of charge
(RKE) unlock button is pressed. is low, the voltage is raised slightly
The reading lamps are located on They stay on for 20 seconds or until
the overhead console. These lamps to quickly bring the charge back up.
a door is opened. After the door is When the state of charge is high,
come on automatically when any opened and then closed, the light
door is opened. the voltage is lowered slightly to
remains on for 20 seconds, or until prevent overcharging. If the vehicle
For manual operation, press the the ignition is turned to ON/RUN. has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage
button next to each lamp to turn it display on the Driver Information
on or off. Center (DIC), you may see the
voltage move up or down. This is
normal. If there is a problem, an
alert will be displayed.
6-6 Lighting
The battery can be discharged at Normally, these actions occur in

idle if the electrical loads are very steps or levels, without being
high. This is true for all vehicles. noticeable. In rare cases at the
This is because the generator highest levels of corrective action,
(alternator) may not be spinning fast this action may be noticeable to the
enough at idle to produce all the driver. If so, a Driver Information
power needed for very high Center (DIC) message might be
electrical loads. displayed, such as BATTERY
A high electrical load occurs when SAVER ACTIVE, BATTERY
several of the following are on, such VOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.
as: headlamps, high beams, fog If one of these messages displays, it
lamps, rear window defogger, is recommended that the driver
climate control fan at high speed, reduce the electrical loads as much
heated seats, engine cooling fans, as possible. See Driver Information
trailer loads, and loads plugged into Center (DIC) on page 5‑20.
accessory power outlets.
EPM works to prevent excessive
discharge of the battery. It does this
by balancing the generator's output
and the vehicle's electrical needs.
It can increase engine idle speed to
generate more power, whenever
needed. It can temporarily reduce
the power demands of some
accessories.
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Audio Players

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Phone
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-43
System CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mass Storage
7-20 Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
Media (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23 Bluetooth (Voice
Introduction Auxiliary Devices (Radio Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 with CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 Auxiliary Devices (Radio with
Overview (Radio with CD) . . . . . 7-3 CD/DVD/MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Overview (Radio with CD/ Rear Seat Infotainment
DVD/MEM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Rear Seat Entertainment
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Radio Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7-2 Infotainment System

. Set up the tone, speaker
Introduction adjustments, and preset radio
The vehicle has Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
stations. the audio system can be played
Infotainment For more information, see Defensive even after the ignition is turned off.
Read the following pages to Driving on page 9‑2. See Retained Accessory Power
become familiar with the audio (RAP) on page 9‑30 for more
This vehicle's infotainment system information.
system's features.
may be equipped with a noise
reduction system which can work Navigation System
{ WARNING improperly if the audio amplifier,
For vehicles with a navigation
engine calibrations, exhaust system,
Taking your eyes off the road for system, see the separate navigation
microphones, radio, or speakers are
extended periods could cause a manual.
modified or replaced. This could
crash resulting in injury or death result in more noticeable engine
to you or others. Do not give noise at certain speeds. Theft-Deterrent Feature
extended attention to The theft-deterrent feature works by
Notice: Contact your dealer
entertainment tasks while driving. learning a portion of the Vehicle
before adding any equipment.
Identification Number (VIN) to the
Adding audio or communication infotainment system. The
This system provides access to
equipment could interfere with infotainment system does not
many audio and non‐audio listings.
the operation of the engine, radio, operate if it is stolen or moved to a
To minimize taking your eyes off the or other systems, and could different vehicle.
road while driving, do the following damage them. Follow federal
while the vehicle is parked: rules covering mobile radio and
. Become familiar with the telephone equipment.
operation and controls of the
audio system.
Overview (Radio with CD) A. VOL/ O

. Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
B. g SEEK
. Radio: Seeks the previous
station.
. CD: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within a
track.
C. RADIO/BAND
. Changes the band while
listening to the radio.
. Selects the radio when
listening to a different
audio source.
D. AUX
. Selects a connected
external audio source.
E. Buttons 1 to 6
. Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
F. FAV K. k O. INFO
. Radio: Opens the . CD: Pauses the CD.
. Radio: Shows available
favorites list. information about the
L. CD current station.
G. TONE
. Selects the CD player .
. Opens the tone menu. CD: Shows available
when listening to a information about the
H. CONFIG different audio source. current track.
. Opens the settings menu. M. X (CD Eject) P. 5/>
I. MENU/SEL . Removes a disc from the . Opens the phone
. Press: Opens the menus CD slot. main menu.
and selects menu items. N. l SEEK . Mutes the audio system.
. Turn: Highlights menu
items or sets values while
. Radio: Seeks the next Q. H
station.
in a menu. Manually . Opens the clock menu.
. CD: Selects the next track
selects radio stations while
listening to the radio. or fast forwards within a R. } BACK
track. . Menu: Moves one
J. CD Slot
level back.
. Insert a CD.
. Character Input: Deletes
the last character.
Overview (Radio with CD/DVD/MEM) A. VOL/ O

. Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
B. g SEEK
. Radio: Seeks the previous
station.
. CD/DVD: Selects the
previous track or rewinds
within a track.
. MEM: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within a
track.
C. RADIO/BAND
. Changes the band while
. Selects the radio when
listening to a different
audio source.
D. MEM/DVD/AUX
. Selects MEM, CD/DVD,
USB, or a connected front
or rear auxillary audio
source.
E. Buttons 1 to 6 J. CD/DVD Slot N. l SEEK

. Radio: Saves and selects . Insert a disc. . Radio: Seeks the next
favorite stations. station.
K. k (Play/Pause)
. MEM: Saves and selects . CD/DVD: Selects the next
. Radio: Pauses time shifted
favorite tracks and track or fast forwards
playlists. content.
within a track.
F. FAV
. CD/DVD: Pauses CD/DVD‐
A and DVD‐V playback.
. MEM: Selects the next
. Radio: Opens the Stops DVD‐V playback. track or fast forwards
favorites list. within a track.
. MEM: Pauses MEM
. MEM: Opens the playback. O. INFO
favorites list. . Radio: Shows available
G. TONE
L. O REC information about the
. CD/DVD: Records content current station.
. Opens the tone menu.
from audio CDs and MP3/ . CD/DVD: Shows available
H. CONFIG WMA CDs. information about the
. Opens the settings menu. . AUX: Records content current track.
I. MENU/SEL from USB mass storage . MEM: Shows available
devices. information about the
. Press: Opens menus and
selects menu items. M. X (CD Eject) current track.
. Turn: Highlights menu . Removes a disc from the P. 5 / > (Phone/Mute)
items or sets values while CD/DVD slot. . Opens the phone
in a menu. Manually main menu.
selects radio stations while
. Mutes the audio system.
Q. DEL Automatic Switch‐Off Menu System

. MEM: Deletes the current If the infotainment system has been Controls
track from MEM. turned on after the ignition is turned
off, the system will turn off The MENU/SEL knob and the
R. } BACK automatically after 10 minutes. } BACK button are used to
navigate the menu system.
. Menu: Moves one
Volume Control MENU/SEL (Menu/Select):
level back.
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Turn to Press to:
. Character Input: Deletes
the last character. adjust the volume. . Enter the menu system.
5 / > (Mute): For vehicles with . Select or activate the highlighted
Operation OnStar, press and hold 5 / > to menu option.
Controls mute the infotainment system. Press . Confirm a set value.
and hold 5 / > again, or turn the . Turn a system setting on or off.
The infotainment system is operated
by using the pushbuttons, VOL/ O knob to cancel mute.
Turn to:
multifunction knobs, display menus, For vehicles without OnStar, press
and steering wheel controls,
. Highlight a menu option.
5 / > to mute the infotainment
if equipped. . Select a value.
system. Press 5 / > again, or turn
Turning the System On or Off the VOL/ O knob to cancel mute. } BACK: Press to:
VOL/ O (Volume/Power): Press to
. Exit a menu.
turn the system on and off. . Return from a submenu screen
to the previous menu screen.
. Delete the last character in a
sequence.
Selecting a Menu Option Activating a Setting Turning a Function On or Off
1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
move the highlighted bar. highlight the setting. highlight the function.
2. Press the MENU/SEL button to 2. Press the MENU/SEL button to 2. Press the MENU/SEL button to
select the highlighted option. activate the setting. turn the function on or off.
Submenus Setting a Value Entering a Character Sequence
An arrow on the right‐hand edge of 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
the menu indicates that it has a change the current value of the highlight the character.
submenu with other options. setting. 2. Press the MENU/SEL button to
2. Press the MENU/SEL button to select the character.
confirm the setting.
Press the } BACK button to delete Adjusting the Treble, Midrange, Press the } BACK button to go
the last character in the sequence and Bass back to the Tone Settings menu.
or press and hold to delete the
entire character sequence. Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)
For vehicles that have an equalizer:
Audio Settings
The audio settings can be set for
each radio band and each audio
player source. 1. Press the TONE button.
To quickly reset an audio setting 2. Select Treble, Midrange,
value to 0: or Bass.
1. Press the TONE button. 3. Select the value. 1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select the audio setting.
Press the } BACK button to go 2. Select EQ.
3. Press and hold the MENU/SEL back to the Tone Settings menu. 3. Select the setting.
button until the value changes
to 0. Adjusting the Fader and Balance Press the } BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
Press the } BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu.
1. Press the TONE button.

2. Select Fader or Balance.
3. Select the value.
System Settings Auto Volume Maximum Startup Volume

Configuring the Number of The auto volume feature The maximum volume played when
Favorite Pages automatically adjusts the radio the Radio with CD is first turned on
volume to compensate for road and can be set.
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up
or slows down, so that the volume
level is consistent.
The level of volume compensation
can be selected, or the auto volume
feature can be turned off.
To configure the number of available
favorite pages: 1. Press the CONFIG button.
1. Press the CONFIG button. 2. Select Radio Settings.
2. Select Radio Settings. 3. Select Maximum Startup
Volume.
3. Select Radio Favorites.
4. Select the setting.
4. Select the number of available
1. Press the CONFIG button.
favorite pages. 5. Press the } BACK button
2. Select Radio Settings. to go back to the System
5. Press the } BACK button Configuration menu.
to go back to the System 3. Select Auto Volume.
Configuration menu. 4. Select the setting.
5. Press the } BACK button to go
back to the System
Configuration menu.
Radio 1 to 6: Press to select preset Selecting a Band

stations.
Press the RADIO/BAND button to
AM-FM Radio RDS (Radio Data System) choose AM, FM, or XM™,
if equipped. The last station that
Control Buttons The radio may have RDS. The RDS was playing starts playing again.
feature is available for use only on
The buttons used to control the FM stations that broadcast RDS Selecting a Station
radio are: information. This feature only works
when the information from the radio Seek Tuning (Radio with CD)
RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the
radio on and choose between AM, station is available. In rare cases, a If the radio station is not known:
FM, and XM™, if equipped. radio station could broadcast
incorrect information that causes the Briefly press g SEEK or l SEEK,
MENU/SEL: Turn to manually radio features to work improperly. to automatically search for the next
search for stations. If this happens, contact the radio available station. If a station is not
FAV: Press to open the station. found, the radio switches to a more
favorites list. sensitive search level. If a station
While the radio is tuned to an still is not found, the frequency that
l SEEK or g SEEK: Press to FM-RDS station, the station name was last active begins to play.
search for stations. Press and hold or call letters display.
to fast forward and rewind time If the radio station is known:
shifted data. See “Time Shifting Radio Menus
Press and hold g SEEK or
(Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)” Radio menus are available for AM
later in this section. and FM.
l SEEK until the station on the
display is reached, then release the
k: Press to pause and resume Press the MENU/SEL knob to open button.
time shifted data. See “Time Shifting the main radio menu for that band.
(Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)”
later in this section.
Seek Tuning (Radio with CD/DVD Station Lists 3. Select the programming type.
and MEM) 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. A list of stations that transmit
programming of the selected
Briefly press l SEEK or g SEEK, 2. Select AM or FM Station List. All type displays.
to automatically search for the next receivable stations in the current
available station. If a station is not reception area are displayed. If a 4. Select the station.
found, the radio switches to a more station list has not been created, The category lists are updated
sensitive search level. If a station an automatic station search when the station lists are
still is not found, the frequency that is done. updated.
was last active begins to play.
3. Select the station. Updating Station & Category Lists
Manual Tuning
Category Lists If stations stored in the station list
Turn the MENU/SEL knob to select can no longer be received:
the frequency on the display. Most stations that broadcast an
RDS program type code specify the 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
Favorites List type of programming transmitted. 2. Select Update AM or FM Station
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. Some stations change the program List, if the stations stored in the
type code depending on the station list are no longer
2. Select Favorites List. content. The system stores the RDS received. A station search will be
3. Select the station. stations sorted by program type in completed and the first station in
the FM category list. the updated list will play.
To search for a programming type To cancel the station search, press
determined by station: the MENU/SEL knob.
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
2. Select FM category list. A list of
all programming types available
displays.
Storing a Station as a Favorite the radio, the content from the When the radio station is changed,
current station is always being the buffer is cleared and
Stations from all bands can be
buffered. automatically restarted for the
stored in any order in the favorite
current station. Content from a
pages. Press k to pause the radio. The previously tuned station is no longer
Up to six stations can be stored in radio displays the time shift status available.
each favorite page and the number bar. The status bar shows the
amount of content stored in the The time shift feature is not
of available favorite pages can
buffer and the current pause point. available while recording or with
be set.
other sources of playback.
Storing a Station as a Favorite To resume playback from the
current pause point, press k again. Pausing AM/FM with the Vehicle
To store the station to a position in Turned Off
The radio is no longer live, but
the list, press the corresponding
played from the time shift buffer. If AM/FM is paused when the
button 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.
A status bar displays below the vehicle is turned off, the radio
Retrieving Stations station number. continues to buffer the current radio
station for up to 20 minutes. If the
Press the FAV button to open a Press and hold g SEEK or vehicle is turned back on within
favorite page or to switch to another l SEEK to fast forward or rewind 20 minutes, the radio resumes
favorite page. Briefly press one of through the time shift buffer. Hold playback from the paused point.
the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve the l SEEK until the end of the
station. recorded buffer resumes live Satellite Radio
Time Shifting (Radio with CD/ playback.
Vehicles with an XM™ Satellite
DVD and MEM) Press and release g SEEK or Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite
The radio with MEM time shift l SEEK to jump forward or back Radio subscription can receive XM
feature can rewind 20 minutes of 30 seconds in the time shift buffer. programming.
FM/AM content. While listening to
XM Satellite Radio Service FAV: Press to open the Removing or Adding Categories
favorites list. Channels in a category that have
XM is a satellite radio service based
in the 48 contiguous United States k: Press to pause and resume been removed can still be accessed
and 10 Canadian provinces. XM time shifted data. See “Time Shifting by using the g SEEK or l SEEK
Satellite Radio has a wide variety of (Radio with CD/DVD and MEM)” in buttons, or the MENU/SEL knob.
programming and commercial-free this section.
music, coast-to-coast, and in To add or remove categories:
1 to 6: Press to select preset
digital-quality sound. If XM service stations. 1. Press the CONFIG button.
needs to be reactivated, the radio
MENU/SEL: Turn to select stations. 2. Select Radio Settings.
will display “No Subscription Please
Renew on channel XM1.” A service Press to open the XM Satellite 3. Select XM Categories.
fee is required to receive the XM Radio menu.
4. Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
service. For more information, Selecting the XM Band highlight the category.
contact XM at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and Press the RADIO/BAND button to 5. Press the MENU/SEL knob to
www.xmradio.ca or call choose between the AM, FM, and remove or add the category.
1-877-438-9677 in Canada. XM bands. The last channel played
in that band begins to play when Selecting an XM Channel
Control Buttons that band is selected. XM channels can be selected by
The buttons used to control the XM XM Categories using g SEEK, l SEEK, the
radio are: MENU/SEL knob, or the menu
XM channels are organized in system.
RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the categories.
radio on and choose between AM,
FM, and XM™, if equipped.
g SEEK / l SEEK: Press to go
to the previous or next station.
Selecting a Channel Using To select a channel using the menu: Storing a Channel as a Favorite
g SEEK or l SEEK (Radio 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob and To store the channel to a position
with CD) select Channel List. in the list, press and hold the
corresponding 1 to 6 button until
. Press and release g SEEK or 2. Select the desired channel.
the channel can be heard again.
l SEEK to go to the previous Selecting a Channel Using the
or next channel. Menu System Retrieving Channels
. Press and hold g SEEK or 1. Turn the MENU/SEL knob. Press the FAV button to open a
l SEEK to scroll through the favorite page or to change to
2. Select XM Category List. another favorite page. Briefly press
previous or next channel until
the channel is reached. 3. Select the category. one of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve
the channel.
Selecting a Channel Using 4. Select the channel.
Time Shifting (Radio with CD/
g SEEK or l SEEK (Radio Storing an XM Channel as a DVD and MEM)
with CD/DVD and MEM) Favorite
The radio with MEM time shift
Press and release g SEEK or Channels from all bands can be feature can rewind 20 minutes of
l SEEK to go to the previous or stored in any order in the favorite XM content. While listening to the
next channel. pages. radio, the content from the current
Selecting a Channel Using the Up to six channels can be stored in channel is always being buffered.
MENU/SEL Knob each favorite page and the number
Press k to pause the radio. The
of available favorite pages can
To select an XM channel using the be set. radio displays the time shift status
MENU/SEL knob: bar. The status bar shows the
Turn the MENU/SEL knob to amount of content stored in the
highlight an XM channel. The buffer and the current pause point.
channel is selected after a short
delay.
To resume playback from the Pausing XM with the Vehicle Channel Off Air: This channel is
current pause point, press k again. Turned Off not currently in service. Tune in to
The radio is no longer live, but If XM is paused when the vehicle is another channel.
played from the time shift buffer. turned off, the radio continues to Channel Unauth: This channel is
A status bar displays below the buffer the current radio station for blocked or cannot be received with
channel number. up to 20 minutes. If the vehicle is your XM Subscription package.
turned back on within 20 minutes,
Press and hold g SEEK or Channel Unavailable: This
the radio resumes playback from the
l SEEK to fast forward or rewind paused point.
previously assigned channel is no
through the time shift buffer. Hold longer assigned. Tune to another
l SEEK until the end of the XM Messages station.
recorded buffer resumes live No Artist Info: The system is
XL (Explicit Language
playback. working properly. No artist
Channels): These channels, or any
Press and release g SEEK or others, can be blocked by request, information is available at this time
by calling 1-800-929-2100 in the on this channel.
l SEEK to go to the next or
previous song in the time shift U.S. and 1-877-438-9677 in No Title Info: The system is
buffer. Canada. working properly. No song title
XM Updating: The encryption code information is available at this time
When the channel is changed, the
in the receiver is being updated, no on this channel.
buffer is cleared and automatically
restarted for the current channel. action is required. This process No CAT Info: The system is
Content from a previously tuned should take no longer than working properly. No category
station is no longer available. 30 seconds. information is available at this time
Loading XM: The audio system is on this channel.
The time shift feature is not
available while recording or with acquiring and processing audio and
other sources of playback. text data; no action is needed. This
message should disappear shortly.
No Information: The system is Unknown: If this message is FM

working properly. No text or received when tuned to channel 0,
FM signals only reach about 16 to
informational messages are there could be a receiver fault.
65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the
available at this time on this Consult with your dealer.
radio has a built-in electronic circuit
channel. Check Antenna: If this message that automatically works to reduce
No Subscription Please Renew: does not clear within a short period interference, some static can occur,
XM subscription needs to be of time, the receiver could have a especially around tall buildings or
reactivated. Contact XM at fault. Consult with your dealer. hills, causing the sound to fade in
www.xmradio.com or call XM Not Available: If this message and out.
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and does not clear within a short period
www.xmradio.ca or call AM
of time, the receiver could have a
1-877-438-9677 in Canada. fault. Consult with your dealer. The range for most AM stations is
No XM Signal: The system is greater than for FM, especially at
working properly. The vehicle may Radio Reception night. The longer range can cause
be in a location where the XM signal station frequencies to interfere with
is being blocked. When the vehicle Frequency interference and static each other. Static can occur when
is moved into an open area, the can occur during normal radio things like storms and power lines
signal should return. reception if items such as cell phone interfere with radio reception. When
chargers, vehicle convenience this happens, try reducing the treble
CAT Not Found: The system is accessories, and external electronic on the radio.
working properly. There are no devices are plugged into the
channels available for the selected accessory power outlet. If there is
category. interference or static, unplug the
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, item from the accessory power
this message alternates with the XM outlet.
Radio 8‐digit radio ID label. This
label is needed to activate the
service.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service Audio Players mild neutral detergent solution
mixed with water, and clean it. Wipe
XM Satellite Radio Service gives
the disc from the center to the
digital radio reception from coast to CD Player outer edge.
coast in the 48 contiguous United
States, and in Canada. Just as with The CD player can play audio CDs Care of the CD Player
FM, tall buildings or hills can and MP3 CDs.
Do not add a label to a disc, as it
interfere with satellite radio signals, The CD player will not play could get caught in the CD player.
causing the sound to fade in and 8 cm (3 in) CDs. If a label is needed, label the top of
out. In addition, traveling or standing
Care of CDs the recorded disc with a
under heavy foliage, bridges,
marking pen.
garages, or tunnels may cause loss Sound quality can be reduced due
of the XM signal for a period of time. to disc quality, recording method, Do not use disc lens cleaners
quality of the music recorded, and because they could contaminate the
Cellular Phone Usage how the disc has been handled. lens of the disc optics and damage
Cellular phone usage can cause Handle discs carefully and store the CD player.
interference with the vehicle's radio. them in their original cases or other Notice: If a label is added to a
protective cases away from direct CD, more than one CD is inserted
Multi-Band Antenna sunlight and dust. If the bottom into the slot at a time, or an
surface of a disc is damaged, the attempt is made to play scratched
The multi-band antenna is on the disc may not play properly or at all.
roof of the vehicle. The antenna is or damaged CDs, the CD player
Do not touch the bottom surface of could be damaged. While using
used for the AM‐FM radio, OnStar, a disc while handling it; this could
the XM Satellite Radio Service the CD player, use only CDs in
damage the surface. Pick up discs good condition without any label,
System, and GPS (Global by grasping the outer edges or the
Positioning System), if the vehicle load one CD at a time, and keep
edge of the hole and the outer edge. the CD player and the loading slot
has these features. Keep the
antenna clear of obstructions for If the bottom surface of a disc is free of foreign materials, liquids,
clear reception. dirty, take a soft lint‐free cloth, and debris.
or dampen a clean soft cloth in a
Control Buttons Removing a CD Using the CD Menu:

The buttons used to control the CD Press the X button. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
player are: 2. Select Tracks list.
The disc is pushed out of the
CD: Press to choose between the CD slot. 3. Select the track.
CD and AUX player.
If the disc is not removed after it is Playing Tracks in Random Order
l SEEK or g SEEK: Press to ejected, it is pulled back in after a
select tracks or to fast forward or few seconds. Press the MENU/SEL knob and
rewind within a track. then set Shuffle Songs to On.
INFO: Press to display additional
Playing a CD or MP3 CD
Fast Forward and Rewind
information about the CD that may Press the CD button. If there is a
be available. disc in the player it begins playing. Press and hold l SEEK or
g SEEK to fast forward or rewind
MENU/SEL: Turn to select tracks. Information about the disc and within the current track.
current track is shown on the
X (Eject): Press to remove
display depending on the data Selecting an MP3 Track
the CD.
stored. Using the control buttons:
k : Press to pause a CD or MP3
track; press again to resume Selecting a CD Track . Press g SEEK or l SEEK to
playback. Using the control buttons: select the previous or next track.
Inserting a CD . Press g SEEK or l SEEK to . Turn the MENU/SEL knob.
With the printed side facing up, select the previous or next track. Using the CD Menu:
insert a disc into the CD slot until it . Turn the MENU/SEL knob. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
is drawn in.
2. Select Playlists/Folders.
3. Select the playlist or folder.
4. Select the track.
Searching for MP3 Tracks CD/DVD Player mild neutral detergent solution
The search feature may take some mixed with water, and clean it. Wipe
The CD/DVD player can play CDs, the disc from the center to the
time to display the information after DVD‐As, MP3/WMA CDs, MP3/
reading the disc due to the amount outer edge.
WMA DVDs, and DVD‐Vs.
of information stored on the disc. Care of the CD/DVD Player
FM automatically plays while the The CD/DVD player will not play
disc is being read. 8 cm (3 in) discs. Do not add a label to a disc, as it
could get caught in the CD/DVD
Tracks can be searched by: Care of CDs and DVDs player. If a label is needed, label the
. Playlists Sound quality can be reduced due top of the recorded disc with a
to disc quality, recording method, marking pen.
. Artists quality of the music recorded, and Do not use disc lens cleaners
. Albums how the disc has been handled. because they could contaminate the
. Song Titles Handle discs carefully and store lens of the disc optics and damage
them in their original cases or other the CD/DVD player.
. Genres protective cases away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the bottom Notice: If a label is added to a
. Folder View CD, more than one CD is inserted
surface of a disc is damaged, the
To search for tracks: disc may not play properly or at all. into the slot at a time, or an
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. Do not touch the bottom surface of attempt is made to play scratched
a disc while handling it; this could or damaged CDs, the CD player
2. Select Search. damage the surface. Pick up discs could be damaged. While using
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, by grasping the outer edges or the the CD player, use only CDs in
Song Titles, Genres, edge of the hole and the outer edge. good condition without any label,
or Folder View. load one CD at a time, and keep
If the bottom surface of a disc is the CD player and the loading slot
4. Select the track. dirty, take a soft lint‐free cloth, free of foreign materials, liquids,
or dampen a clean soft cloth in a and debris.
Control Buttons Removing a CD or DVD Using the menu:

The buttons used to control the CD/ Press the X button. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
DVD player are: 2. Select Tracks List.
The disc is pushed out of the CD/
MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to choose DVD slot. 3. Select the track.
between the MEM, CD/DVD,
and AUX. If the disc is not removed after it is Pausing a CD or DVD‐A Track
ejected, it is pulled back in after a
l SEEK or g SEEK: Press to few seconds. Press k to pause a CD or DVD‐A
select tracks or to fast forward or track. Press k again to continue
rewind within a track. Playing a CD or DVD‐A Disc
playing the track.
INFO: Press to display additional Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button.
information about the disc that may If there is a disc in the player, it Playing CD or DVD‐A Tracks in
be available. begins playing. Random Order
MENU/SEL: Turn to select tracks. Information about the disc and Press the MENU/SEL knob and
current track is shown on the then set Shuffle Songs to On.
X (Eject): Press to remove a disc. display depending on the data Fast Forward and Rewind
k : Press to pause a CD, DVD‐A, stored.
or DVD‐V; press again to resume Press and hold l SEEK or
playback. Press and hold to stop a Selecting CD or DVD‐A Tracks g SEEK to fast forward or rewind
DVD‐V disc. Using the control buttons: within the current track.
Inserting a CD or DVD . Press g SEEK or l SEEK to Playing an MP3 CD or DVD
With the printed side facing up, select the previous or next track. Files that are not stored in folders
insert a disc into the slot until it is . Turn the MENU/SEL knob. are displayed in the root
drawn in. directory (disc).
The search rate increases if the Files that do not have any meta Playing MP3 Tracks in Random
MENU/SEL knob is continuously data stored in the ID3 tag display Order
turned while searching in a list. as Unknown. Press the MENU/SEL knob and
Selecting an MP3 Track Tracks can be searched for by: then set Shuffle Songs to On.
. Playlists
Using the control buttons: Recording an Audio or MP3
. Press g SEEK or l SEEK to
. Artists CD to MEM
select the previous or next track. . Albums See Mass Storage Media (MEM) on
. Turn the MENU/SEL knob. . Song Titles
Using the CD or DVD Menu: . Genres Playing a DVD‐V
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. The number of objects in each See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
category is shown in parentheses System on page 7‑32 for information
2. Select Folder List. about how to control a Video DVD
after the category.
3. Select the folder. using the wireless remote control.
To search for tracks:
4. Select the track. Selecting a Chapter
Searching for MP3s on a CD Using the control buttons:
2. Select Search.
or DVD
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
. Press g SEEK or l SEEK to
It is normal for the search feature Song Titles, or Genres. select the previous or next track.
to take some time to display the
information after reading the disc 4. Select the track. The search rate
. Turn the MENU/SEL knob.
due to the amount of information increases if the menu MENU/ Using DVD Menu:
stored on the disc. The infotainment SEL knob is continuously turned
while searching in a list. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
system automatically switches to
FM while the disc is being read. 2. Select Chapter List.
3. Select the chapter.

. Cursor DOWN
Selecting a Title Mass Storage
. Cursor RIGHT Media (MEM)
. Cursor LEFT
2. Select Title List. Infotainment systems with MEM
3. Select the title.
. Up Menu storage are able to record up to
Use the following actions to 1.1 GB (gigabyte) of music from
Changing the Audio Stream Audio CDs, MP3/WMA/AAC discs,
navigate the menu on a DVD‐V Disc
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. while playing chapters. and USB storage devices. The MEM
player can also time shift audio from
2. Select Audio Stream. . Pause (Play) AM, FM, and XM™ radio.
3. Select Change Audio Stream. . Chapter List Music or content stored in MEM that
4. Press MENU/SEL to change the . Title List you did not create, or have the right
selection. to distribute, must be deleted before
. DVD/DVD the sale or end of the lease of the
5. Select Cancel to exit the menu. . DVD/AUX vehicle.
Pausing a DVD . AUX/DVD Control Buttons
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. . AUX/AUX The buttons used to control the
2. Select Pause, to pause the disc. MEM player are:
To navigate the menu:
Select Pause to start playback.
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. MEM/DVD/AUX: Press to select
Navigating the DVD‐V Disc Menu the MEM player.
2. Select the action.
Use the following actions to l SEEK or g SEEK: Press to
navigate the title menu on a select tracks or to fast forward or
DVD‐V Disc. rewind within a track.
. Select/Enter INFO: Press to display additional
. Cursor UP information about the MEM track
that may be available.
k : Press to pause the track playing, the system will restart the Renaming Recorded Discs
currently playing; press again to track and begin recording from the Discs that have been recorded to
resume playback. beginning of the track. When the MEM can be renamed.
song recording is completed, the
O REC: Press to record music message Song Recorded to MEM 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
from a CD, DVD-A, or USB drive. displays, and there may be a slight 2. Select Rename Recorded Discs.
FAV (Favorites): Press to display pause.
MEM favorites. 3. Select the disc.
Songs recorded to MEM are stored
1‐6: Press to select a track or a as the current date, disc, and track 4. Select Album or Artist to rename
stored playlist. number. either one.
MENU/SEL: Turn to select tracks. Re-recording a Previously 5. Use the menu knob to enter the
Recorded Disc character sequence. See
Recording From Audio CDs Operation on page 7‑7 for more
If the disc or track has already been information.
The infotainment system can record recorded to MEM, the message The
the current song playing or all songs Song(s) is Already Recorded Recording From MP3/WMA
from an audio CD to MEM. A status displays. Discs or USB Storage Devices
bar appears on the top of the
display when the recording process Stopping the Recording USB Host Support
starts and disappears when the The USB connector uses the USB
process has ended. Copy protected Press the O REC button while
recording from an audio CD to standards, 1.1 and 2.0.
CDs cannot be recorded to MEM.
display the stop recording option. USB Supported Devices
Recording to MEM Select Stop Recording Song
to MEM.
. USB Flash Drives
Press O REC, then select Record . Portable USB Hard Drives
Current Song or Record All Songs
on Disc. If the track has started
Recording to MEM Deleting Tracks From MEM Searching For a Track

Press O REC, then select Record Individual tracks and all tracks can Tracks can be searched for by:
Current Song or Record Current be deleted from MEM. . Playlists
Folder. To delete individual tracks, press . Artists
The information stored by MEM is and release the DEL button while
titled according to the ID3 tag the track is playing.
. Albums
associated with it. To delete all tracks from MEM,
. Song Titles
Re-recording a Previously press and hold the DEL button while . Genres
Recorded Disc a track is playing.
The number of objects in each
If the disc or track has already been Playing From MEM category is shown in parentheses
recorded to MEM, the message The after the category.
Playing Back a Previously
Song(s) is Already Recorded To search for tracks:
Recorded CD
displays.
Turn the MENU/SEL knob to select 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
Stopping the Recording a track if MEM is already playing 2. Select Search.
Press the O REC button while from the previously recorded disc.
recording from an MP3/WMA CD or 1. Select Recorded Disc List. Song Titles, or Genres.
USB storage device to display the
2. Select the disc. 4. Select the track. The search rate
stop recording option. Select Stop
Recording Song to MEM. 3. Select the track. increases if the MENU/SEL knob
is continuously turned while
searching in a list.
Shuffle Songs 3. Select MEM Favorites. Genre: Saves the genre associated
Select the Shuffle Songs option 4. Remove the check mark from with the currently playing track in
from the MEM menu to randomly the box to remove that MEM the indicated favorites position.
play back tracks stored in MEM. favorites category. Creating Playlists
Configuring MEM Favorites Replace the check mark to re-add To create a playlist using tracks
the removed category. stored in MEM:
During MEM playback, press the
FAV button to change between Saving MEM Tracks as 1. Select Playlist from the MEM
favorite categories. The favorite Favorites favorites.
categories are: 2. Select the track to be stored in
Favorites can be saved by
. Playlists pressing and holding one of the 1 to the playlist.
. Artists 6 buttons. Favorites can be stored 3. Press and hold one of the 1 to
according to the following list: 6 buttons until the track can be
. Albums
Playlist: Adds the currently playing heard again to store the track.
. Genres track to the playlist selected. 4. Repeat Steps 1 though 3 to
To remove MEM favorites Artist: Saves the artist associated store additional tracks in the
categories: with the currently playing track in playlist.
1. Press the CONFIG button. the indicated favorites position.
2. Select Radio Settings. Album: Saves the album
associated with the currently playing
track in the indicated favorites
position.
Auxiliary Devices (Radio 3.5 mm Auxiliary Input Jack Connecting and Controlling
with CD) Playback of an audio device that is an iPod®
connected to the 3.5 mm auxiliary Not all iPods can be controlled by
The auxiliary input allows portable
input jack can only be controlled the infotainment system.
devices to be connected using the
using the controls on the device.
3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack or the Connecting an iPod
optional USB port. Adjusting the Volume
Connect the iPod to the USB port.
Portable devices are controlled by Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the
using the menu system described in Searching For a Track
volume of the infotainment system
Operation on page 7‑7. after the volume level has been set Tracks can be searched for by:
on the portable audio device. . Playlists
USB Port . Artists
For vehicles with a USB port, the . Albums
following devices may be connected . Song Titles
and controlled by the infotainment
system. . Podcasts
® . Genres
. iPods
. PlaysForSure Devices (PFD) . Audiobooks
. USB Drives . Composers
. Zunes To search for tracks:
The auxiliary input is located in the Not all iPods, PFDs, USB Drives, 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
center console. and Zunes are compatible with the 2. Select Search.
infotainment system.
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, Connecting and Controlling a Shuffle Functionality

Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres, PlaysForSure Device (PFD) Press the MENU/SEL knob and set
Audiobooks, or Composers. or Zune™ Shuffle Songs (Random) to On
4. Select the track. Connecting a PFD or Zune or Off.
Shuffle Connect the PFD or Zune to the On: Plays current tracks in random
USB port. order.
Press the MENU/SEL knob and set
Shuffle Songs (Random) to On or Off: Plays current tracks in
Searching For a Track sequential order.
Off, then press the } BACK button
to return to the main screen. Tracks can be searched for by:
Repeat Functionality
On: Plays tracks in the current
. Playlists
Press the MENU/SEL knob and set
folder in random order. . Artists Repeat to On or Off.
Off: Plays tracks in the current . Albums Repeat On: Repeats the current
folder in sequential order. . Song Titles track.
Repeat . Podcasts Repeat Off: Playback starts from
Press the MENU/SEL knob and set the beginning of the current track
. Genres after the last track finishes.
Repeat to On or Off, then press the
} BACK button to return to the main To search for tracks:
Connecting and Controlling a
screen. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. USB Drive
On: Repeats the current track. 2. Select Search. The infotainment system can only
Off: Playback starts from the 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, play back .mp3 and .wma files from
beginning of the current track after Song Titles, Podcasts, a USB drive.
the last track finishes. or Genres. Only the first 2,500 songs are
4. Select the track. recognized on the device.
When a device is not supported, the Tracks can be searched for by: Shuffle Functionality
message “No supported data found. . Playlists* Press the MENU/SEL knob and set
You can safely disconnect the Shuffle Songs (Random) to On
device” appears. . Artists
or Off.
Connecting a USB Drive
. Albums
On: Plays current tracks in random
. Song Titles
Connect the USB drive to the order.
USB port. . Genres Off: Plays current tracks in
Searching For a Track . Folder View sequential order.
It is normal for the search feature to *This only displays if a playlist is Repeat Functionality
take some time to display the found on the device. Press the MENU/SEL knob and set
information after reading the disc To search for tracks: Repeat to On or Off.
due to the amount of information
stored on the disc. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. Repeat On: Repeats the current
track.
Files that do not have any meta 2. Select Search.
data stored in the ID3 tag display as Repeat Off: Playback starts from
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, the beginning of the current track
Unknown. Song Titles, Genres, after the last track finishes.
or Folder View.
4. Select the track.
Auxiliary Devices (Radio 3.5 mm Auxiliary Input Jack Connecting and Controlling
with CD/DVD/MEM) Playback of an audio device that is an iPod®
connected to the 3.5 mm auxiliary Not all iPods can be controlled by
The auxiliary input allows portable
input jack can only be controlled the infotainment system.
devices to be connected using the
using the controls on the device.
3.5 mm (1/8 in) input jack or the Connecting an iPod
optional USB port. Adjusting the Volume
Connect the iPod to the USB port.
Portable devices are controlled by Turn the VOL/ O knob to adjust the
using the menu system described in Selecting a Track
volume of the infotainment system
Operation on page 7‑7. after the volume level has been set Using the control buttons:
on the portable audio device. . Press g SEEK or l SEEK to
USB Port select the previous or next track.
The following devices may be . Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
connected to the USB port and select the track in the current
controlled by the infotainment submenu. The track will start
system. to play.
. iPods Playing Tracks in Random Order
. USB Mass Storage Devices Press the MENU/SEL knob and set
Not all iPod's or USB Mass Storage Shuffle Songs to On or Off.
Devices are compatible with the Shuffle On: Plays current tracks in
infotainment system. random order.
The auxiliary input is located in the
Shuffle Off: Plays current tracks in
center console.
sequential order.
Searching for a Track Connecting and Controlling a Selecting a Track

Tracks can be searched for by: USB Drive Using the control buttons:
. Playlists Files that are not stored in folders . Press g SEEK or l SEEK to
are displayed in the root
. Artists select the previous or next track.
directory (USB).
. Albums . Turn the MENU/SEL knob to
Connecting a USB Drive select a track in the current
. Song Titles submenu. The track will start
Connect the USB drive to the
. Genres USB port. to play.
. Composers Disconnecting a USB Drive Selecting a track in a different
. Audiobooks folder:
A USB drive should be ejected from
The number of objects in each the USB port before disconnecting 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob.
category is shown in parentheses it. To eject a USB drive: 2. Select Folder List.
after the category. 1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. 3. Select the folder.
To search for tracks: 2. Select USB Eject. 4. Select the track.
1. Press the MENU/SEL knob. Playing Tracks in Random Order Searching for Tracks
2. Select Search. Press the MENU/SEL knob and It is normal for the search feature to
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums, then set Shuffle Songs to On. take some time to display the
Song Titles, Genres, information after reading the device
Composers, or Audiobooks. due to the amount of information
4. Select the track. The search rate stored.
increases if the MENU/SEL knob Files that do not have any meta
is continuously turned while data stored in the ID3 tag display as
searching in a list. Unknown.
Tracks can be searched by: Rear Seat Before Driving

. Playlists The RSE is for rear seat
Infotainment passengers only. The driver cannot
. Artists
safely view the video screen while
. Albums Rear Seat Entertainment driving.
. Song Titles (RSE) System In severe or extreme weather
. Genres The vehicle may have a DVD Rear conditions, the RSE system may not
Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. work until the temperature is within
The number of objects in each The RSE system works with the the operating range. The operating
category is shown in parentheses vehicle's infotainment system. The range is above −20°C (−4°F) and
after the category. below 60°C (140°F). If the
DVD player is part of the front radio.
To search for tracks: The RSE system includes a radio temperature is outside of this range,
with a DVD player, two rear seat heat or cool the vehicle until it is
video display screens, audio/video within the operating range.
2. Select Search. jacks, two wireless headphones,
and a remote control. See CD/DVD Global Off
Song Titles, Genres, Player on page 7‑20 or the separate Depending on the infotainment
Composers, or Audiobooks. navigation system manual for more system, the RSE system may have
information on the vehicle's DVD a Global Off feature. The Global Off
4. Select the track. The search rate system. feature disables all RSE system
increases if the MENU/SEL knob features. Press and hold the radio
is continuously turned while power button for more than
searching in a list. three seconds for Global Off to
Recording Tracks to MEM disable the RSE features.
See Mass Storage Media (MEM) on
On some infotainment systems, the Headphones media. The wireless headphones

Global Off feature can be turned off have an On/Off button, channel
by performing one of the following: 1/2 switch, and a volume control.
. Press and hold the radio power Turn the headphones off when not
button for more than in use.
three seconds. Push the On/Off button to turn on
. Insert or eject any disc. the headphones. A light on the
headphones comes on. If the light
. Insert a DVD video disc. does not come on, check the
. Press the remote control power batteries. Intermittent sound or static
button. can also indicate weak batteries.
See “Battery Replacement” later in
. Press the MEM/DVD/AUX button this section for more information.
or k when a DVD video disc is
Infrared transmitters are on the top
in the player. A. Battery Cover of the left seatback video screen.
. Press the SRC button on the B. Channel 1 or 2 Switch The headphones shut off
steering wheel when a DVD C. Power Button automatically to save the battery
video disc is in the player. power if the RSE system is shut off
D. Volume Control or if the headphones are out of
. Cycle the ignition.
E. Power Indicator Light range of the transmitters for more
than three minutes. Moving too far
RSE includes two 2-channel forward or stepping out of the
wireless headphones. Channel 1 is vehicle can cause the headphones
dedicated to the DVD player, and to lose the signal or have static.
Channel 2 is dedicated to any
external auxiliary device connected To adjust the volume on the
to the A/V jacks. The headphones headphones, use the volume
are used to listen to various multi‐ control.
For optimal audio performance, the Battery Replacement Power for auxiliary devices is not
headphones must be worn correctly. To change the batteries: supplied by the radio system.
Headphones should be worn with To use the auxiliary inputs of the
the headband over the top of the 1. Loosen the screw to the battery
door located on the left side of RSE system:
head for best audio reception. The
symbol L (Left) appears on the the headphones. 1. Connect the auxiliary device
outside bottom edge of the ear cup 2. Slide the battery door open. cables to the A/V jacks.
and should be positioned on the left 2. Power on both the auxiliary
ear. The symbol R (Right) appears 3. Replace the two AAA batteries.
device and the RSE video
on the outside bottom edge of the 4. Replace the battery door and screen.
ear cup and should be positioned on tighten the screw.
the right ear. Changing the Source on the Video
Remove the batteries if the Display Screens
Notice: Do not store the headphones are not going to be
headphones in heat or direct used for a long period of time. The image from the auxiliary device
sunlight. This could damage the can be switched between the video
headphones and repairs will not Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks display screens.
be covered by the warranty. If available, the A/V jacks are To change the display:
Storage in extreme cold can located on the rear of the floor
weaken the batteries. Keep the 1. Press the AUX button on the
console. They allow audio or video
headphones stored in a cool, dry remote control to change the
cables to be connected from an
place. source of both video screens
auxiliary device such as a
from the DVD player to the
If the foam ear pads attached to the camcorder or a video game system.
auxiliary device.
headphones become worn or The A/V jacks are color coded:
damaged, the pads can be replaced 2. Press the AUX button a second
separately from the headphone set.
. Yellow for video input. time to change the left video
To purchase replacement ear pads, . White for left audio input. screen source to the DVD player
call 1‐888‐293‐3332, then prompt and the right video screen to the
. Red for right audio input. auxiliary device.
zero (0), or contact your dealer.
3. Press the AUX button a third Audio Output

time to change the left video
Audio from the DVD player or
screen source to the auxiliary
auxiliary inputs can be heard
device and the right video
through the following:
screen to the DVD player.
. Wireless Headphones
4. Press the AUX button a fourth
time to change the source of . Vehicle Speakers
both video screens to the DVD The RSE system transmits the
player. audio signal to the wireless
Changing the RSE Video Screen headphones if an audio signal is
Settings available. See “Headphones” earlier
in this section for more information.
The screen display mode, To use the video screen:
brightness, and language can be The front seat passengers are able
changed from the setup menu using to listen to playback from the A/V 1. Push the release button located
the remote control. To change a jacks through the vehicle speakers on the seatback console.
setting: by selecting Rear A/V as the source 2. Move the screen to the desired
on the radio. viewing position.
1. Press z.
Video Screens Push the video screen down into its
2. Use n, q, p, o, and r to locked position when it is not in use.
The video screens are located in the
select the settings. The screen turns off automatically.
back of the driver and front
3. Press z again to exit the passenger seats. Only the left RSE seatback console
setup menu. contains the infrared transmitters for
the wireless headphones. They may
be visible as eight illuminated LEDs.
These LEDs are not on the right Remote Control If a CD, DVD, or MP3 disc is in the
video screen. Both seatback Radio DVD slot, the remote control
consoles contain an infrared O button can be used to turn on the
receiver for the remote control. They video screen display and start the
are located at the top of each disc. The infotainment system can
console. also turn on the video screen
Notice: Avoid directly touching display. See CD/DVD Player on
the video screen, as damage may page 7‑20 or the separate
occur. See “Cleaning the Video navigation system manual for more
Screen” later in this section for information.
more information. Notice: Storing the remote
control in a hot area or in direct
Video Screen Input Jack sunlight can damage it, and the
Each video screen is equipped with repairs will not be covered by the
a video input jack to allow video To use the remote control, aim it at warranty. Storage in extreme cold
cables to be connected from an the transmitter window at either can weaken the batteries. Keep
auxiliary device such as a seatback console and press the the remote control stored in a
camcorder or a video game system. button. Direct sunlight or very bright cool, dry place.
This signal will override any video light could affect the ability of the Remote Control Buttons
provided by the RSE system; either RSE transmitter to receive signals
the DVD or auxiliary A/V jack from the remote control. Check the O (Power): Press to turn the video
source. The RSE system must be batteries if the remote control does screens on and off.
on for this input to operate. not seem to be working. See P (Illumination): Press to turn the
“Battery Replacement” later in this remote control backlight on. The
section. Objects blocking the line of backlight times out after several
sight could also affect the function seconds if no other button is
of the remote control. pressed.
v (Title): Press to return to the c (Stop): Press to stop playing, u (Next Track/Chapter): Press to
main menu of the DVD. This rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. go to the beginning of the next
function could vary for each disc. Press twice to return to the chapter or track. This button might
y (Main Menu): Press to access beginning of the DVD. not work when the DVD is playing
the DVD menu. The DVD menu is s (Play/Pause): Press to start the copyright information or the
different on every DVD. Use the playing a DVD. Press to pause a previews.
navigation arrows to move the DVD while it is playing. Press again r (Fast Reverse): Press to
cursor. After making a selection to continue playing. quickly reverse the DVD or CD. To
press the enter button. This button Depending on the infotainment stop fast reversing a DVD video,
only operates when using a DVD. system in the vehicle, DVD press s. To stop fast reversing a
n, q , p , o (Menu Navigation playback may be slowed down by DVD audio or CD, release r. This
Arrows): Use the arrow buttons to pressing s then [. Reverse slow button might not work when the
navigate through a menu. DVD is playing the copyright
play by pressing s then r. Press
r (Enter): Press to select the s again to cancel slow play. information or the previews.
highlighted choice in any menu.
t (Previous Track/Chapter): [ (Fast Forward): Press to fast
z (Display Menu): Press to adjust Press to go to the start of the forward the DVD or CD. To stop fast
the brightness and screen display current track or chapter. Press again forwarding a DVD video, press s.
mode, and display the to go to the previous track or To stop fast forwarding a DVD audio
language menu. chapter. This button may not work or CD, release [. This button might
q (Return): Press to exit the when the DVD is playing the not work when the DVD is playing
current active menu and return to copyright information or the the copyright information or the
the previous menu. This button previews. previews.
operates only when the display e (Audio): Press to change audio
menu or a DVD menu is active. tracks on DVDs that have this
feature when the DVD is playing.
{ (Subtitles): Press to turn ON/ Aux Left Right 1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):
OFF subtitles and to move through Button Screen Screen The numbered keypad provides the
subtitle options when a DVD is Press capability of direct chapter or track
playing. number selection.
Third Aux Video DVD
AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switch Press Source Media Replacing the Remote Control
the video display between the DVD If the remote control becomes lost
player and an auxiliary source. Return to Return to
Fourth or damaged, a new universal
Default Default
The AUX button also controls the Press remote control can be purchased.
State State
source display between the left and Use a Toshiba® code set for
right video screens as described in replacement universal remote
2 (Camera): Press to change the controls.
the table below: camera angle on DVDs that have
Aux Left Right this feature when the DVD is Battery Replacement
Button Screen Screen playing.
Press To change the remote control
\ (Clear) (If Available): Press this batteries:
Default button within three seconds after
DVD DVD 1. Slide back the rear cover on the
State (No inputting a numeric selection, to
Media Media remote control.
Press) clear all numeric inputs.
2. Replace the two batteries in the
First Aux Video Aux Video } 10 (Double Digit Entries) (If compartment.
Press Source Source Available): Press this button to
select chapter or track numbers 3. Replace the battery cover.
Second DVD Aux Video greater than 9. Press this button
Press Media Source Remove the batteries from the
before inputting the number. remote control if unused for an
extended period of time.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended Action
No power. The ignition might not be turned to ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY.
The picture does not fill the screen. There are black Check the display mode settings in the setup menu by
borders on the top and bottom or on both sides or it pressing the display menu button on the remote control.
looks stretched out.
In auxiliary mode, the picture moves or scrolls. Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.
The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no obstruction between the
remote control and the transmitter window.
Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead or
installed incorrectly.
After stopping the player, I push Play but sometimes the If the Stop button was pressed one time, the DVD player
DVD starts where I left off and sometimes at the resumes playing where the DVD was stopped. If the
beginning. stop button was pressed two times the DVD player
begins to play from the beginning of the DVD.
The auxiliary source is running but there is no picture or Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliary
sound. source mode by pressing the AUX button on the remote
control.
Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.
Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont.)

Problem Recommended Action
Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range,
buzzes. and interference from cellular telephone towers or by
using a cellular telephone in the vehicle.
Check that the headphones are on correctly using
the L (left) and R (right) on the headphones.
Check that the headphones are positioned properly
with the headband across the top of the head.
I lost the remote and/or the headphones. See your dealer for assistance.
The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound. Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the DVD
player by pressing the AUX button on the remote
control.
DVD Display Error Messages Disc Format Error or Unknown No Disc Inserted: No disc is
Format: The disc is inserted with present when the X EJECT or
The DVD display error message
the disc label wrong side up, or the MEM/DVD/AUX button is pressed
depends on which radio the vehicle
disc is damaged. on the radio.
has. The video screen may display
one of the following: Disc Region Error or Disc Error:
The disc is not from a correct
Disc Load/Eject Error or
region.
Mechanical Error: There are disc
load or eject problems.
DVD Distortion Rear Seat Audio (RSA) To listen to a portable audio device
through the RSA, attach the
Video distortion can occur when System portable audio device to either the
operating cellular phones, scanners,
Vehicles with this feature allow the front or rear auxiliary input,
CB radios, Global Position Systems
rear seat passengers to listen to if available. Turn the device on, then
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax,
and control any of the music choose the front auxiliary input with
or walkie talkies.
sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or other the RSA SRCE button.
It might be necessary to turn off the auxiliary sources. RSA can only
DVD player when operating one of control music sources that the front
these devices in or near the vehicle. seat passengers are not listening to,
*Excludes the OnStar® System. except on radios where dual control
is allowed.
Cleaning the RSE Seatback RSA can function when the front
Console
radio is off. X displays on the
Use only a clean cloth dampened infotainment system when RSA
with clean water to clean the RSE is on.
seatback console surface.
Audio can be heard through wired
Cleaning the Video Screen headphones (not included) plugged P (Power): Press to turn the RSA
into the jacks on the RSA. If the on or off.
Use only a clean cloth dampened
vehicle has a Rear Seat Volume: Turn to increase or
with clean water. Use care when
Entertainment system with wireless decrease the volume of the wired
touching or cleaning the screen as
headphones, audio can also be headphones. The left knob controls
damage could result.
heard on Channel 2 of the wireless the left headphones and the right
headphones. knob controls the right. Use the
volume control on headphones for
wireless headphones.
SRCE (Source): Press to select While listening to a disc, press ¨ to When a CD or DVD audio disc is
between the radio, CD, and if these go to the next track or chapter on playing, press PROG to go to the
features are available: DVD, front or beginning of the disc or display disc
the disc. Press © to go back to the
rear auxiliary, HDD, USB. The front info. If the front seat passengers are
radio may override the rear start of the current track or chapter if listening to a disc, this function may
selection as required. more than ten seconds have played. be inactive on some radios.
If the front seat passengers are
© ¨ (Seek): While listening to the listening to a disc, this function may When a disc is playing in the CD or
radio, press to go to the previous or be inactive on some radios. Press DVD changer, press and hold
to the next station and stay there. and hold © or ¨ to fast reverse or PROG to select the next disc,
If the front seat passengers are if multiple discs are loaded. If the
fast forward.
listening to the radio, this function front seat passengers are listening
may be inactive on some radios. When a DVD video menu is being to a disc, this function may be
displayed, press © or ¨ to cursor up inactive on some radios.
Press and hold © or ¨ until “Tune”
or down on the menu. Hold © or ¨ to The PROG button may be used to
displays. Continue to press © or ¨ to
cursor left or right on the menu. access the menu of an MP3. Once
tune to an individual station. Tune
PROG (Program): Press to go to in the menu, use © or ¨ to make
stays active until © or ¨ has not
the next preset radio station or selections.
been pressed for several seconds.
If the front seat passengers are channel set on the main radio. If the When a DVD video menu is
listening to the radio, this function front seat passengers are listening displayed, press PROG, or press
may be inactive on some radios. to the radio, this function may be and hold PROG to perform the
inactive on some radios. menu function, ENTER.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle. Vehicles with a Bluetooth system
Phone The system may not work with can use a Bluetooth‐capable cell
all cell phones. See “Pairing a phone with a Hands‐Free Profile to
Bluetooth (Overview) Phone” in this section for more make and receive phone calls. The
For vehicles equipped with information. infotainment system and voice
Bluetooth capability, the system can . If the cell phone has voice recognition are used to control the
interact with many cell phones, dialing capability, learn to use system. The system can be used
allowing: that feature to access the while the ignition is in ON/RUN or
address book or contact list. See ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of
. Placement and receipt of calls in the Bluetooth system can be up to
a hands-free mode. “Voice Pass-Thru” in this section
for more information. 9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phones support
. Sharing of the cell phone’s all functions and not all phones work
address book or contact list with
. See “Storing and Deleting Phone with the Bluetooth system. See
the vehicle. Numbers” in this section for www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
more information. information about compatible
To minimize driver distraction,
phones.
before driving, and with the vehicle
parked:
{ WARNING Bluetooth Controls
. Become familiar with the When using a cell phone, it can Use the buttons located on the
features of the cell phone. be distracting to look too long or infotainment system and the
Organize the phone book and too often at the screen of the steering wheel to operate the
contact lists clearly and delete phone or the infotainment Bluetooth system.
duplicate or rarely used entries. (navigation) system. Taking your
If possible, program speed dial eyes off the road too long or too Steering Wheel Controls
or other shortcuts. often could cause a crash b / g (Push To Talk): Press to
. Review the controls and resulting in injury or death. Focus answer incoming calls, to confirm
operation of the infotainment your attention on driving. system information, and to start
system. voice recognition.
$ / i (Mute/End Call): Press to Audio System Bluetooth (Infotainment

end a call, reject a call, or to cancel When using the Bluetooth system, Controls)
an operation. sound comes through the vehicle's
For information about how to
Infotainment System Controls front audio system speakers and
navigate the menu system using the
overrides the audio system. Use the
For information about how to infotainment controls, see Operation
VOL/ O knob during a call to on page 7‑7.
navigate the menu system using the
infotainment controls, see Operation change the volume level. The
adjusted volume level remains in Pairing
on page 7‑7.
memory for later calls. The system A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phone
5 / > (Phone):Press to enter the maintains a minimum volume level. must be paired to the Bluetooth
Phone main menu.
Other Information system first and then connected to
Voice Recognition the vehicle before it can be used.
The Bluetooth® word mark and See the cell phone manufacturer
The voice recognition system uses logos are owned by the Bluetooth® user guide for Bluetooth functions
commands to control the system SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks before pairing the cell phone. If a
and dial phone numbers. by General Motors is under license. Bluetooth phone is not connected,
Noise: The system may not Other trademarks and trade names calls will be made using OnStar®
recognize voice commands if there are those of their respective owners. Hands‐Free Calling, if available.
is too much background noise. See Radio Frequency Statement on Refer to the OnStar Owner's Guide
When to Speak: A tone sounds to page 13‑16 for FCC information for for more information.
indicate that the system is ready for Federal Communications A Bluetooth phone with MP3
a voice command. Wait for the tone Commission and Industry Canada capability can not be connected to
and then speak. information. the vehicle as a phone and an MP3
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a player at the same time.
calm and natural voice.
The pairing process can be started Pairing a Phone 7. The system responds with
by using the voice recognition 1. Press the CONFIG button. “<Phone name> has been
system or the controls on the successfully paired” after the
infotainment system. 2. Select Phone Settings. pairing process is complete.
Pairing Information: 3. Select Bluetooth. 8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to pair
. Up to five cell phones can be 4. Select Pair Device (Phone). additional phones.
paired to the Bluetooth system. A four‐digit Personal Listing All Paired and Connected
Identification Number (PIN) Phones
. The pairing process is disabled appears on the display.
when the vehicle is moving. 1. Press the CONFIG button.
5. Start the pairing process on the
. The Bluetooth system links with cell phone that will be paired to 2. Select Phone Settings.
the first available paired cell the vehicle. Reference the cell 3. Select Bluetooth.
phone in the order the phone phone manufacturers user guide
was paired. for information on this process. 4. Select Device List.
. Only one paired cell phone can Locate the device named “Your Deleting a Paired Phone
be connected to the Bluetooth Vehicle” in the list on the cell 1. Press the CONFIG button.
system at a time. phone and follow the instructions
2. Select Phone Settings.
. Pairing should only need to be on the cell phone to enter the
completed once, unless changes PIN provided by the system. 3. Select Bluetooth.
to the pairing information have 6. The system prompts for a name 4. Select Device List.
been made or the phone is for the phone and confirms the
deleted. 5. Select the phone to delete and
name provided. This name is follow the on screen prompts.
To link to a different paired phone, used to indicate which phone is
see “Linking to a Different Phone” connected.
later in this section.
Linking to a Different Phone Making a Call Using Radio with CD

To link to a different phone, the new Phone Book To make a call using the Phone
phone must be in the vehicle and For cell phones that support the Book menu:
available to be connected to the phone book feature, the Bluetooth
Bluetooth system before the system can use the contacts stored
1. Press 5 / > twice.
process is started. on your cell phone to make calls. 2. Select Phone Book.
1. Press the CONFIG button. See your cell phone's owner's guide 3. You can search through the list
or contact your wireless provider to by selecting the letter group the
2. Select Phone Settings. find out if this feature is supported phone book entry begins with,
3. Select Bluetooth. by your phone. or press SELECT to scroll
4. Select Device List. When a cell phone supports the through the entire list of names/
phone book feature, the Phone numbers in the phone book.
5. Select the new phone to link to
Book and Call Lists menus are 4. Select the name or number you
and follow the on screen
automatically available. want to call.
prompts.
The Phone Book menu allows you To make a call using the Call
If delete is selected, the
to access the phone book stored in Lists menu:
highlighted phone will be
the cell phone to make a call.
deleted.
The Call Lists menu allows you to 1. Press 5 / > twice.
access the phone numbers from the 2. Select Call Lists.
Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, and
3. Select the Incoming Calls,
Missed Calls menus on your cell
Outgoing Calls, or Missed
phone to make a call.
Calls list.
4. Select the name or number you
want to call.
Radio with CD/DVD and MEM Making a Call Accepting or Declining a Call
1. Press 5 / >. Radio with CD When an incoming call is received,
the infotainment system mutes and
2. Select Phone Book. 1. Press 5 / > twice. a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
3. You can search through the list 2. Enter the character sequence. Accepting a Call
by selecting the letter group the See “Entering a Character
phone book entry begins with, Sequence” in Operation on Press the MENU/SELECT knob to
or press SELECT to scroll page 7‑7 for more information. “Answer” and press the MENU/
through the entire list of names/ SELECT knob to accept the call.
numbers in the phone book. 3. Select Call to start dialing the
number. Declining a Call
4. Select the name or number you
Radio with CD/DVD and MEM Press the MENU/SELECT knob to
want to call.
“Decline” and press the MENU/
To make a call using the Call 1. Press 5 / >. SELECT knob to decline the call.
Lists menu:
2. Select Enter number. Call Waiting
1. Press 5 / >. 3. Enter the character sequence. Call waiting must be supported on
2. Select Call Lists. See “Entering a Character the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
Sequence” in Operation on the wireless service carrier to work.
3. Select the Incoming Calls, page 7‑7 for more information.
Outgoing Calls, or Missed Accepting a Call
Calls list. 4. Select Call to start dialing the
number. Press the MENU/SELECT knob to
4. Select the name or number you “Answer” and press the MENU/
want to call. SELECT knob to accept the call.
Declining a Call 3. Enter the character sequence Dual Tone Multi-Frequency

Press the MENU/SELECT knob to then select Call. See “Entering a (DTMF) Tones
“Decline” and press the MENU/ Character Sequence” in
Operation on page 7‑7 for more The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can
SELECT knob to decline the call. send numbers during a call. This is
information.
Switching Between Calls (Call used when calling a menu‐driven
4. After the call has been placed, phone system.
Waiting Calls Only)
press the MENU/SELECT knob
To switch between calls: and choose Merge Calls. 1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob
and select Enter Number.
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob. 5. To add more callers to the
conference call, repeat Steps 1 2. Enter the character sequence.
2. Select Switch Call from See “Entering a Character
the menu. through 4. The number of callers
that can be added are limited by Sequence” in Operation on
Conference Calling your wireless service carrier. page 7‑7 for more information.
Conference calling and three‐way Ending a Call Bluetooth (Voice

calling must be supported on the
Bluetooth phone and enabled by the Press the MENU/SELECT knob and Recognition)
wireless service carrier to work. select Hang Up.
Pairing
To start a conference while in a Muting a Call
A Bluetooth cell phone must be
current call: To Mute a Call paired to the Bluetooth system and
1. Press the MENU/SELECT knob. then connected to the vehicle before
Press the MENU/SELECT knob and
it can be used. See the cell phone
2. Select Enter Number. select Mute Call.
manufacturer's user guide for
To Cancel Mute Bluetooth functions before pairing
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
Press the MENU/SELECT knob and
is not connected, calls will be made
select Mute Call.
using OnStar® Hands‐Free Calling, To link to a different paired phone, 4. Start the pairing process on the
if available. Refer to the OnStar see “Linking to a Different Phone” cell phone that will be paired to
owner's guide for more information. later in this section. the vehicle. Reference the cell
The pairing process can be started phone manufacturer's user guide
Pairing a Phone for information on this process.
by using the voice recognition
system or the controls on the 1. Press b / g. Locate the device named “Your
infotainment system. . For vehicles without a Vehicle” in the list on the cell
Pairing Information: navigation system, the phone and follow the instructions
system responds “Ready,” on the cell phone to enter the
. Up to five cell phones can be followed by a tone. four‐digit PIN number that was
paired to the Bluetooth system. provided in Step 3.
. For vehicles with a
. The pairing process is disabled navigation system, the 5. The system prompts for a name
when the vehicle is moving. system responds with a for the phone. This name will be
. The Bluetooth system links with tone. After the tone say used to indicate which phone is
the first available paired cell “Hands Free.” The system connected. The system confirms
phone in the order the phone responds “Ready,” followed the name.
was paired. by a tone. 6. The system responds with
. Only one paired cell phone can 2. Say “Bluetooth.” The system “<Phone name> has been
be connected to the Bluetooth responds “Bluetooth ready,” successfully paired” after the
system at a time. followed by a tone. pairing process is complete.
. Pairing only needs to be 3. Say “Pair.” The system responds 7. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 for
completed once, unless the with instructions and a four‐digit additional phones to be paired.
pairing information changes or Personal Identification Number
the phone is deleted. (PIN). The PIN will be used in
Step 4.
Listing All Paired and Connected Deleting a Paired Phone 4. Say the name of the phone to be
Phones deleted. If the phone name is
1. Press b / g. unknown, use the “List”
1. Press b / g. . For vehicles without a command for a list of all paired
. For vehicles without a navigation system, the phones. The system responds
navigation system, the system responds “Ready,” “Would you like to delete <phone
system responds “Ready,” followed by a tone. name>? Yes or No,” followed by
followed by a tone. a tone.
. For vehicles with a navigation system, the 5. Say “Yes” to delete the phone.
navigation system, the system responds with a The system responds “OK,
system responds with a tone. After the tone say deleting <phone name>.”
tone. After the tone say “Hands Free.” The system Linking to a Different Phone
“Hands Free.” The system responds “Ready,” followed
responds “Ready,” followed by a tone. 1. Press b / g.
by a tone. 2. Say “Bluetooth.” The system . For vehicles without a
2. Say “Bluetooth.” The system responds “Bluetooth ready,” navigation system, the
responds “Bluetooth ready,” followed by a tone. system responds “Ready,”
followed by a tone. 3. Say “Delete.” The system asks followed by a tone.
3. Say “List.” The system lists which phone to delete followed . For vehicles with a
all paired Bluetooth devices. by a tone. navigation system, the
The system will respond “is system responds with a
connected” if a phone is tone. After the tone say
connected to the vehicle. “Hands Free.” The system
responds “Ready,” followed
by a tone.
2. Say “Bluetooth.” The system Using the Store Command 3. Say the complete phone number
responds “Bluetooth ready,” The store command allows a phone to be stored at once with no
followed by a tone. number to be stored without pauses.
3. Say “Change phone.” The entering the digits individually. . If the system recognizes
system responds “Please wait the number, the response is
while I search for other phones.” 1. Press b / g. “OK, Storing.”
. For vehicles without a
. If another phone is found, . If the system does not
the response will be navigation system, the recognize the phone
“<Phone name> is now system responds “Ready,” number, the response is
connected.” followed by a tone. “Store <Phone number>.
. If another phone is not
. For vehicles with a Please say yes or no.” If
found, the original phone navigation system, the the number is correct, say
remains connected. system responds with a “Yes.” If the number is not
tone. After the tone say correct, say “No.” The
Storing Name Tags “Hands Free.” The system system will ask for the
responds “Ready,” followed number again.
The system can store up to
30 phone numbers as name tags by a tone. 4. After the system stores the
that are shared between the 2. Say “Store.” The system phone number, it responds
Bluetooth and OnStar systems. responds “Store, number “Please say the name tag,”
please,” followed by a tone. followed by a tone.
The system uses the following
commands to store and retrieve
phone numbers:
. Store
. Digit Store
. Directory
5. Say a name tag for the phone

. For vehicles with a 4. After the complete number has
number. The name tag is navigation system, the been entered, say “Store.” The
recorded and the system system responds with a system responds “Please say
responds “About to store <name tone. After the tone say the name tag,” followed by
tag>. Does that sound OK?.” “Hands Free.” The system a tone.
. If the name tag does not by a tone. 5. Say a name tag for the phone
sound correct, say “No” and number. The name tag is
repeat Step 5. 2. Say “Digit Store.” The system recorded and the system
responds with “Please say the responds “About to store <name
. If the name tag sounds first digit to store,” followed by
correct, say “Yes” and the tag>. Does that sound OK?.”
a tone.
name tag is stored. After . If the name tag does not
the number is stored the 3. Say the first digit to be stored. sound correct, say “No” and
system returns to the The system will repeat back the repeat Step 5.
main menu. digit it heard followed by a tone.
Continue entering digits until the
. If the name tag sounds
Using the Digit Store Command number to be stored is complete. correct, say “Yes” and the
name tag is stored. After
The digit store command allows a . If an unwanted number is the number is stored the
phone number to be stored by recognized by the system, system returns to the
entering the digits individually. say “Clear” at any time to main menu.
1. Press b / g. clear the last number.
. To hear all of the numbers
. For vehicles without a
recognized by the system,
navigation system, the
say “Verify” at any time.
system responds “Ready,”
followed by a tone.
Using the Directory Command Deleting Name Tags 2. Say “Delete.” The system
The directory command lists all of responds “Delete, please say
The system uses the following
the name tags stored by the system. the name tag,” followed by
commands to delete name tags:
To use the directory command: a tone.
. Delete
3. Say the name tag to be deleted.
1. Press b / g. . Delete all name tags The system responds “Would
. For vehicles without a you like to delete, <name tag>?
Using the Delete Command
navigation system, the Please say yes or no.”
system responds “Ready,” The delete command is used to . If the name tag is correct,
followed by a tone. delete specific name tags.
say “Yes” to delete the
. For vehicles with a To delete name tags: name tag. The system
navigation system, the responds with “OK, deleting
system responds with a
1. Press b / g. <name tag>, returning to
tone. After the tone say . For vehicles without a the main menu.”
“Hands Free.” The system navigation system, the . If the name tag is incorrect,
responds “Ready,” followed system responds “Ready,” say “No.” The system
by a tone. followed by a tone. responds with “No. OK, let's
2. Say “Directory.” The system . For vehicles with a try again, please say the
responds “Directory” and lists all navigation system, the name tag.”
stored name tags. The system system responds with a
returns to the main menu when tone. After the tone say
the list is complete. “Hands Free.” The system
by a tone.
Using the Delete All Name Tags 2. Say “Delete all name tags.” The Using the Dial Command
Command system responds “You are about
to delete all name tags stored in 1. Press b / g.
The Delete All Name Tags
command deletes all stored phone your phone directory and your . For vehicles without a
book name tags and route name route destination directory. Are navigation system, the
tags for OnStar, if stored. you sure you want to do this? system responds “Ready,”
Please say yes or no.” followed by a tone.
To delete all name tags: . Say “Yes” to delete all . For vehicles with a
1. Press b / g. name tags. navigation system, the
. For vehicles without a . Say “No” to cancel the system responds with a
navigation system, the function and return to the tone. After the tone say
system responds “Ready,” main menu. “Hands Free.” The system
followed by a tone. responds “Ready,” followed
Making a Call by a tone.
Calls can be made using the 2. Say “Dial.” The system responds
following commands: “Dial using <phone name>.
tone. After the tone say . Dial “Number please,” followed by
“Hands Free.” The system a tone.
. Digit Dial
responds “Ready,” followed 3. Say the entire number without
. Call
by a tone. pausing.
. Re‐dial . If the system recognizes
the number, it responds
with “OK, Dialing” and dials
the number.

. If the system does not 2. Say “Digit Dial.” The system Using the Call Command
recognize the number, it responds “Digit dial using
confirms the numbers <phone name>, please say the 1. Press b / g.
followed by a tone. If the first digit to dial,” followed by . For vehicles without a
number is correct, say a tone. navigation system, the
“Yes.” The system responds system responds “Ready,”
“OK, Dialing” and dials the 3. Say the digits to be dialed one at
a time. The system repeats back followed by a tone.
number. If the number is
not correct, say “No.” The the digit it heard followed by . For vehicles with a
system will ask for the a tone. navigation system, the
number again. 4. Continue entering digits until the system responds with a
number to be dialed is complete. tone. After the tone say
Using the Digit Dial Command “Hands Free.” The system
After the whole number has
1. Press b / g. been entered, say “Dial.” The responds “Ready,” followed
system responds “OK, Dialing” by a tone.
. For vehicles without a and dials the number. 2. Say “Call.” The system responds
. If an unwanted number is “Call using <phone name>.
recognized by the system, Please say the name tag,”
followed by a tone.
say “Clear” at any time to followed by a tone.
. For vehicles with a clear the last number. 3. Say the name tag of the person
. To hear all of the numbers to call.
tone. After the tone say recognized by the system, . If the system recognizes
“Hands Free.” The system say “Verify” at any time. the name tag it responds
responds “Ready,” followed “OK, calling, <name tag>”
by a tone. and dials the number.

. If the system does not . For vehicles with a Call Waiting
recognize the name tag, it navigation system, the
confirms the name tag system responds with a Call waiting must be supported on
followed by a tone. If the tone. After the tone say the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
name tag is correct, say “Hands Free.” The system the wireless service carrier.
“Yes.” The system responds responds with “Ready,” . Press b g to answer an
with “OK, calling, <name followed by a tone.
incoming call when another call
tag>” and dials the number. 2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.” The is active. The original call is
If the name tag is not system responds “Re‐dial using placed on hold.
correct, say “No.” The <phone name>” and dials the
system will ask for the last number called from the
. Press b g again to return to the
name tag again. connected Bluetooth phone. original call.
Once connected, the person called Once connected, the person called . To ignore the incoming call, no
will be heard through the audio will be heard through the audio action is required.
speakers. speakers. . Press $ / i tto disconnect the
Using the Re‐dial Command current call and switch to the call
Receiving a Call
1. Press b / g. on hold.
When an incoming call is received,
. For vehicles without a the audio system mutes and a ring
navigation system, the tone is heard in the vehicle.
followed by a tone.
. Press b g to answer the call.
. Press $ / i to ignore a call.
Three‐Way Calling Muting a Call Transferring a Call

Three‐way calling must be During a call, all sounds from inside Audio can be transferred between
supported on the Bluetooth phone the vehicle can be muted so that the the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system and
and enabled by the wireless service person on the other end of the call the cell phone.
carrier. cannot hear them.
To Transfer Audio to the Cell
1. While on a call, press b g. The To Mute a call Phone
system responds with “Ready,” During a call with the audio in the
1. Press b g. The system
followed by a tone. vehicle:
responds “Ready,” followed by
2. Say “Three‐way call.” The a tone. 1. Press b g. The system
system responds with “Three‐
way call, please say dial or call.” 2. Say “Mute Call.” The system responds “Ready,” followed by
responds “Call muted.” a tone.
3. Use the dial or call command to
To Cancel Mute 2. Say “Transfer Call.” The system
dial the number of the third party
to be called. responds “Transferring call” and
1. Press b g. The system the audio transfers to the cell
4. Once the call is connected, responds “Ready,” followed by phone.
press b g to link all callers a tone.
together. 2. After the tone, say “Mute Call.”
The system responds
Ending a Call “Resuming call.”
Press $ / i to end a call.
To Transfer Audio to the In-Vehicle Voice Pass-Thru 2. Say “Bluetooth.” The system
Bluetooth System responds “Bluetooth ready,”
Voice pass‐thru allows access to the
The cell phone must be paired and followed by a tone.
voice recognition commands on the
connected with the Bluetooth cell phone. See the cell phone 3. Say “Voice.” The system
system before a call can be manufacturer's user guide to see if responds “OK, accessing
transferred. The connection process the cell phone supports this feature. <phone name>.”
can take up to two minutes after the . The cell phone's normal
To access contacts stored in the cell
ignition is turned to ON/RUN or prompt messages will go
phone:
ACC/ACCESSORY. through their cycle
For vehicles without a navigation 1. Press b / g. according to the phone's
system, press b g during a call . For vehicles without a operating instructions.
with the audio on the cell phone. navigation system, the Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
The audio transfers to the vehicle. system responds “Ready,”
(DTMF) Tones
followed by a tone.
For vehicles with a navigation
The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system can
system, press b g during a call
send numbers and the numbers
with the audio on the cell phone. navigation system, the
stored as name tags during a call.
If the audio does not transfer to the system responds with a
Use this feature when calling a
vehicle, use the audio transfer tone. After the tone say
menu‐driven phone system.
feature on the cell phone. See the “Hands Free.” The system
Account numbers can also be
cell phone manufacturer's user responds “Ready,” followed
stored for use.
guide for more information. by a tone.
Sending a Number During a Call Sending a Stored Name Tag Clearing the System
During a Call
1. Press b g. The system Unless information is deleted out of
responds “Ready,” followed by 1. Press b g. The system the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, it
a tone. responds “Ready,” followed by will be retained indefinitely. This
a tone. includes all saved name tags in the
2. Say “Dial.” The system responds phone book and phone pairing
“Say a number to send tones,” 2. Say “Send name tag.” The information. For information on how
followed by a tone. system responds “Say a name to delete this information, see the
3. Say the number to send. tag to send tones,” followed by previous sections on Deleting a
a tone. Paired Phone and Deleting
. If the system recognizes
3. Say the name tag to send. Name Tags.
the number, it responds
“OK, Sending Number” and . If the system recognizes
the dial tones are sent and the number, it responds
the call continues. “OK, Sending <name tag>”
. If the system does not and the dial tones are sent
recognize the number, it and the call continues.
responds “Dial Number, . If the system does not
please say yes or no?,” recognize the name tag, it
followed by a tone. If the responds “Dial <name tag>,
number is correct, say please say yes or no?,”
“Yes.” The system responds followed by a tone. If the
“OK, Sending Number” and name tag is correct, say
the dial tones are sent and “Yes.” The system responds
the call continues. with “OK, Sending <name
tag>” and the dial tones are
sent and the call continues.
2 NOTES
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control Systems

The vehicle's heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation can be controlled
Climate Control Systems with this system.
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
A. Fan Control E. Defrost

B. Air Delivery Mode Controls F. Rear Window Defogger
C. Temperature Control G. Recirculation
D. Outside Air H. Air Conditioning
8-2 Climate Controls
A (Fan Control): Turn to increase For best results, clear all snow and Rear Window Defogger
or decrease the fan speed. Turn the ice from the windshield before
defrosting.
< (Rear Defogger): Press to turn
knob completely to T to turn the the rear window defogger on or off.
fan off. Do not drive the vehicle until all the The rear window defogger turns off
windows are clear. after about 10 minutes. It can also
Temperature Control: Turn to
increase or decrease the be turned off by turning the ignition
Air Conditioning to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/
temperature.
# (Air Conditioning): Press to OFF. If turned on again, it runs for
Air Delivery Mode Control: To turn the air conditioning on or off. about five minutes before
change the current mode, select If the fan is turned off or the outside turning off.
one of the following: temperature falls below freezing, the Do not drive the vehicle until all the
F (Vent): Air is directed to the air conditioning will not work. windows are clear.
instrument panel outlets. h (Recirculation): Press to turn Notice: Do not use a razor blade
* (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the on the recirculation. An indicator or sharp object to clear the inside
instrument panel outlets and the light comes on. Air is recirculated rear window. Do not adhere
floor outlets. inside the vehicle. It helps to quickly anything to the defogger grid
cool the air inside the vehicle or lines in the rear glass. These
7 (Floor): Air is directed to the prevent outside air and odors from
floor outlets. actions may damage the rear
entering. The air conditioning may defogger. Repairs would not be
W (Defog): Clears the windows of come on under certain conditions. covered by your warranty.
fog or moisture. Air is directed to the % (Outside Air): Press to turn
windshield and floor outlets. on the outside air. An indicator light
0 (Defrost): Clears the comes on. Outside air is circulated
windshield of fog or frost more throughout the vehicle.
quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield and side window outlets.
Automatic Climate Control System Automatic Operation
The vehicle's heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation can be controlled The system automatically controls
with this system. the fan speed, air delivery, air
conditioning, and recirculation to
heat or cool the vehicle to the
selected temperature.
When the AUTO indicator light is
on, the system is in full automatic
operation.
To place the system in
automatic mode:
1. Press AUTO.
2. Set the temperature. Allow the
system time to stabilize. Then
adjust the temperature as
needed.
A. Fan Control F. Temperature Control
B. AUTO (Automatic Operation) G. Power
C. Air Delivery Mode Controls H. Driver and Passenger Heated
D. Defrost Seats
E. Recirculation I. Rear Window Defogger

J. Air Conditioning
Manual Operation Select from the following: Air Conditioning

O (Power): Press to turn the F (Vent): Air is directed to the # (Air Conditioning): Press to
climate control system on or off. instrument panel outlets. turn the air conditioning on or off.
A (Fan Control): Turn to increase * (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the If the fan is turned off or the outside
or decrease the fan speed. instrument panel outlets and the temperature falls below freezing, the
Adjusting the fan speed while in floor outlets. air conditioning will not work. When
automatic mode places the fan in AUTO, the air conditioning will
7 (Floor): Air is directed to the come on automatically as needed.
under manual control. The AUTO floor outlets.
indicator light turns off. The air h (Recirculation): Press to turn
delivery mode remains in automatic W (Defog): Clears the windows of on the recirculation. Press to
control. fog or moisture. Air is directed to the alternate between recirculation and
windshield and floor outlets. outside air, if the vehicle does not
Temperature Control: Turn to
increase or decrease the 0 (Defrost): Clears the have a separate outside air button.
temperature inside the vehicle. windshield of fog or frost more The indicator light turns on when
quickly. Air is directed to the recirculation is selected. Air is
H / G (Air Delivery Mode windshield and side window outlets.
Control): Press mode up or mode recirculated inside the vehicle.
Selecting defrost disables the It helps quickly cool the air inside
down to cycle through the different automatic mode.
air delivery modes. The current the vehicle or prevent outside air
mode is shown on the display. For best results, clear all snow and and odors from entering.
ice from the windshield before % (Outside Air, If Equipped):
defrosting. Press to turn on the outside air. An
Do not drive the vehicle until all the indicator light comes on. Outside air
windows are clear. is circulated throughout the vehicle.
Rear Window Defogger Remote Start Climate Control Air Vents

Operation: For vehicles with the
< (Rear Defogger): Press to turn
remote vehicle start feature, the Use the air outlets, located in the
the rear window defogger on or off. center and on the side of the
climate control system may run
The rear window defogger turns off instrument panel, to direct the
when the vehicle is started remotely.
after about 10 minutes. It can also airflow. Use the thumbwheels
The system uses the driver's
be turned off by turning the ignition located near the center air outlets,
previous settings to heat or cool the
to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/ to open or close off the airflow.
inside of the vehicle. The front
OFF. If turned on again, it runs for
heated seats will turn on if it is cold
about five minutes before Operation Tips
outside. The heated seat indicator
turning off. . Clear away any ice, snow,
lights do not come on during a
Do not drive the vehicle until all the remote start. See Remote Vehicle or leaves from air inlets at the
windows are clear. Start on page 2‑4. base of the windshield that could
block the flow of air into the
Notice: Do not use a razor blade Sensors vehicle.
or sharp object to clear the inside
rear window. Do not adhere The solar sensor, located on top of . Keep the path under the front
anything to the defogger grid the instrument panel near the seats clear of objects to help
lines in the rear glass. These windshield, monitors the solar heat. circulate the air inside of the
actions may damage the rear The climate control system uses vehicle more effectively.
defogger. Repairs would not be the information to adjust the . Use of non‐GM approved hood
covered by your warranty. temperature, fan speed, deflectors can adversely affect
L / M (Driver and Passenger recirculation, and air delivery mode. the performance of the system.
Heated Seats): For vehicles with Do not cover the solar sensor or the Check with your dealer before
heated seats, see Heated Front system will not work properly. adding equipment to the outside
Seats on page 3‑8. of the vehicle.
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
The filter removes dust, pollen, and
other airborne irritants from outside
air that is pulled into the vehicle.
The filter should be replaced as part
of routine scheduled maintenance.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 11‑2 for replacement intervals. 2. Push the stop tab upwards until 7. Remove the old air filter.
To find out what type of filter to use, the stop tab is under the
see Maintenance Replacement 8. Install the new air filter.
instrument panel assembly and
Parts on page 11‑8. the glove box is released. 9. Close the service door and
The passenger compartment air latches.
3. Unsnap the tabs beneath the
filter can be accessed by removing glove box that connects it to the 10. Re‐install the glove box.
the entire glove box. bottom of the instrument panel See your dealer if additional
1. Open the glove box completely assembly. assistance is needed.
and locate the stop tab on top of 4. Remove the glove box.
the glove box door.
5. Locate the service door for the
passenger compartment air filter.
6. Push the two tabs upwards and
release the latches holding the
service door. Lift the
service door.
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Retained Accessory

Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Ride Control Systems
Traction Control
Operating Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . .
Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-31
9-31
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-41
Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Parking Over Things Cruise Control
Driving Information Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Engine Exhaust Object Detection Systems
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-45
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Running the Vehicle While Rear Vision
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Automatic Transmission Fuel
Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-34 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 9-17 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36 Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . 9-36 Gasoline Specifications (U.S.
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-18 and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Drive Systems California Fuel
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-21 All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-52
Brakes Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-52
Starting and Operating Antilock Brake Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-53
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-27 System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-54
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38 Filling a Portable Fuel
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-29 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56
Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-39
9-2 Driving and Operating
Towing Driving Information

General Towing WARNING (Continued)
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57
Driving Characteristics and Defensive Driving Driver distraction can cause
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-57 collisions resulting in injury or
Defensive driving means “always
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60 expect the unexpected.” The first possible death. These simple
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63 step in driving defensively is to wear defensive driving techniques
Trailer Sway the safety belt. See Safety Belts on could save your life.
Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64 page 3‑10.
Conversions and Add-Ons Drunk Driving
Add-On Electrical { WARNING
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
Assume that other road users { WARNING
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other Drinking and then driving is very
drivers) are going to be careless dangerous. Your reflexes,
and make mistakes. Anticipate perceptions, attentiveness, and
what they might do and be ready. judgment can be affected by even
In addition: a small amount of alcohol. You
. Allow enough following can have a serious — or even
distance between you and fatal — collision if you drive after
the driver in front of you. drinking.
. Focus on the task of driving. Do not drink and drive or ride with
(Continued) a driver who has been drinking.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are
with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with Medical research shows that Braking
drinking and driving is a global alcohol in a person's system can
tragedy. make crash injuries worse, See Brake System Warning Light on
especially injuries to the brain, page 5‑15.
Alcohol affects four things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle: spinal cord, or heart. This means Braking action involves perception
judgment, muscular coordination, that when anyone who has been time and reaction time. Deciding to
vision, and attentiveness. drinking — driver or passenger — is push the brake pedal is perception
in a crash, that person's chance of time. Actually doing it is
Police records show that almost being killed or permanently disabled reaction time.
40 percent of all motor is higher than if the person had not
vehicle-related deaths involve been drinking. Average reaction time is about
alcohol. In most cases, these three‐fourths of a second. But that
deaths are the result of someone is only an average. It might be less
Control of a Vehicle with one driver and as long as two
who was drinking and driving. In
recent years, more than The following three systems help or three seconds or more with
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related to control the vehicle while another. Age, physical condition,
deaths have been associated with driving — brakes, steering, and alertness, coordination, and
the use of alcohol, with about accelerator. At times, as when eyesight all play a part. So do
250,000 people injured. driving on snow or ice, it is easy to alcohol, drugs, and frustration.
ask more of those control systems But even in three‐fourths of a
For persons under 21, it is against than the tires and road can provide. second, a vehicle moving at
the law in every U.S. state to drink Meaning, you can lose control of the 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
alcohol. There are good medical, vehicle. See StabiliTrak® System on (66 ft). That could be a lot of
psychological, and developmental page 9‑41. distance in an emergency, so
reasons for these laws. keeping enough space between
Adding non‐dealer accessories can
The obvious way to eliminate the the vehicle and others is important.
affect vehicle performance. See
leading highway safety problem is Accessories and Modifications on
for people never to drink alcohol page 10‑3.
and then drive.
And, of course, actual stopping If the engine ever stops while the able to stop the vehicle. If power
distances vary greatly with the vehicle is being driven, brake steering assist is lost because the
surface of the road, whether it is normally but do not pump the electric power steering system is not
pavement or gravel; the condition of brakes. If the brakes are pumped, functioning, the vehicle can be
the road, whether it is wet, dry, the pedal could get harder to push steered but it will take more effort.
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the down. If the engine stops, there will If you turn the steering wheel in
brakes; the weight of the vehicle; still be some power brake assist but either direction several times until
and the amount of brake force it will be used when the brake is it stops, or hold the steering wheel
applied. applied. Once the power assist is in the stopped position for an
Avoid needless heavy braking. used up, it can take longer to stop extended amount of time, you may
Some people drive in and the brake pedal will be harder notice a reduced amount of power
spurts — heavy acceleration to push. steering assist. The normal amount
followed by heavy braking — rather Adding non‐dealer accessories can of power steering assist should
than keeping pace with traffic. This affect vehicle performance. See return shortly after a few normal
is a mistake. The brakes might not Accessories and Modifications on steering movements.
have time to cool between hard page 10‑3. The electric power steering
stops. The brakes will wear out system does not require regular
much faster with a lot of heavy Steering maintenance. If you suspect
braking. Keeping pace with the steering system problems, such as
traffic and allowing realistic following Electric Power Steering
abnormally high steering effort for a
distances eliminates a lot of (2.4L L4 Engine) prolonged period of time, contact
unnecessary braking. That means If the engine stalls while driving, the your dealer for service repairs.
better braking and longer brake life. power steering assist system will
continue to operate until you are
Hydraulic Power Steering Steering in Emergencies

(3.0L V6 Engine) There are times when steering can
If power steering assist is lost be more effective than braking. For
because the engine stops or the example, you come over a hill and
power steering system is not find a truck stopped in your lane,
functioning, the vehicle can be or a car suddenly pulls out from
steered but it will take more effort. nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right
Steering Tips in front of you. These problems can
It is important to take curves at a be avoided by braking — if you can
reasonable speed. stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot stop in time because there
Traction in a curve depends on the is no room. That is the time for An emergency like this requires
condition of the tires and the road evasive action — steering around close attention and a quick decision.
surface, the angle at which the the problem. If holding the steering wheel at the
curve is banked, and vehicle speed. recommended 9 and 3 o'clock
While in a curve, speed is the one The vehicle can perform very well in
emergencies like these. First apply positions, it can be turned a full
factor that can be controlled. 180 degrees very quickly without
the brakes. See Braking on
If there is a need to reduce speed, page 9‑3. It is better to remove as removing either hand. But you have
do it before entering the curve, while much speed as possible from a to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
the front wheels are straight. collision. Then steer around the quickly straighten the wheel once
Try to adjust the speed so you can problem, to the left or right you have avoided the object.
drive through the curve. Maintain a depending on the space available. The fact that such emergency
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to situations are always possible is a
accelerate until out of the curve, and good reason to practice defensive
then accelerate gently into the driving at all times and wear safety
straightaway. belts properly.
Off-Road Recovery the right front tire contacts the The three types of skids correspond
pavement edge. Then turn the to the vehicle's three control
The vehicle's right wheels can drop steering wheel to go straight down systems. In the braking skid, the
off the edge of a road onto the the roadway. wheels are not rolling. In the
shoulder while driving. steering or cornering skid, too much
Loss of Control speed or steering in a curve causes
tires to slip and lose cornering force.
Let us review what driving experts And in the acceleration skid, too
say about what happens when the much throttle causes the driving
three control systems — brakes, wheels to spin.
steering, and acceleration — do not
have enough friction where the tires If the vehicle starts to slide, ease
meet the road to do what the driver your foot off the accelerator pedal
has asked. and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start
In any emergency, do not give up. steering quickly enough, the vehicle
Keep trying to steer and constantly may straighten out. Always be ready
seek an escape route or area of for a second skid if it occurs.
less danger.
Of course, traction is reduced when
If the level of the shoulder is only Skidding water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
slightly below the pavement,
In a skid, a driver can lose control of material is on the road. For safety,
recovery should be fairly easy.
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid slow down and adjust your driving to
Ease off the accelerator and then,
most skids by taking reasonable these conditions. It is important to
if there is nothing in the way, steer
care suited to existing conditions, slow down on slippery surfaces
so that the vehicle straddles the
and by not overdriving those because stopping distance is longer
edge of the pavement. Turn the
conditions. But skids are always and vehicle control more limited.
steering wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to
5 in), about one-eighth turn, until possible.
While driving on a surface with Many of the vehicle design features amount of alcohol. You could have a
reduced traction, try to avoid that help make the vehicle more serious — or even fatal — accident
sudden steering, acceleration, responsive on paved roads during if you drink and drive or ride with a
or braking, including reducing poor weather conditions also help driver who has been drinking.
vehicle speed by shifting to a lower make it better suited for off‐road Off-roading can be great fun but has
gear. Any sudden changes could use than conventional passenger some definite hazards. The greatest
cause the tires to slide. You might vehicles. The vehicle does not have of these is the terrain itself. When
not realize the surface is slippery features usually thought to be off-road driving, traffic lanes are not
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to necessary for extended or severe marked, curves are not banked, and
recognize warning clues — such as off‐road use such as special there are no road signs. Surfaces
enough water, ice, or packed snow underbody shielding and transfer can be slippery, rough, uphill,
on the road to make a mirrored case low gear range. or downhill.
surface — and slow down when The airbag system is designed to
you have any doubt. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
work properly under a wide range of maneuvers. Failure to operate the
Remember: Antilock brakes help conditions, including off‐road usage. vehicle correctly off‐road could
avoid only the braking skid. Always wear your safety belt and result in loss of vehicle control or
observe safe driving speeds, vehicle rollover.
Off-Road Driving especially on rough terrain.
Off-roading involves some new
Vehicles with all‐wheel drive can be Drinking and driving can be very skills. That is why it is very
used for off‐road driving. Vehicles dangerous on any road and this is important that you read these
without all‐wheel drive should not be certainly true for off-road driving. driving tips and suggestions to help
driven off-road except on a level, At the very time you need special make off-road driving safer and
solid surface. alertness and driving skills, your more enjoyable.
reflexes, perceptions, and judgment
can be affected by even a small
Before You Go Off-Roading Loading Your Vehicle for

Off-Road Driving WARNING (Continued)
. Have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. rolls over. Put heavy loads inside
. Make sure there is enough fuel, { WARNING the cargo area, not on the roof.
that fluid levels are where they . Cargo on the load floor piled Keep cargo in the cargo area as
should be, and that the spare higher than the seatbacks far forward and low as possible.
tire is fully inflated. can be thrown forward during
. Be sure to read all the a sudden stop. You or your There are some important things to
information about all-wheel-drive passengers could be injured. remember about how to load your
vehicles in this manual. Keep cargo below the top of vehicle.
the seatbacks.
. Make sure all underbody . The heaviest things should be
shields, if the vehicle has them, . Unsecured cargo on the load on the floor, forward of the rear
are properly attached. floor can be tossed about axle. Put heavier items as far
when driving over rough forward as you can.
. Know the local laws that apply to terrain. You or your
off-roading where you will be . Be sure the load is properly
passengers can be struck by
driving or check with law secured, so things are not
flying objects. Secure the
enforcement people in the area. tossed around.
cargo properly.
. Be sure to get the necessary . Heavy loads on the roof raise You will find other important
permission if you will be on information under Vehicle Load
the vehicle's center of gravity,
private land. Limits on page 9‑21 and Tires on
making it more likely to roll
over. You can be seriously or page 10‑43.
fatally injured if the vehicle
(Continued)
Environmental Concerns
. Take extreme care with open Getting Familiar with Off-Road
fires (where permitted), camp Driving
Off-road driving can provide stoves, and lanterns.
wholesome and satisfying It is a good idea to practice in an
recreation. However, it also raises
. Never park your vehicle over area that is safe and close to home
environmental concerns. We dry grass or other combustible before you go into the wilderness.
recognize these concerns and urge materials that could catch fire Off-roading requires some new and
every off-roader to follow these from the heat of the vehicle's different skills.
basic rules for protecting the exhaust system.
Tune your senses to different kinds
environment: Traveling to Remote Areas of signals. Your eyes need to
. Always use established trails, It makes sense to plan your trip, constantly sweep the terrain for
roads, and areas that have been especially when going to a remote unexpected obstacles. Your ears
specially set aside for public area. Know the terrain and plan need to listen for unusual tire or
off-road recreational driving and your route. Get accurate maps of engine sounds. Use your arms,
obey all posted regulations. trails and terrain. Check to see if hands, feet, and body to respond to
. Avoid any driving practice that there are any blocked or closed vibrations and vehicle bounce.
could damage shrubs, flowers, roads. Controlling the vehicle is the key to
trees, or grasses or disturb It is also a good idea to travel with successful off-road driving. One of
wildlife. This includes at least one other vehicle in case the best ways to control the vehicle
wheel-spinning, breaking down something happens to one of them. is to control the speed. At higher
trees, or unnecessary driving speeds:
through streams or over soft For vehicles with a winch, be sure to
read the winch instructions. In a
. You approach things faster and
ground.
remote area, a winch can be handy have less time to react.
. Always carry a litter bag and if you get stuck but you will want to . There is less time to scan the
make sure all refuse is removed know how to use it properly. terrain for obstacles.
from any campsite before
leaving.

. The vehicle has more bounce Surface Conditions: Off-roading
. Does the travel take you uphill or
when driving over obstacles. surfaces can be hard-packed dirt, downhill?
. More braking distance is gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, . Will you have to stop suddenly
needed, especially on an snow, or ice. Each of these surfaces or change direction quickly?
unpaved surface. affects the vehicle's steering,
acceleration, and braking in different When driving over obstacles or
rough terrain, keep a firm grip on
{ WARNING ways. Depending on the surface,
slipping, sliding, wheel spinning, the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs,
delayed acceleration, poor traction, or other surface features can jerk
When you are driving off-road, the wheel out of your hands.
bouncing and quick changes in and longer braking distances can
direction can easily throw you out occur. When driving over bumps, rocks,
of position. This could cause you Surface Obstacles: Unseen or or other obstacles, the wheels can
to lose control and crash. So, hidden obstacles can be hazardous. leave the ground. If this happens,
A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can even with one or two wheels, you
whether you are driving on
startle you if you are not prepared cannot control the vehicle as well or
or off the road, you and your
for them. Often these obstacles are at all.
passengers should wear
safety belts. hidden by grass, bushes, snow, Because you will be on an unpaved
or even the rise and fall of the surface, it is especially important to
terrain itself. avoid sudden acceleration, sudden
Scanning the Terrain turns, or sudden braking.
Some things to consider:
Off-road driving can take you over Off-roading requires a different kind
many different kinds of terrain. Be
. Is the path ahead clear?
of alertness from driving on paved
familiar with the terrain and its many . Will the surface texture change roads and highways. There are no
different features. abruptly up ahead? road signs, posted speed limits,
or signal lights. Use good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
Driving on Hills Approaching a Hill

. Are there obstructions on the hill
that can block your path, such
Off-road driving often takes you up, When you approach a hill, decide if as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
down, or across a hill. Driving safely it is too steep to climb, descend,
on hills requires good judgment and or cross. Steepness can be hard to
. What is beyond the hill? Is there
an understanding of what the judge. On a very small hill, for a cliff, an embankment, a
vehicle can and cannot do. There example, there may be a smooth, drop-off, a fence? Get out and
are some hills that simply cannot be constant incline with only a small walk the hill if you do not know.
driven, no matter how well built the change in elevation where you can It is the smart way to find out.
vehicle. easily see all the way to the top. . Is the hill simply too rough?
On a large hill, the incline may get Steep hills often have ruts,
{ WARNING steeper as you near the top, but you
might not see this because the crest
gullies, troughs, and exposed
rocks because they are more
Many hills are simply too steep of the hill is hidden by bushes, susceptible to the effects of
for any vehicle. If you drive up grass, or shrubs. erosion.
them, you will stall. If you drive Consider this as you approach a hill: Driving Uphill
down them, you cannot control
your speed. If you drive across
. Is there a constant incline, Once you decide it is safe to drive
or does the hill get sharply up the hill:
them, you will roll over. You could
steeper in places?
be seriously injured or killed. . Use a low gear and get a firm
If you have any doubt about the . Is there good traction on the grip on the steering wheel.
steepness, do not drive the hill. hillside, or will the surface cause
. Get a smooth start up the hill
tire slipping?
.
and try to maintain speed. Not
Is there a straight path up or using more power than needed
down the hill so you will not can avoid spinning the wheels or
have to make turning sliding.
maneuvers?

. If the engine has stopped
{ WARNING { WARNING running, you need to restart it.
With the brake pedal pressed
Turning or driving across steep Driving to the top (crest) of a hill and the parking brake still
hills can be dangerous. You could at full speed can cause an applied, shift the transmission to
lose traction, slide sideways, and accident. There could be a P (Park) and restart the engine.
possibly roll over. You could be drop-off, embankment, cliff, Then, shift to R (Reverse),
seriously injured or killed. When or even another vehicle. You release the parking brake, and
driving up hills, always try to go could be seriously injured or slowly back down the hill as
straight up. killed. As you near the top of a straight as possible in
hill, slow down and stay alert. R (Reverse).
. Try to drive straight up the hill if . While backing down the hill, put
at all possible. If the path twists If the vehicle stalls, or is about to your left hand on the steering
and turns, you might want to find stall, and you cannot make it up wheel at the 12 o'clock position
another route. the hill: so you can tell if the wheels are
straight and can maneuver as
. Ease up on the speed as you . Push the brake pedal to stop the you back down. It is best to back
approach the top of the hill. vehicle and keep it from rolling down the hill with the wheels
. Attach a flag to the vehicle to be backwards and apply the straight rather than in the left or
more visible to approaching parking brake. right direction. Turning the wheel
traffic on trails or hills. . If the engine is still running, shift too far to the left or right will
the transmission to R (Reverse), increase the possibility of a
. Sound the horn as you approach
release the parking brake, and rollover.
the top of the hill to let opposing
traffic know you are there. slowly back down the hill in
R (Reverse).
. Use headlamps even during the
day to make the vehicle more
visible to oncoming traffic.
Things not to do if the vehicle stalls, Driving Downhill

or is about to stall, when going up
When off-roading takes you
{ WARNING
a hill:
downhill, consider: Heavy braking when going down
. Never attempt to prevent a stall a hill can cause your brakes to
. How steep is the downhill? Will I
by shifting into N (Neutral) to overheat and fade. This could
be able to maintain vehicle
rev-up the engine and regain cause loss of control and a
control?
forward momentum. This will serious accident. Apply the
not work. The vehicle can roll . What is the surface like?
brakes lightly when descending a
backward very quickly and could Smooth? Rough? Slippery?
hill and use a low gear to keep
go out of control. Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
vehicle speed under control.
. Never try to turn around if about . Are there hidden surface
to stall when going up a hill. obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
If the hill is steep enough to stall Boulders? Things not to do when driving down
the vehicle, it is steep enough to a hill:
. What is at the bottom of the hill?
cause it to roll over. If you Is there a hidden creek bank or
. When driving downhill, avoid
cannot make it up the hill, back even a river bottom with large turns that take you across the
straight down the hill. rocks? incline of the hill. A hill that is not
If, after stalling, you try to back too steep to drive down might be
If you decide you can go down a too steep to drive across. The
down the hill and decide you just hill safely, try to keep the vehicle
cannot do it, set the parking brake, vehicle could roll over.
headed straight down. Use a low
put your transmission in P (Park), gear so engine drag can help the
. Never go downhill with the
and turn off the engine. Leave the brakes so they do not have to do all transmission in N (Neutral),
vehicle and go get some help. Exit the work. Descend slowly, keeping called free-wheeling. The brakes
on the uphill side and stay clear of the vehicle under control at all will have to do all the work and
the path the vehicle would take if it times. could overheat and fade.
rolled downhill.
Vehicles are much more likely to

. Surface conditions can be a
stall when going uphill, but if it WARNING (Continued) problem. Loose gravel, muddy
happens when going downhill: spots, or even wet grass can
injured or killed. If you have any cause the tires to slip sideways,
1. Stop the vehicle by applying the doubt about the steepness of the downhill. If the vehicle slips
regular brakes and apply the incline, do not drive across it. sideways, it can hit something
parking brake. Find another route instead. that will trip it — a rock, a rut,
2. Shift to P (Park) and, while still etc. — and roll over.
braking, restart the engine. . A hill that can be driven straight . Hidden obstacles can make the
3. Shift back to a low gear, release up or down might be too steep to steepness of the incline even
the parking brake, and drive drive across. When going worse. If you drive across a rock
straight down. straight up or down a hill, the with the uphill wheels, or if the
length of the wheel base — the downhill wheels drop into a rut
4. If the engine will not start, get
distance from the front wheels to or depression, the vehicle can tilt
out and get help.
the rear wheels — reduces the even more.
Driving Across an Incline likelihood the vehicle will tumble For these reasons, carefully
end over end. But when driving consider whether to try to drive
An off-road trail will probably go
across an incline, the narrower across an incline. Just because the
across the incline of a hill. To decide
track width — the distance trail goes across the incline does
whether to try to drive across the between the left and right
incline, consider the following: not mean you have to drive it. The
wheels — might not prevent the last vehicle to try it might have
vehicle from tilting and rolling
{ WARNING over. Driving across an incline
rolled over.
puts more weight on the downhill If you feel the vehicle starting to
Driving across an incline that is wheels which could cause a slide sideways, turn downhill. This
too steep will make your vehicle downhill slide or a rollover. should help straighten out the
roll over. You could be seriously vehicle and prevent the side
(Continued)
slipping. The best way to prevent If you have to walk down the slope, Hard packed snow and ice offer
this is to “walk the course” first, so stay out of the path the vehicle will the worst tire traction. On these
you know what the surface is like take if it does roll over. surfaces, it is very easy to lose
before driving it. control. On wet ice, for example, the
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, traction is so poor that you will have
Stalling on an Incline or Ice difficulty accelerating. And, if the
When you drive in mud, snow, vehicle does get moving, poor
{ WARNING or sand, the wheels do not get good steering and difficult braking can
traction. Acceleration is not as cause it to slide out of control.
Getting out on the downhill (low) quick, turning is more difficult, and
side of a vehicle stopped across
an incline is dangerous. If the
braking distances are longer. { WARNING
vehicle rolls over, you could be It is best to use a low gear when in
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,
crushed or killed. Always get out mud — the deeper the mud, the
or rivers can be dangerous.
on the uphill (high) side of the lower the gear. In really deep mud,
keep the vehicle moving so it does Underwater springs, currents
vehicle and stay well clear of the under the ice, or sudden thaws
not get stuck.
rollover path. can weaken the ice. Your vehicle
When driving on sand, wheel could fall through the ice and
traction changes. On loosely packed you and your passengers could
If the vehicle stalls when crossing sand, such as on beaches or sand
an incline, be sure you, and any drown. Drive your vehicle on
dunes, the tires will tend to sink into safe surfaces only.
passengers, get out on the uphill the sand. This affects steering,
side, even if the door there is harder accelerating, and braking. Drive at a
to open. If you get out on the reduced speed and avoid sharp
downhill side and the vehicle starts turns or abrupt maneuvers.
to roll over, you will be right in
its path.
Driving in Water Find out how deep the water is After Off-Road Driving
before driving through it. Do not
Remove any brush or debris that
{ WARNING try it if it is deep enough to cover
the wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust
has collected on the underbody,
chassis, or under the hood. These
Driving through rushing water can pipe — you probably will not get
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
be dangerous. Deep water can through. Deep water can damage
sweep your vehicle downstream the axle and other vehicle parts. After operation in mud or sand,
and you and your passengers have the brake linings cleaned and
If the water is not too deep, drive
could drown. If it is only shallow checked. These substances can
slowly through it. At faster speeds,
cause glazing and uneven braking.
water, it can still wash away the water splashes on the ignition
Check the body structure, steering,
ground from under your tires, and system and the vehicle can stall.
suspension, wheels, tires, axles,
you could lose traction and roll Stalling can also occur if you get the
and exhaust system for damage and
the vehicle over. Do not drive tailpipe under water. If the tailpipe is
check the fuel lines and cooling
through rushing water. under water, you will never be able
system for any leakage.
to start the engine. When going
through water, remember that when The vehicle requires more frequent
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, the brakes get wet, it might take service due to off-road use. Refer to
and flood waters demand extreme longer to stop. See Driving on Wet the Maintenance Schedule for
caution. Roads on page 9‑17. additional information.
Driving on Wet Roads WARNING (Continued)

There is no hard and fast rule about
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
Rain and wet roads can reduce slow down when the road is wet.
vehicle traction and affect your Flowing or rushing water creates
ability to stop and accelerate. strong forces. Driving through Other Rainy Weather Tips
Always drive slower in these types flowing water could cause the Besides slowing down, other wet
of driving conditions and avoid vehicle to be carried away. If this weather driving tips include:
driving through large puddles and happens, you and other vehicle
. Allow extra following distance.
deep‐standing or flowing water. occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be . Pass with caution.
{ WARNING very cautious about trying to drive . Keep windshield wiping
through flowing water. equipment in good shape.
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in a . Keep the windshield washer
quick stop and could cause Hydroplaning fluid reservoir filled.
pulling to one side. You could Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water . Have good tires with proper
lose control of the vehicle. can build up under the vehicle's tread depth. See Tires on
After driving through a large tires so they actually ride on the page 10‑43.
water. This can happen if the road
puddle of water or a car/vehicle . Turn off cruise control.
is wet enough and you are going
wash, lightly apply the brake fast enough. When the vehicle is
pedal until the brakes work hydroplaning, it has little or no
normally. contact with the road.
(Continued)
Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads

{ WARNING
Always be alert and pay attention Driving on steep hills or through
to your surroundings while driving. mountains is different than driving Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
If you become tired or sleepy, find on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for or with the ignition off is
a safe place to park the vehicle driving in these conditions include: dangerous. The brakes will have
and rest. . Keep the vehicle serviced and in to do all the work of slowing down
Other driving tips include: good shape. and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You
. Keep the vehicle well ventilated. . Check all fluid levels and brakes, would then have poor braking or
. Keep interior temperature cool. tires, cooling system, and even none going down a hill. You
transmission. could crash. Always have the
. Keep your eyes moving — scan .
the road ahead and to the sides. Shift to a lower gear when going engine running and the vehicle in
down steep or long hills. gear when going downhill.
. Check the rearview mirror and
vehicle instruments often.
{ WARNING . Stay in your own lane. Do not
swing wide or cut across the
If you do not shift down, the
center of the road. Drive at
brakes could get so hot that they speeds that let you stay in your
would not work well. You would own lane.
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.

. Top of hills: Be alert —
something could be in your
Winter Driving The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 9‑37 improves vehicle
lane (stalled car, accident). Driving on Snow or Ice stability during hard stops on
. Pay attention to special road Drive carefully when there is snow slippery roads, but apply the brakes
signs (falling rocks area, winding or ice between the tires and the sooner than when on dry pavement.
roads, long grades, passing or road, creating less traction or grip. Allow greater following distance on
no-passing zones) and take Wet ice can occur at about 0°C any slippery road and watch for
appropriate action. (32°F) when freezing rain begins to slippery spots. Icy patches can
fall, resulting in even less traction. occur on otherwise clear roads in
Avoid driving on wet ice or in shaded areas. The surface of a
freezing rain until roads can be curve or an overpass can remain icy
treated with salt or sand. when the surrounding roads are
Drive with caution, whatever the clear. Avoid sudden steering
condition. Accelerate gently so maneuvers and braking while
traction is not lost. Accelerating too on ice.
quickly causes the wheels to spin Turn off cruise control on slippery
and makes the surface under the surfaces.
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive
wheels will spin and polish the
surface under the tires even more.
Blizzard Conditions
WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: For more information about
vehicle unless there is help nearby. carbon monoxide, see Engine
. Clear away snow from around
If possible, use the Roadside Exhaust on page 9‑33.
the base of your vehicle,
Assistance Program on page 13‑6.
especially any that is blocking Snow can trap exhaust gases
To get help and keep everyone in
the exhaust pipe. under your vehicle. This can
the vehicle safe:
. Check again from time to cause deadly CO (Carbon
. Turn on the hazard warning Monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
time to be sure snow does
flashers. could overcome you and kill you.
not collect there.
. Tie a red cloth to an outside You cannot see it or smell it, so
. Open a window about 5 cm
mirror. you might not know it is in your
(2 in) on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the vehicle. Clear away snow from
{ WARNING wind to bring in fresh air. around the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking the
Snow can trap engine exhaust . Fully open the air outlets on exhaust.
under the vehicle. This may or under the instrument
cause exhaust gases to get panel.
Run the engine for short periods
inside. Engine exhaust contains . Adjust the climate control only as needed to keep warm, but
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which system to a setting that be careful.
cannot be seen or smelled. It can circulates the air inside the
cause unconsciousness and even vehicle and set the fan speed To save fuel, run the engine for only
death. to the highest setting. See short periods as needed to warm
Climate Control System in the the vehicle and then shut the engine
(Continued)
Index. off and close the window most of
(Continued)
the way to save heat. Repeat this possible. To prevent transmission

until help arrives but only when you { WARNING wear, wait until the wheels stop
feel really uncomfortable from the spinning before shifting gears.
cold. Moving about to keep warm If the vehicle's tires spin at high Release the accelerator pedal while
also helps. speed, they can explode, and you shifting, and press lightly on the
or others could be injured. The accelerator pedal when the
If it takes some time for help to vehicle can overheat, causing an
arrive, now and then when you run transmission is in gear. Slowly
engine compartment fire or other spinning the wheels in the forward
the engine, push the accelerator damage. Spin the wheels as little
pedal slightly so the engine runs and reverse directions causes a
as possible and avoid going rocking motion that could free the
faster than the idle speed. This
above 55 km/h (35 mph). vehicle. If that does not get the
keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help vehicle out after a few tries, it might
with the headlamps. Do this as little need to be towed out. If the vehicle
For information about using tire
as possible to save fuel. does need to be towed out, see
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Towing the Vehicle on page 10‑76.
Chains on page 10‑62.
If the Vehicle is Stuck Rocking the Vehicle to Get Vehicle Load Limits
Slowly and cautiously spin the it Out
wheels to free the vehicle when It is very important to know how
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. Turn the steering wheel left and much weight the vehicle can
right to clear the area around the carry. This weight is called the
If stuck too severely for the traction front wheels. Turn off any traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the
vehicle capacity weight and
system. Shift back and forth
traction system off and use the includes the weight of all
between R (Reverse) and a forward
rocking method. See Traction gear, spinning the wheels as little as occupants, cargo and all
Control System (TCS) on nonfactory‐installed options.
page 9‑40.
Two labels on the vehicle show Tire and Loading Information number of occupant seating
how much weight it may Label positions (A), and the maximum
properly carry, the Tire and vehicle capacity weight (B) in
Loading Information label and kilograms and pounds.
the Certification label. The Tire and Loading
Information label also shows
{ WARNING the tire size of the original
Do not load the vehicle any equipment tires (C) and the
heavier than the Gross recommended cold tire inflation
Vehicle Weight Rating pressures (D). For more
(GVWR), or either the information on tires and inflation
maximum front or rear Gross see Tires on page 10‑43 and
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Tire Pressure on page 10‑49.
This can cause systems to Label Example There is also important loading
break and change the way the A vehicle specific Tire and information on the Certification
vehicle handles. This could Loading Information label is label. It tells you the Gross
cause loss of control and a attached to the vehicle's center Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
crash. Overloading can also pillar (B-pillar). With the driver's and the Gross Axle Weight
shorten the life of the vehicle. door open, you will find the label Rating (GAWR) for the front and
attached near the door lock rear axle. See “Certification
post. The Tire and Loading Label” later in this section.
Information label shows the
Steps for Determining Correct the amount of available cargo

Load Limit and luggage load capacity is
1. Locate the statement 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150)
“The combined weight of = 650 lbs).
occupants and cargo should 5. Determine the combined
never exceed XXX kg or weight of luggage and cargo
XXX lbs” on your vehicle's being loaded on the vehicle.
placard. That weight may not safely
2. Determine the combined exceed the available cargo
weight of the driver and and luggage load capacity
passengers that will be calculated in Step 4.
Example 1
riding in your vehicle. 6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
3. Subtract the combined Example 1 = 453 kg
weight of the driver and trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this (1,000 lbs).
passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs. manual to determine how this B. Subtract Occupant Weight
reduces the available cargo @ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =
4. The resulting figure equals and luggage load capacity of 136 kg (300 lbs).
the available amount of cargo your vehicle.
and luggage load capacity. C. Available Occupant and
For example, if the “XXX” See Trailer Towing on page 9‑60 Cargo Weight = 317 kg
amount equals 1400 lbs and for important information on (700 lbs).
there will be five 150 lb towing a trailer, towing safety
passengers in your vehicle, rules and trailering tips.
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and

Loading Information label for
specific information about the
vehicle's capacity weight and
seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Example 2 Example 3
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 2 = 453 kg Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = @ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =
340 kg (750 lbs). 453 kg (1,000 lbs).
C. Available Cargo Weight = C. Available Cargo Weight =
113 kg (250 lbs). 0 kg (0 lbs).
Certification Label gross weight capacity of the If the vehicle is carrying a heavy
vehicle. This is called Gross load, it should be spread out.
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). See “Steps for Determining
The GVWR includes the weight Correct Load Limit” earlier in
of the vehicle, all occupants, this section.
fuel, and cargo.
The Certification/Tire label also { WARNING
tells you the maximum weights Do not load the vehicle any
for the front and rear axles, heavier than the Gross
called Gross Axle Weight Rating Vehicle Weight Rating
(GAWR). To find out the actual (GVWR), or either the
loads on the front and rear maximum front or rear Gross
Label Example axles, you need to go to a weigh Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
station and weigh the vehicle. This can cause systems to
A vehicle-specific Certification
Your dealer can help you with break and change the way the
label is attached to the lower
this. Be sure to spread out the vehicle handles. This could
center pillar on the driver side of
load equally on both sides of the cause loss of control and a
the vehicle or on the rear edge
center line. crash. Overloading can also
of the driver door. The label
shows the size of the vehicle's Never exceed the GVWR for the shorten the life of the vehicle.
original tires and the inflation vehicle, or the GAWR for either
pressures needed to obtain the the front or rear axle.
Your warranty does not cover

parts or components that fail { WARNING WARNING (Continued)
because of overloading. Things inside the vehicle can . Do not leave an
The label will help you decide strike and injure people in a unsecured child restraint
how much cargo and installed sudden stop or turn, or in a in the vehicle.
equipment your vehicle can crash.
carry.
. Secure loose items in the
. Put things in the cargo vehicle.
Using heavier suspension area of the vehicle. In the
components to get added cargo area, put them as . Do not leave a seat folded
durability might not change your far forward as possible. down unless needed.
weight ratings. Ask your dealer Try to spread the weight
to help you load your vehicle the evenly.
right way. . Never stack heavier
If you put things inside your things, like suitcases,
vehicle – like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
tools, packages, or anything some of them are above
else – they will go as fast as the the tops of the seats.
vehicle goes. If you have to stop (Continued)
or turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, they will keep going.
Starting and gears can be used. Vehicle Ignition Positions

speeds above 110 km/h
Operating (68 mph) should be limited to
five minutes per use.
New Vehicle Break-In . Avoid making hard stops for
Notice: The vehicle does not the first 322 km (200 mi) or
need an elaborate break-in. But it so. During this time the new
will perform better in the long run brake linings are not yet
if you follow these guidelines: broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
. Do not drive at any one premature wear and earlier
constant speed, fast or slow, replacement. Follow this
for the first 805 km (500 mi). breaking-in guideline every
Do not make full-throttle time you get new brake
starts. Avoid downshifting to linings.
brake or slow the vehicle. The ignition switch has four different
. Do not tow a trailer during positions.
. During the first 1 000 km break-in. See Driving
(600 mi), avoid using more Notice: Using a tool to force the
Characteristics and Towing
than moderate acceleration key to turn in the ignition could
Tips on page 9‑57 for the
in lower gears and avoid cause damage to the switch or
trailer towing capabilities of
vehicle speeds above break the key. Use the correct
your vehicle and more
110 km/h (68 mph). key, make sure it is all the way in,
information.
and turn it only with your hand.
. Between the first 1 000 km Following break‐in, engine speed If the key cannot be turned by
(600 mi) and 5 000 km and load can be gradually hand, see your dealer.
(3,000 mi), heavy increased.
acceleration in lower The key must be fully extended to
start the vehicle.
To shift out of P (Park), turn the In an emergency, if the vehicle must

ignition to ON/RUN and apply the be shut off while driving: { WARNING
brake pedal. 1. Brake using a firm and steady Turning off the vehicle while
A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/ pressure. Do not pump the moving may cause loss of power
LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is brakes repeatedly. This may assist in the brake and steering
stopped, turn the ignition switch to deplete power assist, requiring systems and disable the airbags.
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off. increased brake pedal force. While driving, only shut the
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) 2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). vehicle off in an emergency.
will remain active. See Retained This can be done while the
Accessory Power (RAP) on vehicle is moving. After shifting
page 9‑30. 5. If the vehicle must be shut off
to N (Neutral), firmly apply the
while driving, turn the ignition to
This is the only position from which brakes and steer the vehicle to a
ACC/ACCESSORY.
the key can be removed. This locks safe location.
the steering wheel, ignition and The ignition switch can bind in the
3. Come to a complete stop, shift
automatic transmission. LOCK/OFF position with the wheels
to P (Park), and turn the ignition
turned off center. If this happens,
Do not turn the engine off when the to LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with
move the steering wheel from right
vehicle is moving. This will cause a an automatic transmission, the
to left while turning the key to ACC/
loss of power assist in the brake shift lever must be in P (Park) to
ACCESSORY. If this does not work,
and steering systems and disable turn the ignition switch to the
then the vehicle needs service.
the airbags. LOCK/OFF position.
4. Set the parking brake. See
Parking Brake on page 9‑38.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This D (START): This position starts the Starting Procedure

position provides power to some of engine. When the engine starts, 1. With your foot off the accelerator
the electrical accessories. It unlocks release the key. The ignition switch pedal, turn the ignition key to
the steering wheel and ignition. will return to ON/RUN for normal START. When the engine starts,
To move the key from ACC/ driving. let go of the key. The idle speed
ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF, push A warning tone sounds when the will go down as the engine
in the key and then turn it to driver door is opened if the ignition warms. Do not race the engine
LOCK/OFF. is still in ACC/ACCESSORY and the immediately after starting it.
C (ON/RUN): The ignition switch key is in the ignition. Operate the engine and
stays in this position when the transmission gently to allow the
engine is running. This position can Starting the Engine oil to warm up and lubricate all
be used to operate the electrical moving parts.
accessories, including the Move the shift lever to P (Park) or
N (Neutral). The engine will not start The vehicle has a
ventilation fan and 12‐volt power Computer-Controlled Cranking
outlets, as well as to display some in any other position. To restart the
vehicle when it is already moving, System. This feature assists in
warning and indicator lights. The starting the engine and protects
transmission is also unlocked in this use N (Neutral) only.
components. If the ignition key is
position on automatic transmission Notice: Do not try to shift to turned to the START position,
vehicles. P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. and then released when the
The battery could be drained if the If you do, you could damage the engine begins cranking, the
key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY transmission. Shift to P (Park) engine will continue cranking
or ON/RUN position with the engine only when the vehicle is stopped. for a few seconds or until the
off. The vehicle might not start if the vehicle starts. If the engine does
battery is allowed to drain for an not start and the key is held in
extended period of time. START for many seconds,
cranking will be stopped after
15 seconds to prevent cranking hold the key in START for a Retained Accessory
motor damage. To prevent gear maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at
damage, this system also least 15 seconds between each
Power (RAP)
prevents cranking if the engine try, to allow the cranking motor These vehicle accessories can be
is already running. Engine to cool. When the engine starts, used for up to 10 minutes after the
cranking can be stopped by let go of the key and accelerator. engine is turned off:
turning the ignition switch to If the vehicle starts briefly but . Audio System
ACC/ACCESSORY or then stops again, repeat the
LOCK/OFF. procedure. This clears the extra . Power Windows
Notice: Cranking the engine for gasoline from the engine. Do not . Sunroof (if equipped)
long periods of time, by returning race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the Power to the audio system will
the key to the START position continue to operate for up to
immediately after cranking has engine and transmission gently
until the oil warms up and 10 minutes or until the driver
ended, can overheat and damage door is opened.
the cranking motor, and drain the lubricates all moving parts.
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds Notice: The engine is designed to Power to the power windows and
between each try, to let the work with the electronics in the sunroof will continue to operate for
cranking motor cool down. vehicle. If you add electrical parts up to 10 minutes or until any door is
or accessories, you could change opened.
2. If the engine does not start after
5 to 10 seconds, especially in the way the engine operates. All these features will work when
very cold weather (below −18°C Before adding electrical the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/
or 0°F), it could be flooded with equipment, check with your ACCESSORY.
too much gasoline. Push the dealer. If you do not, the engine
accelerator pedal all the way to might not perform properly. Any
the floor and hold it there as you resulting damage would not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Engine Coolant Heater Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING
The engine coolant heater,
if available, can help in cold weather Plugging the cord into an { WARNING
conditions at or below −18°C (0°F) ungrounded outlet could cause an
for easier starting and better fuel electrical shock. Also, the wrong It can be dangerous to get out of
economy during engine warm-up. kind of extension cord could the vehicle if the shift lever is not
Plug in the coolant heater at least overheat and cause a fire. You fully in P (Park) with the parking
four hours before starting the could be seriously injured. Plug brake firmly set. The vehicle can
vehicle. An internal thermostat in the cord into a properly grounded roll. If you have left the engine
the plug-end of the cord will prevent three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. running, the vehicle can move
engine coolant heater operation at If the cord will not reach, use a suddenly. You or others could be
temperatures above −18°C (0°F). heavy-duty three-prong extension injured. To be sure the vehicle will
cord rated for at least 15 amps. not move, even when you are on
To Use The Engine Coolant fairly level ground, use the steps
Heater that follow. If you are pulling a
1. Turn off the engine. 4. Before starting the engine, be trailer, see Driving Characteristics
sure to unplug and store the and Towing Tips on page 9‑57.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the cord as it was before to keep it
electrical cord. away from moving engine parts.
The electrical cord is located on If you do not it could be Use this procedure to shift into
the passenger side of the engine damaged. P (Park):
compartment, in front of the air The length of time the heater should 1. Hold the brake pedal down and
cleaner. remain plugged in depends on set the parking brake.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded several factors. Ask a dealer in the See Parking Brake on page 9‑38
110-volt AC outlet. area where you will be parking the for more information.
vehicle for the best advice on this.
2. Hold the button on the shift lever Release the button and check that 3. Press the shift lever button.
and push the lever toward the the shift lever cannot be moved out 4. Move the shift lever.
front of the vehicle into P (Park). of P (Park).
If you still are unable to shift out of
3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. Torque Lock P (Park):
4. Remove the key. Torque lock is when the weight 1. Fully release the shift lever
Leaving the Vehicle With the of the vehicle puts too much button.
force on the parking pawl in the
Engine Running transmission. This happens when 2. Hold the brake pedal down and
parking on a hill and shifting the press the shift lever button
{ WARNING transmission into P (Park) is not again.
done properly and then it is difficult 3. Move the shift lever.
It can be dangerous to leave the to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
vehicle with the engine running. If you still cannot move the shift
torque lock, set the parking brake
The vehicle could move suddenly lever from P (Park), see your dealer
and then shift into P (Park). To find
if the shift lever is not fully in for service.
out how, see “Shifting Into Park”
P (Park) with the parking brake listed previously.
firmly set. And, if you leave the Parking Over Things
If torque lock does occur, the
vehicle with the engine running,
vehicle may need to be pushed
That Burn
it could overheat and even catch uphill by another vehicle to relieve
fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle
the parking pawl pressure, so you { WARNING
can shift out of P (Park).
with the engine running. Things that can burn could touch
Shifting Out of Park hot exhaust parts under the
If you have to leave the vehicle with vehicle and ignite. Do not park
To shift out of P (Park): over papers, leaves, dry grass,
the engine running, the vehicle must
be in P (Park) and the parking 1. Apply the brake pedal. or other things that can burn.
brake set. 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
Engine Exhaust WARNING (Continued)

Running the Vehicle
While Parked
{ WARNING . There are holes or openings
in the vehicle body from
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have
Engine exhaust contains carbon damage or after market
to, here are some things to know.
monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
{ WARNING
even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle: area with poor ventilation is
. Drive it only with the windows dangerous. Engine exhaust may
. The vehicle idles in areas
with poor ventilation (parking completely down. enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
garages, tunnels, deep snow contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
. Have the vehicle repaired which cannot be seen or smelled.
that may block underbody immediately.
airflow or tail pipes). It can cause unconsciousness
Never park the vehicle with the and even death. Never run the
. The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed engine in an enclosed area that
sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a has no fresh air ventilation. For
. The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air more information, see Engine
due to corrosion or damage. ventilation. Exhaust on page 9‑33.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
{ WARNING Automatic { WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out
Transmission It is dangerous to get out of the
of the vehicle if the automatic vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
transmission shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake
in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when
Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you
the engine is running unless have to. If you have left the
you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the
could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when
vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground,
you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and
always set the parking brake and The automatic transmission shift move the shift lever to P (Park).
move the shift lever to P (Park). lever is located on the console See Shifting Into Park on
between the seats. page 9‑31. If you are pulling a
Follow the proper steps to be sure P (Park): This position locks the trailer, see Driving Characteristics
the vehicle will not move. See front wheels. Use P (Park) when and Towing Tips on page 9‑57.
Shifting Into Park on page 9‑31. starting the engine because the
If parking on a hill and pulling a vehicle cannot move easily. The vehicle has an automatic
trailer, see Driving Characteristics transmission shift lock control
and Towing Tips on page 9‑57. system. You must fully apply the
regular brake first and then press N (Neutral): In this position the D (Drive): This position is for
the shift lever button before shifting engine and transmission do not normal driving. It provides the best
from P (Park) when the ignition key connect. Use N (Neutral) to restart fuel economy. If you need more
is in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift out a vehicle that is already moving. power for passing, and you are:
of P (Park), ease pressure on the . Going less than 56 km/h
shift lever, then push the shift lever
all the way into P (Park) as you
{ WARNING (35 mph), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
maintain brake application. Then Shifting into a drive gear while the
press the shift lever button and engine is running at high speed is
. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or
move the shift lever into another dangerous. Unless your foot is more, push the accelerator all
gear. See Shifting Out of Park on firmly on the brake pedal, the the way down.
page 9‑32. vehicle could move very rapidly. Notice: If the vehicle seems to
R (Reverse): Use this gear to You could lose control and hit accelerate slowly or not shift
back up. people or objects. Do not shift gears when you go faster, and
into a drive gear while the engine you continue to drive the vehicle
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse) that way, you could damage the
while the vehicle is moving is running at high speed.
transmission. Have the vehicle
forward could damage the serviced right away.
transmission. The repairs would Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)
not be covered by the vehicle or N (Neutral) with the engine M (Manual Mode): Allows the
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only running at high speed may driver to select the range of gear
after the vehicle is stopped. damage the transmission. The positions. See Manual Mode on
repairs would not be covered by page 9‑36.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to
get out of snow, ice or sand without the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
damaging the transmission, see If engine is not running at high
the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑21. speed when shifting the vehicle.
Manual Mode When shifting to M (Manual Mode), Fuel Economy Mode

the transmission will shift to a preset
Electronic Range Select lower gear range. For this preset Vehicles with a 2.4L engine have
(ERS) Mode range, the highest gear available is a Fuel Economy Mode. When
displayed next to the M in the DIC. engaged, fuel economy mode can
ERS or manual mode allows for improve the vehicle's fuel economy.
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
the selection of the range of gear
positions. Use this mode when
All gears below that number are
driving downhill or towing a trailer to
available to use. For example, when
limit the top gear and vehicle speed.
4 (Fourth) is shown next to the M,
The shift position indicator within the
1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears are
Driver Information Center (DIC) will
shifted automatically. To shift to
display a number next to the M
5 (Fifth) gear, press the + (Plus)
indicating the highest available gear
button or shift into D (Drive).
under manual mode and the driving
conditions when manual mode was M (Manual Mode) will prevent
selected. shifting to a lower gear range if the
engine speed is too high. If vehicle
To use this feature:
speed is not reduced within the time
1. Move the shift lever to allowed, the lower gear range shift
M (Manual Mode). will not be completed. Slow the Press the “eco” (economy) button
2. Press the plus/minus button on vehicle, then press the − (Minus) by the shift lever to turn this feature
the shift lever, to increase or button to the desired lower gear on or off. The “eco” light in the
decrease the gear range range. instrument cluster will come on
available. when engaged. See Fuel Economy
While using the ERS, cruise control
Light on page 5‑18. A Driver
can be used.
Information Center (DIC) message
“ECO MODE ON” is also displayed. Drive Systems Brakes

See Fuel System Messages on
All-Wheel Drive Antilock Brake
When Fuel Economy Mode is on:
Vehicles with this feature always System (ABS)
. The transmission will upshift send engine power to all four This vehicle has the Antilock Brake
sooner and downshift later. wheels. It is fully automatic, and System (ABS), an advanced
. The torque converter clutch will adjusts itself as needed for road electronic braking system that helps
apply sooner and stay on longer. conditions. prevent a braking skid.
. The gas pedal will be less When using a compact spare tire When the engine is started and the
sensitive. on an AWD vehicle, the system vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
automatically detects the compact checks itself. A momentary motor or
. The vehicle's computer will more spare and disables AWD. To restore
aggressively shut off fuel to the clicking noise might be heard while
AWD operation and prevent this test is going on, and it might
engine under deceleration. excessive wear on the system, even be noticed that the brake
. The engine idle speed will be replace the compact spare with a pedal moves a little. This is normal.
lower. full-size tire as soon as possible.
. Driving performance is more See Compact Spare Tire on
conservative. page 10‑72 for more information.
If there is a problem with ABS, this

warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 5‑16.
If driving safely on a wet road and it close to the vehicle in front of you, Parking Brake
becomes necessary to slam on the there will not be enough time to
brakes and continue braking to apply the brakes if that vehicle
avoid a sudden obstacle, a suddenly slows or stops. Always
computer senses that the wheels leave enough room up ahead to
are slowing down. If one of the stop, even with ABS.
wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the Using ABS
brakes at each wheel. Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
ABS can change the brake pressure the brake pedal down firmly and let
to each wheel, as required, faster ABS work. You might hear the ABS
than any driver could. This can help pump or motor operating and feel
the driver steer around the obstacle the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
while braking hard. normal.
As the brakes are applied, the Braking in Emergencies To set the parking brake, hold the
computer keeps receiving updates ABS allows the driver to steer and regular brake pedal down, then
on wheel speed and controls brake at the same time. In many push the parking brake pedal down.
braking pressure accordingly. emergencies, steering can help If the ignition is on, the brake
Remember: ABS does not change more than even the very best system warning light will come on.
the time needed to get a foot up to braking. See Brake System Warning Light on
the brake pedal or always decrease page 5‑15.
stopping distance. If you get too
Notice: Driving with the parking Brake Assist Hill Start Assist (HSA)
brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature This vehicle has a brake assist This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist
wear or damage to brake system feature designed to assist the driver (HSA) feature, which may be useful
parts. Make sure that the parking in stopping or decreasing vehicle when the vehicle is stopped on a
brake is fully released and the speed in emergency driving grade. This feature is designed to
brake warning light is off before conditions. This feature uses the prevent the vehicle from rolling,
driving. stability system hydraulic brake either forward or rearward, during
control module to supplement the vehicle drive off. After the driver
To release the parking brake, hold power brake system under completely stops and holds the
the regular brake pedal down, then conditions where the driver has vehicle in a complete standstill on a
push down momentarily on the quickly and forcefully applied the grade, HSA will be automatically
parking brake pedal until you feel brake pedal in an attempt to quickly activated. During the transition
the pedal release. Slowly pull your stop or slow down the vehicle. The period between when the driver
foot up off the park brake pedal. stability system hydraulic brake releases the brake pedal and starts
If the parking brake is not released control module increases brake to accelerate to drive off on a grade,
when you begin to drive, the brake pressure at each corner of the HSA holds the braking pressure to
system warning light will be on and vehicle until the ABS activates. ensure that there is no rolling. The
a chime will sound warning you that Minor brake pedal pulsation or brakes will automatically release
the parking brake is still on. pedal movement during this time is when the accelerator pedal is
If you are towing a trailer and are normal and the driver should applied within the two‐second
parking on a hill, see Driving continue to apply the brake pedal window. It will not activate if the
Characteristics and Towing Tips on as the driving situation dictates. vehicle is in a drive gear and facing
page 9‑57. The brake assist feature will downhill or if the vehicle is facing
automatically disengage when the uphill and in R (Reverse).
brake pedal is released or brake
pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
Ride Control Systems TCS is on whenever the vehicle

is started. To limit wheel spin,
When this message is displayed
and d comes on and stays on, the
especially in slippery road vehicle is safe to drive but the
Traction Control conditions, the system should system is not operational. Driving
System (TCS) always be left on. But, TCS can should be adjusted accordingly.
be turned off if needed.
The vehicle has a Traction Control Notice: Do not repeatedly brake
System (TCS) that limits wheel spin. or accelerate heavily when TCS is
On a front-wheel-drive vehicle, the off. The vehicle's driveline could
system operates if it senses that be damaged.
one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose If d comes on and stays on, reset
traction. On an All-Wheel-Drive the system by:
(AWD) vehicle, the system will 1. Stopping the vehicle.
operate if it senses that any of the d flashes to indicate that the
wheels are spinning or beginning to traction control system is active. 2. Turning the engine off and
lose traction. When this happens, waiting 15 seconds.
If there is a problem detected with
the system brakes the spinning TCS, SERVICE TRACTION 3. Starting the engine.
wheel(s) and/or reduces engine CONTROL and SERVICE
power to limit wheel spin. STABILITRAK may be displayed on If d still comes on and stays on at a
The system may be heard or felt the Driver Information Center (DIC) speed above 20 km/h (13 mph), see
your dealer for service.
while it is working, but this is and d will be on. See Ride Control
normal. System Messages on page 5‑27. A chime may also sound when the
light comes on steady.
The g is located on the console.
It may be necessary to turn the StabiliTrak activates when the

system off if the vehicle ever gets computer senses a difference
stuck in sand, mud or snow and between the intended path and the
rocking the vehicle is required. See direction the vehicle is actually
If the Vehicle is Stuck on page 9‑21 traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
for more information. See also applies braking pressure to the
The TCS off light comes on and Winter Driving on page 9‑19 for vehicle's brakes to help steer the
TRACTION CONTROL OFF is information on using TCS when vehicle in the intended direction.
displayed on the Driver Information driving in snowy or icy conditions. StabiliTrak is on automatically
Center (DIC) to indicate that the If cruise control is being used when whenever the vehicle is started. To
traction control system has been TCS activates, cruise control will assist with directional control of the
turned off. See Ride Control System automatically disengage. Press the vehicle, the system should always
Messages on page 5‑27. cruise control button to re‐engage be left on.
TCS can be turned off by pressing when road conditions allow. See
Cruise Control on page 9‑42.
and releasing g. When TCS is
turned off, i comes on and the Adding non‐GM accessories can
affect the vehicle's performance.
system will not limit wheel spin.
See Accessories and Modifications
Driving should be adjusted
accordingly. Press and release g
again to turn the system back on. StabiliTrak® System When the stability control system
When TCS is turned off on AWD activates, the Traction Control
The vehicle has a vehicle stability System (TCS)/StabiliTrak light will
vehicles, the system may still make enhancement system called
noise. This is normal and necessary flash on the instrument panel. This
StabiliTrak. It is an advanced also occurs when traction control is
with AWD hardware. computer controlled system that activated. A noise may be heard or
assists with directional control of the vibration may be felt in the brake
vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
pedal. This is normal. Continue to Cruise Control

steer the vehicle in the intended
direction. With cruise control, the vehicle can
maintain a speed of about 40 km/h
If there is a problem detected
(25 mph) or more without keeping
with StabiliTrak, SERVICE
your foot on the accelerator. Cruise
STABILITRAK is displayed on the
g is located on the console. control does not work at speeds
Driver Information Center (DIC)
below 40 km/h (25 mph).
and d will stay on. See Vehicle Both StabiliTrak and Traction
Messages on page 5‑23. When this Control can be turned off if needed If the brakes are applied, the cruise
control is disengaged.
message is displayed and/or d by pressing and holding g until g
comes on and stays on, the vehicle If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak®
and i come on the instrument
is safe to drive but the system is not system and begins to limit wheel
panel. When StabiliTrak is turned spin while using cruise control, the
operational. Driving should be off, the system will not assist with
adjusted accordingly. See Ride cruise control automatically
directional control of the vehicle or disengages. See StabiliTrak®
Control System Messages on limit wheel spin. Driving should be
page 5‑27. System on page 9‑41 or Traction
adjusted accordingly. Press and Control System (TCS) on
If d comes on and stays on, reset release g again to turn the system page 9‑40. When road conditions
the system by: back on. allow you to safely use it again, the
1. Stopping the vehicle. If cruise control is being used when cruise control can be turned
StabiliTrak activates, the cruise back on.
2. Turning the engine off and
control will automatically disengage.
waiting 15 seconds.
Press the cruise control button to
3. Starting the engine. reengage when road conditions
allow. See Cruise Control on
If d still comes on and stays on at a page 9‑42 for more information.
speed above 20 km/h (13 mph), see
your dealer for service.
Setting Cruise Control

{ WARNING If the cruise button is on when not in
Cruise control can be dangerous use, it could get bumped and go into
where you cannot drive safely at cruise when not desired. Keep the
a steady speed. So, do not use cruise button turned off when cruise
the cruise control on winding control is not being used.
roads or in heavy traffic. 1. Press 1.
Cruise control can be dangerous 2. Get to the speed desired.
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can 3. Press the thumbwheel and
cause excessive wheel slip, and release it. The desired set speed
briefly appears in the Driver
you could lose control. Do not use
1 (On/Off): Press to turn the Information Center (DIC) display.
cruise control on slippery roads.
cruise control system on and off. 4. Take your foot off the accelerator
* (Cancel): Press to disengage pedal.
cruise control without erasing the Resuming a Set Speed
set speed from memory.
If the cruise control is set at a
RES/+ (Resume/Accel): Move the desired speed and then the brakes
thumbwheel up to make the vehicle are applied, the cruise control is
resume to a previously set speed or disengaged without erasing the set
to accelerate. speed from memory.
SET/− (Set/Coast): Move the Once the vehicle reaches about
thumbwheel down toward SET/- to 40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move the
set a speed and activate cruise thumbwheel up toward RES/+
control, or to make the vehicle briefly. The vehicle returns to the
decelerate. previous set speed and stays there.
Increasing Speed While Using

. To slow down in small amounts, Ending Cruise Control
Cruise Control move the thumbwheel toward
SET/− briefly. Each time this is There are three ways to end cruise
If the cruise control system is done, the vehicle goes about control:
already activated, 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower. . To disengage cruise control;
. Move the thumbwheel up toward step lightly on the brake pedal or
Passing Another Vehicle While
RES/+ and hold it until the clutch, the indicator light will
Using Cruise Control
vehicle accelerates to the go off.
desired speed, and then Use the accelerator pedal to
release it. increase the vehicle speed. When
. Press *.
you take your foot off the pedal, . To turn off the cruise control,
. To increase the speed in small
the vehicle will slow down to the
amounts, move the thumbwheel press 1. The cruise control
previous set cruise speed.
up toward RES/+ briefly and cannot be resumed.
then release it. Each time this is Using Cruise Control on Hills
done, the vehicle goes about Erasing Speed Memory
How well the cruise control works
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster. The cruise control set speed is
on hills depends upon the vehicle
speed, load, and the steepness of erased from memory by pressing
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control the hills. When going up steep hills, the 1 button or if the ignition is
you might have to step on the turned off.
If the cruise control system is
accelerator pedal to maintain the
already activated,
vehicle speed. When going
. Move the thumbwheel toward downhill, you might have to brake or
SET/− and hold until the desired shift to a lower gear to maintain the
lower speed is reached, then vehicle's speed. When the brakes
release it. are applied the cruise control is
disengaged.
Object Detection WARNING (Continued)

When the distance is less than
30 cm (12 in) the beeping is
Systems . Children, pedestrians,
continuous for 5 seconds.
bicyclists, or pets. To be detected, objects must be at
Ultrasonic Parking Assist least 20 cm (8 in) off the ground and
If you do not use proper care below taillamp level. Objects must
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic before and while backing, vehicle
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from the
damage, injury, or death could rear bumper. The distance objects
it assists the driver with parking
occur. Even with URPA, always can be detected may be less during
and avoiding objects while in
check behind the vehicle before warmer or humid weather.
R (Reverse). URPA operates at
speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph), backing up. While backing, be
PARK ASSIST OFF displays on the
and the sensors on the rear bumper sure to look for objects and check
Driver Information Center (DIC) to
detect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft) the vehicle's mirrors.
indicate that URPA is off. The
behind the vehicle, and at least message disappears after a short
20 cm (8 in) off the ground. How the System Works period of time.
URPA comes on automatically See Object Detection System
{ WARNING when the shift lever is moved into Messages on page 5‑27 for URPA
R (Reverse). A single tone sounds messages.
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system does not to indicate the system is working.
Turning the System On and Off
replace driver vision. It cannot URPA operates only at speeds
The URPA system can be turned on
detect: less than 8 km/h (5 mph).
and off using the infotainment
. Objects that are below the An obstacle is indicated by audible system controls. See Vehicle
bumper, underneath the beeps. The interval between the Personalization on page 5‑30 for
vehicle, or too close or far beeps becomes shorter as the more information.
from the vehicle. vehicle gets closer to the obstacle.
URPA defaults to the on setting
(Continued) each time the vehicle is started.
When the System Does Not

. A trailer was attached to the
Seem to Work Properly vehicle, or an object was { WARNING
hanging out of the trunk during
If the URPA system does not the last drive cycle. Once the The Rear Vision Camera (RVC)
activate due to a temporary object is removed, URPA will system does not replace driver
condition, the message PARK return to normal operation. vision. RVC does not:
ASSIST OFF displays on the DIC. . The vehicle's bumper is . Detect objects that are
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
damaged. Take the vehicle to outside the camera's field of
your dealer to repair the system. view, below the bumper,
This can occur under the following
or underneath the vehicle.
conditions: . Other conditions may affect
system performance, such as . Detect children, pedestrians,
. The driver has disabled the
vibrations from a jackhammer or bicyclists, or pets.
system.
the compression of air brakes on Do not back the vehicle by only
. The ultrasonic sensors are not a very large truck.
clean. Keep the vehicle's rear looking at the RVC screen, or use
bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, the screen during longer, higher
Rear Vision speed backing maneuvers or
ice, and slush. For cleaning
instructions, see Exterior Care Camera (RVC) where there could be cross-traffic.
on page 10‑79. The vehicle may have a Rear Vision Your judged distances using the
Camera (RVC) system. Read this screen will differ from actual
. The park assist sensors are
entire section before using it. distances.
covered by frost or ice, which
can occur after washing the The RVC can assist the driver when If you do not use proper care
vehicle in cold weather. Keep backing up by displaying a view of before backing up, you could hit a
the sensors free of frost or ice. the area behind the vehicle. vehicle, child, pedestrian,
bicyclist, or pet, resulting in
vehicle damage, injury, or death.
(Continued)
Turning the Rear Vision Camera To cancel the delay, do one of the
WARNING (Continued) System Off or On following:
Even though the vehicle has the To turn off the RVC system, press . Press a hard key on the
RVC system, always check and hold z, located on the inside navigation system.
carefully before backing up by rearview mirror, until the left . Shift into P (Park).
checking behind and around the indicator light turns off. The RVC
display is now disabled.
. Reach a vehicle speed of
vehicle.
8 km/h (5 mph).
To turn the RVC system on again,
Turning the Rear Vision Camera
Vehicles Without a Navigation press and hold z until the left
System On or Off
System indicator light illuminates. The RVC
system display is now enabled and To turn the rear vision camera
When the key is in the ON/RUN system on or off:
the display will appear in the mirror
position and the driver shifts the
normally. 1. Shift into P (Park).
vehicle into R (Reverse), the video
image automatically appears in the Vehicles With a Navigation 2. Press the CONFIG button.
inside rearview mirror. Once the System
driver shifts out of R (Reverse), 3. Select Display.
the video image automatically An image appears on the navigation
disappears from the inside rearview screen with the message Check
mirror. Surroundings for Safety when the
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
The navigation screen goes to the
previous screen after approximately
10 seconds once the vehicle is
shifted out of R (Reverse).
Unavailable may display if URPA To turn the guidelines on or off:

has been disabled and the symbols 1. Shift into P (Park).
have been turned on. See
Ultrasonic Parking Assist on 2. Press the CONFIG button.
page 9‑45. 3. Select Display.
The symbols appear and may cover 4. Select Rear Camera Options.
an object when viewing the
navigation screen when an object is 5. Select Guidelines. When a
detected by the URPA system. check mark appears next to the
Guidelines option, guidelines will
To turn the symbols on or off: appear.
1. Shift into P (Park). Rear Vision Camera Error
4. Select Rear Camera Options. 2. Press the CONFIG button. Messages
5. Select Camera. When a check 3. Select Display. SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERA
mark appears next to the SYSTEM: This message can
4. Select Rear Camera Options.
Camera option, then the RVC display on the navigation screen
system is on. 5. Select Symbols. When a check when the system is not receiving
mark appears next to the information it requires from other
Symbols Symbols option, symbols will vehicle systems.
The navigation system may have a appear.
If any other problem occurs or if a
feature that lets the driver view
Guidelines problem persists, see your dealer.
symbols on the navigation screen
while using the RVC. The Ultrasonic The RVC system has a guideline
Rear Park Assist (URPA) system overlay that can help the driver align
must not be disabled to use the the vehicle when backing into a
caution symbols. The error message parking spot.
Rear Parking Assist Symbols
Rear Vision Camera Location It does not display objects that are
close to either corner or under the
bumper and can vary depending
on vehicle orientation or road
conditions. The distance of the
image that appears on the screen is
different from the actual distance.
The following illustration shows the
field of view that the camera
provides.
The camera is located above the

license plate.
The area displayed by the camera is
limited.
A. View displayed by the camera.

B. Corner of the rear bumper.
When the System Does Not The RVC system display in the During any of these fault conditions,
Seem To Work Properly rearview mirror may turn off or not the display will be blank and the
appear as expected due to one of indicator will continue to flash as
The RVC system may not work the following conditions. If this long as the vehicle is in R (Reverse)
properly or display a clear image if: occurs the left indicator light on the or until the conditions return to
. The RVC is turned off. See mirror will flash. normal.
“Turning the Rear Vision Camera . A slow flash may indicate a loss
System On or Off” earlier in this Pressing and holding z when the
of video signal, or no video left indicator light is flashing will turn
section. signal present during the reverse off the video display along with the
. It is dark. cycle. left indicator light.
. The sun or the beam of . A fast flash may indicate that the
headlights is shining directly display has been on for the
into the camera lens. maximum allowable time during
. a reverse cycle, or the display
Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
has reached an over
builds up on the camera lens.
temperature limit.
Clean the lens, rinse it with
water, and wipe it with a soft The fast flash conditions are
cloth. used to protect the video device
from high temperature
. The back of the vehicle is in an
conditions. Once conditions
accident, the position and
return to normal the device will
mounting angle of the camera
reset and the green indicator will
can change or the camera can
stop flashing.
be affected. Be sure to have the
camera and its position and
mounting angle checked at your
dealer.
Fuel Recommended Fuel

Use of the recommended fuel is Use regular unleaded gasoline with
an important part of the proper a posted octane rating of 87 or
maintenance of this vehicle. To help higher. If the octane rating is less
keep the engine clean and maintain than 87, an audible knocking noise,
optimum vehicle performance, we commonly referred to as spark
recommend the use of gasoline knock, might be heard when driving.
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
Gasoline. at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If heavy knocking is heard
Look for the TOP TIER label on the when using gasoline rated at
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets 87 octane or higher, the engine
enhanced detergency standards Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge needs service.
developed by auto companies. A list and a yellow fuel cap can use either
of marketers providing TOP TIER unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
Detergent Gasoline can be found at containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
www.toptiergas.com. See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on
page 9‑53. For all other vehicles,
use only the unleaded gasoline
described under Recommended
Fuel on page 9‑51.
Gasoline Specifications satisfactorily on fuels meeting Fuel Additives

federal specifications, but emission
(U.S. and Canada Only) control system performance might To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
At a minimum, gasoline should be affected. The malfunction in the United States are now
meet ASTM specification indicator lamp could turn on and the required to contain additives that
D 4814 in the United States or vehicle might fail a smog‐check test. help prevent engine and fuel system
CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on deposits from forming, allowing the
Some gasolines contain an page 5‑13. If this occurs, return to emission control system to work
octane-enhancing additive called your authorized dealer for diagnosis. properly. In most cases, nothing
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese If it is determined that the condition should have to be added to the fuel.
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend is caused by the type of fuel used, However, some gasolines contain
against the use of gasolines repairs might not be covered by the only the minimum amount of
containing MMT. See Fuel Additives vehicle warranty. additive required to meet U.S.
on page 9‑52 for additional Environmental Protection Agency
information. Fuels in Foreign regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean
Countries and avoid problems due to dirty
California Fuel injectors or valves, look for gasoline
Never use leaded gasoline or any
Requirements other fuel not recommended in the that is advertised as TOP TIER
If the vehicle is certified to meet previous text on fuel. Costly repairs Detergent Gasoline. Look for the
California Emissions Standards, it is caused by use of improper fuel TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to
designed to operate on fuels that would not be covered by the vehicle ensure gasoline meets enhanced
meet California specifications. See warranty. detergency standards developed by
the underhood emission control the auto companies. A list of
To check the fuel availability, ask an marketers providing TOP TIER
label. If this fuel is not available in auto club, or contact a major oil
states adopting California Emissions Detergent Gasoline can be found at
company that does business in the www.toptiergas.com.
Standards, the vehicle will operate country where you will be driving.
For customers who do not use TOP Notice: This vehicle was not Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly, designed for fuel that contains
one bottle of GM Fuel System methanol. Do not use fuel Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badge
Treatment PLUS, added to the fuel containing methanol. It can and a yellow fuel cap can use either
tank at every engine oil change, can corrode metal parts in the fuel unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel
help clean deposits from fuel system and also damage plastic containing up to 85% ethanol (E85).
injectors and intake valves. GM Fuel and rubber parts. That damage For all other vehicles, use only the
System Treatment PLUS is the only would not be covered under the unleaded gasoline described under
gasoline additive recommended by vehicle warranty. Recommended Fuel on page 9‑51.
General Motors. It is available at Some gasolines that are not We encourage the use of E85 in
your dealer. reformulated for low emissions can vehicles that are designed to use it.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, contain an octane-enhancing The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”
such as ethers and ethanol, and additive called fuel, meaning it is made from
reformulated gasolines might be methylcyclopentadienyl manganese renewable sources such as corn
available in your area. We tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant and other crops.
recommend that you use these where you buy gasoline whether the Many service stations will not have
gasolines, if they comply with the fuel contains MMT. We recommend an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump
specifications described earlier. against the use of such gasolines. available. The U.S. Department of
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and Fuels containing MMT can reduce Energy has an alternative fuels
other fuels containing more than spark plug life and affect emission website (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/
10% ethanol must not be used in control system performance. The locator/stations/) that can help you
vehicles that were not designed for malfunction indicator lamp might find E85 fuel. Those stations that do
those fuels. turn on. If this occurs, return to your have E85 should have a label
dealer for service. indicating ethanol content. Do not
use the fuel if the ethanol content is
greater than 85%.
At a minimum, E85 should meet You should drive the vehicle Filling the Tank
ASTM Specification D 5798 or immediately after refueling for at
CGSB Specification 3.512. Filling least 11 km (7 mi) to allow the
the tank with fuel mixtures that do vehicle to adapt to the change in { WARNING
not meet ASTM or CGSB ethanol concentration. Fuel vapor burns violently and a
specifications can affect driveability E85 has less energy per liter fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
and could cause the malfunction (gallon) than gasoline, so you will To help avoid injuries to you and
indicator lamp to come on. As the need to refill the fuel tank more
outside temperature approaches others, read and follow all the
often when using E85 than when instructions on the fuel pump
freezing, ethanol fuel distributors you are using gasoline. See Filling
should supply winter grade ethanol, island. Turn off the engine when
the Tank on page 9‑54. refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
the same as with unleaded
gasoline. Notice: Some additives are not or when refueling the vehicle. Do
compatible with E85 fuel and can not use cellular phones. Keep
The starting characteristics of harm the vehicle's fuel system. sparks, flames, and smoking
E85 fuel make it unsuitable for use Do not add anything to E85. materials away from fuel. Do not
when the ambient temperatures fall Damage caused by additives leave the fuel pump unattended
below −18°C (0°F). would not be covered by the when refueling the vehicle. This is
In the range of −18°C (0°F) to 0°C vehicle warranty. against the law in some places.
(32°F), you may experience an Notice: This vehicle was not Do not re-enter the vehicle while
increase in the time it takes for the designed for fuel that contains pumping fuel. Keep children away
engine to start. methanol. Do not use fuel from the fuel pump; never let
It is best not to alternate repeatedly containing methanol. It can children pump fuel.
between gasoline and E85. If you corrode metal parts in the fuel
do switch fuels, it is recommended system and also damage plastic
that you add as much fuel as and rubber parts. That damage
possible — do not add less than would not be covered under the
11 L (3 gal) when refueling. vehicle warranty.
{ WARNING
Fuel can spray out on you if you
open the fuel cap too quickly.
If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be
badly burned. This spray can
happen if the tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait
for any hiss noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
The tethered fuel cap is behind the If the cap is not properly installed,
fuel door on the vehicle's passenger the Malfunction Indicator Lamp will
side. To open the fuel door, push the come on. See Malfunction Indicator Do not top off or overfill the tank.
rearward center edge in and release Lamp on page 5‑13 for more Wait a few seconds before removing
and the door will open. Turn the fuel information. the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
cap counterclockwise to remove. Do surfaces as soon as possible. See
not release the cap too soon or it Exterior Care on page 10‑79.
will spring back. Reinstall the cap by
turning it clockwise until it clicks.
Filling a Portable Fuel

{ WARNING Container
WARNING (Continued)
If a fire starts while you are . Bring the fill nozzle in contact
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
{ WARNING with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
by shutting off the pump or by Never fill a portable fuel container nozzle. Contact should be
notifying the station attendant. while it is in the vehicle. Static maintained until the filling is
Leave the area immediately. electricity discharge from the complete.
container can ignite the fuel . Do not smoke while
Notice: If a new fuel cap is vapor. You can be badly burned pumping fuel.
needed, be sure to get the right and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you
. Do not use a cellular phone
type of cap from your dealer. The while pumping fuel.
wrong type of fuel cap might not and others:
fit properly, might cause the . Dispense fuel only into
malfunction indicator lamp to approved containers.
light, and could damage the fuel
tank and emissions system. See
. Do not fill a container while
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on it is inside a vehicle, in a
page 5‑13. vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than
the ground.
(Continued)
Towing vehicle such as a motor home, The vehicle can tow a trailer when
see Recreational Vehicle Towing on equipped with the proper trailer
page 10‑76. towing equipment. For trailering
General Towing capacity, see “Trailer Towing”
Information Driving Characteristics following in this section. Trailering
changes handling, acceleration,
Only use towing equipment that has and Towing Tips braking, durability and fuel
been designed for the vehicle.
economy. With the added weight,
Contact your dealer or trailering
dealer for assistance with preparing
{ WARNING the engine, transmission, wheel
assemblies and tires are forced to
the vehicle for towing a trailer. The driver can lose control when work harder and under greater
See the following trailer towing pulling a trailer if the correct loads. The trailer also adds wind
information in this section: equipment is not used or the resistance, increasing the pulling
.
vehicle is not driven properly. requirements. For safe trailering,
For information on driving while
For example, if the trailer is too correctly use the proper trailering
towing a trailer, see “Driving
Characteristics and heavy, the brakes may not work equipment.
Towing Tips.” well — or even at all. The driver
The following information has
and passengers could be important trailering tips and rules
. For maximum vehicle and trailer seriously injured. The vehicle may
weights, see “Trailer Towing.” for your safety and that of your
also be damaged; the resulting passengers. Read this section
. For information on equipment to repairs would not be covered by carefully before pulling a trailer.
tow a trailer, see “Towing the vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer
Equipment.” only if all the steps in this section
For information on towing a disabled have been followed. Ask your
vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on dealer for advice and information
page 10‑76. For information on about towing a trailer with the
towing the vehicle behind another vehicle.
Pulling a Trailer
. Obey speed limit restrictions. has electric brakes, start the vehicle
Do not drive faster than the and trailer moving and then apply
Here are some important points: maximum posted speed for the trailer brake controller by hand
. There are many laws, including trailers, or no more than 90 km/h to be sure the brakes are working.
speed limit restrictions that apply (55 mph), to reduce wear on the
vehicle. During the trip, check regularly to be
to trailering. Check for legal
sure that the load is secure, and the
requirements with state or . For vehicles with the Ultra Rear lamps and trailer brakes are working
provincial police. Parking Assist (URPA) system, properly.
. Do not tow a trailer at all during turn the system off when towing
the first 1 600 km (1,000 miles) a trailer. If the tow bar is Towing with a Stability Control
the new vehicle is driven. The installed while not towing a System
engine, axle or other parts could trailer, change the URPA system When towing, the sound of the
be damaged. to the “Tow Bar” setting. See stability control system might be
Ultrasonic Parking Assist on heard. The system is reacting to the
. During the first 800 km page 9‑45 for more information.
(500 miles) that a trailer is vehicle movement caused by the
towed, do not drive over 80 km/h Driving with a Trailer trailer, which mainly occurs during
(50 mph) and do not make starts cornering. This is normal when
Towing a trailer requires experience. towing heavier trailers.
at full throttle. This reduces wear
Get familiar with handling and
on the vehicle.
braking with the added trailer Following Distance
. The vehicle can tow in D (Drive). weight. The vehicle is now longer Stay at least twice as far behind the
Use a lower gear if the and not as responsive as the vehicle ahead as you would when
transmission shifts too often. vehicle is by itself. driving the vehicle without a trailer.
. Do not use the Fuel Saver Mode Check all trailer hitch parts and This can help to avoid situations
when towing. attachments, safety chains, that require heavy braking and
electrical connectors, lamps, tires sudden turns.
and mirror adjustments. If the trailer
Passing When turning with a trailer, make Driving on Grades

wider turns than normal so the
More passing distance is needed Reduce speed and shift to a lower
trailer will not strike soft shoulders,
when towing a trailer. Because the gear before starting down a long
curbs, road signs, trees or other
rig is longer, it is necessary to go or steep downgrade. If the
objects. Use the turn signal well in
farther beyond the passed vehicle transmission is not shifted down,
advance and avoid jerky or sudden
before returning to the lane. the brakes might have to be used
maneuvers.
so much that they would get hot
Backing Up Turn Signals When Towing a and no longer work well.
Hold the bottom of the steering Trailer The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).
wheel with one hand. To move the Use a lower gear if the transmission
trailer to the left, move that hand to The turn signal indicators on the
instrument panel flash whenever shifts too often.
the left. To move the trailer to the
right, move your hand to the right. signaling a turn or lane change. When towing at high altitude on
Always back up slowly and, Properly hooked up, the trailer steep uphill grades, engine coolant
if possible, have someone lamps also flash, telling other will boil at a lower temperature than
guide you. drivers the vehicle is turning, at normal altitudes. If the engine is
changing lanes or stopping. turned off immediately after towing
Making Turns When towing a trailer, the arrows on at high altitude on steep uphill
Notice: Making very sharp turns the instrument panel flash for turns grades, the vehicle may show signs
while trailering could cause the even if the bulbs on the trailer are similar to engine overheating. To
trailer to come in contact with the burned out. Check occasionally to avoid this, let the engine run while
vehicle. The vehicle could be be sure the trailer bulbs are still parked, preferably on level ground,
damaged. Avoid making very working. with the transmission in P (Park) for
sharp turns while trailering. a few minutes before turning the
engine off. If the overheat warning
comes on, see Engine Overheating
on page 10‑21.
Parking on Hills 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then trailer operation are automatic
apply the parking brake and shift transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
{ WARNING into P (Park). lubricant, belts, cooling system and
brake system. Inspect these before
5. Release the brake pedal.
Parking the vehicle on a hill with and during the trip.
the trailer attached can be Leaving After Parking on a Hill Check periodically to see that all
dangerous. If something goes 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal. hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
wrong, the rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both 2. Start the engine. Engine Cooling When Trailer
the vehicle and the trailer can be 3. Shift into a gear. Towing
damaged. When possible, always 4. Release the parking brake. The cooling system may temporarily
park the rig on a flat surface. overheat during severe operating
5. Let up on the brake pedal. conditions. See Engine Overheating
If parking the rig on a hill: 6. Drive slowly until the trailer is on page 10‑21.
clear of the chocks.
1. Press the brake pedal, but do Trailer Towing
not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn 7. Stop and have someone pick up
the wheels into the curb if facing and store the chocks. Before pulling a trailer, there are
downhill or into traffic if facing three important considerations that
Maintenance When Trailer
uphill. have to do with weight:
Towing
2. Have someone place chocks . The weight of the trailer
The vehicle needs service more
under the trailer wheels. often when pulling a trailer. See this . The weight of the trailer tongue
3. When the wheel chocks are in manual's Maintenance Schedule or . The total weight on the vehicle's
place, release the brake pedal Index for more information. Things tires
until the chocks absorb the load. that are especially important in
Weight of the Trailer Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh,
based upon the vehicle model and options.
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
Speed, altitude, road grades, Maximum Trailer GCWR*
outside temperature, special Weight with Trailer
equipment, and the amount of Vehicle Brakes†
tongue weight the vehicle can carry L4 Engine, FWD 680 kg (1,500 lbs) 2 625 kg (5,787 lbs)
must be considered. See “Weight of
the Trailer Tongue” later in this L4 Engine, AWD 680 kg (1,500 lbs) 2 700 kg (5,952 lbs)
section for more information. V6 Engine, FWD 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 600 kg (7,937 lbs)
Maximum trailer weight is calculated V6 Engine, AWD 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 700 kg (8,157 lbs)
assuming only the driver is in the
tow vehicle and it has all the † For trailers without trailer brakes the maximum trailer weight is 454 kg
required trailering equipment. (1,000 lbs). See Towing Equipment on page 9‑63 for more information.
The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted *The Gross Combination Weight Ask your dealer for our trailering
from the maximum trailer weight. Rating (GCWR) is the total information or advice. See
allowable weight of the completely Customer Assistance Offices on
loaded vehicle and trailer including page 13‑3 for more information.
any passengers, cargo, equipment
and conversions. The GCWR for the
vehicle should not be exceeded.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue Trailering may be limited by the

vehicle's ability to carry tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
weight. Tongue weight cannot cause
an important weight to measure
the vehicle to exceed the GVWR
because it affects the total gross
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
Weight Rating). The effect of
curb weight of the vehicle, any
additional weight may reduce the
cargo carried in it, and the people
trailering capacity more than the
who will be riding in the vehicle.
total of the additional weight.
If there are a lot of options,
equipment, passengers or cargo in It is important that the vehicle
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue does not exceed any of its
weight the vehicle can carry, which If a weight-carrying hitch or a ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
will also reduce the trailer weight the weight-distributing hitch is being Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, used, the trailer tongue (A) should Weight. The only way to be sure it is
the tongue load must be added to weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total not exceeding any of these ratings
the GVW because the vehicle will loaded trailer weight (B). is to weigh the vehicle and trailer.
be carrying that weight, too. See
After loading the trailer, weigh the
Vehicle Load Limits on page 9‑21.
trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, adjustments
might be made by moving some
items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on the Vehicle's Towing Equipment Safety Chains

Tires Always attach chains between the
Hitches
Inflate the vehicle's tires to the vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
upper limit for cold tires. These Use the correct hitch equipment. safety chains under the tongue of
numbers can be found on the See your dealer or a hitch dealer the trailer to help prevent the tongue
Certification label or see Vehicle for assistance. from contacting the road if it
Load Limits on page 9‑21 for more . The rear bumper on the vehicle becomes separated from the hitch.
information. Do not go over the is not intended for hitches. Do Leave enough slack so the rig can
GVW limit for the vehicle, or the not attach rental hitches or other turn. Never allow safety chains to
GAWR, including the weight of the bumper-type hitches to it. Use drag on the ground.
trailer tongue. If using a weight only a frame-mounted hitch that
distributing hitch, do not go over the
Trailer Brakes
does not attach to the bumper.
rear axle limit before applying the Does the trailer have its own
weight distribution spring bars.
. Will any holes be made in the brakes? Be sure to read and follow
body of the vehicle when the the instructions for the trailer brakes
trailer hitch is installed? If there so they are installed, adjusted, and
are, seal the holes when the maintained properly.
hitch is removed. If the holes are
not sealed, dirt, water, and Because the vehicle has antilock
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's
from the exhaust can get into the brake system. If this is done, both
vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on brake systems will not work well,
page 9‑33. or at all.
Trailer Sway Conversions and

Control (TSC) Add-Ons
The vehicle has a Trailer Sway
Control (TSC) feature as part of the Add-On Electrical
StabiliTrak system. If TSC detects
that the trailer is swaying, the
Equipment
vehicle's brakes are automatically Notice: Do not add anything
applied. electrical to the vehicle unless
you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can
damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from
When TSC is applying the brakes, working as they should.
the TCS/StabiliTrak indicator light Add-on equipment can drain the
flashes to notify the driver to reduce vehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if the
speed. See Traction Control System vehicle is not operating.
(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light on
The vehicle has an airbag system.
page 5‑17. If the trailer continues to Before attempting to add anything
sway, StabiliTrak will reduce engine
electrical to the vehicle, see
torque to help slow the vehicle.
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
TSC will not function if StabiliTrak is Vehicle on page 3‑35 and Adding
turned off. Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3‑36.
Vehicle Care 10-1
Vehicle Care Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-15

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-21 Bulb Replacement
General Information Power Steering Fluid Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 (2.4L L4 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Headlamps, Front Turn
California Proposition Power Steering Fluid Signal, Sidemarker, and
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 (3.0L V6 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
California Perchlorate Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Accessories and Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . 10-34
Vehicle Checks All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-35
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-28 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-36
Doing Your Own
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Automatic Transmission Shift Electrical System
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Lock Control Function
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Engine Compartment Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Engine Compartment Fuse
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Ignition Transmission Lock
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
Instrument Panel Fuse
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Park Brake and P (Park)
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-13 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-29
Automatic Transmission Wiper Blade
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
10-2 Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires Wheel Alignment and Tire General Information

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-44 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-61 For service and parts needs, visit
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 your dealer. You will receive
Tire Terminology and If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 and supported service people.
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-72 Genuine GM parts have one of
Tire Pressure Monitor these marks:
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Jump Starting
Tire Pressure Monitor Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52 Towing
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Recreational Vehicle
When It Is Time for New Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Appearance Care
Different Size Tires and Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
Uniform Tire Quality Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Vehicle Care 10-3
California Proposition California Perchlorate Accessories and

65 Warning Materials Requirements Modifications
Most motor vehicles, including this Certain types of automotive Adding non‐dealer accessories to
one, contain and/or emit chemicals applications, such as airbag the vehicle can affect vehicle
known to the State of California to initiators, seat belt pretensioners, performance and safety, including
cause cancer and birth defects or and lithium batteries contained in such things as airbags, braking,
other reproductive harm. Engine Remote Keyless Entry transmitters, stability, ride and handling,
exhaust, many parts and systems, may contain perchlorate materials. emissions systems, aerodynamics,
many fluids, and some component Special handling may be necessary. durability, and electronic systems
wear by-products contain and/or For additional information, see like antilock brakes, traction control,
emit these chemicals. www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ and stability control. Some of these
perchlorate. accessories could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Damage to vehicle components
resulting from the installation or use
of non‐GM certified parts, including
control module modifications, is not
covered under the terms of the
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.
10-4 Vehicle Care
GM Accessories are designed to Vehicle Checks If doing some of your own service
complement and function with other work, use the proper service
systems on the vehicle. Your GM manual. It tells you much more
dealer can accessorize the vehicle Doing Your Own about how to service the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories. Service Work than this manual can. To order the
When you go to your GM dealer proper service manual, see Service
and ask for GM Accessories, you
will know that GM-trained and
{ WARNING Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑12.
supported service technicians will You can be injured and the This vehicle has an airbag system.
perform the work using genuine vehicle could be damaged if you Before attempting to do your own
GM Accessories. try to do service work on a vehicle service work, see Servicing the
Also, see Adding Equipment to the without knowing enough about it. Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on . Be sure you have sufficient page 3‑35.
page 3‑36. knowledge, experience, Keep a record with all parts receipts
the proper replacement and list the mileage and the date of
parts, and tools before any service work performed. See
attempting any vehicle Maintenance Records on page 11‑9.
maintenance task.
. Be sure to use the proper
nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. Metric and English
fasteners can be easily
confused. If the wrong
fasteners are used, parts
can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
Vehicle Care 10-5
Hood To close the hood:

To open the hood: 1. Before closing the hood, be sure
all the filler caps are on properly.
2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in)
above the vehicle and release it
so it fully latches. Check to
make sure the hood is closed
and repeat the process if
necessary.
2. Move the secondary hood

release lever to the right to
release the striker. The lever is
near the middle of the hood.
1. Pull the release handle located
below the instrument panel to 3. Lift the hood.
the left of the steering wheel.
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
2.4 L L4 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-7
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on F. Engine Compartment Fuse J. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
page 10‑15. Block on page 10‑37. Pressure Cap. See Engine
B. Engine Cover on page 10‑9. G. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. Coolant on page 10‑18.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of See Jump Starting on K. Windshield Washer Fluid
View). See Engine Oil on page 10‑72. Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
page 10‑10. H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. page 10‑24.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine See Jump Starting on

Oil on page 10‑10. page 10‑72.
E. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See I. Battery on page 10‑27

Brakes on page 10‑24. (Out of View).
10-8 Vehicle Care
3.0 L V6 Engine
Vehicle Care 10-9
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on G. Engine Compartment Fuse Engine Cover

page 10‑15. Block on page 10‑37.
B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir H. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.
(Under Engine Cover). See See Jump Starting on
Power Steering Fluid (2.4L L4 page 10‑72.
Engine) on page 10‑23 or I. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.
Power Steering Fluid (3.0L See Jump Starting on
V6 Engine) on page 10‑23. page 10‑72.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine J. Battery on page 10‑27 (Out
Oil on page 10‑10. of View).
D. Engine Cover on page 10‑9. K. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
E. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of Pressure Cap. See Engine
View). See Engine Oil on Coolant on page 10‑18. Engine Cover (3.0 L V6)
page 10‑10. L. Windshield Washer Fluid A. Oil Fill Cap
F. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
Brakes on page 10‑24. page 10‑24. B. Engine Cover Bolt
C. Engine Cover
10-10 Vehicle Care
To remove: Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil

1. Remove the oil fill cap (A). To ensure proper engine It is a good idea to check the engine
2. Remove the engine cover performance and long life, careful oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
bolt (B). attention must be paid to engine oil. get an accurate reading, the vehicle
Following these simple, but must be on level ground. The
3. Raise the engine cover (C) to important steps will help protect engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow
release from the retainers. loop. See Engine Compartment
your investment:
4. Lift and remove the engine Overview on page 10‑6 for the
. Always use engine oil approved location of the engine oil dipstick.
cover. to the proper specification and of
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to the proper viscosity grade. See Obtaining an accurate oil level
reinstall engine cover. “Selecting the Right Engine Oil” reading is essential:
in this section. 1. If the engine has been running
. Check the engine oil level recently, turn off the engine and
regularly and maintain the allow several minutes for the oil
proper oil level. See “Checking to drain back into the oil pan.
Engine Oil” and “When to Add Checking the oil level too soon
Engine Oil” in this section. after engine shutoff will not
provide an accurate oil level
. Change the engine oil at the reading.
appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Life System on page 10‑13. 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it
with a paper towel or cloth, then
. Always dispose of engine oil push it back in all the way.
properly. See “What to Do with Remove it again, keeping the tip
Used Oil” in this section. down, and check the level.
Vehicle Care 10-11
When to Add Engine Oil Notice: Do not add too much oil. Selecting the Right Engine Oil
Oil levels above or below the
Selecting the right engine oil
acceptable operating range
depends on both the proper oil
shown on the dipstick are harmful
specification and viscosity grade:
to the engine. If you find that you
have an oil level above the Specification
operating range, i.e., the engine
Use and ask for engine oils with the
has so much oil that the oil level
L4 Engine dexos™ certification mark. Oils
gets above the cross-hatched
meeting the requirements of the
area that shows the proper
vehicle should have the dexos
operating range, the engine could
certification mark on the container.
be damaged. You should drain
This certification mark indicates that
out the excess oil or limit driving
the oil has been approved to the
of the vehicle and seek a service
dexos specification.
professional to remove the
excess amount of oil.
V6 Engine
See Engine Compartment Overview
If the oil is below the cross-hatched on page 10‑6 for the location of the
area at the tip of the dipstick, add engine oil fill cap.
1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
and then recheck the level. See Add enough oil to put the level
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” in somewhere in the proper operating
this section for an explanation of range. Push the dipstick all the way This vehicle was filled at the factory
what kind of oil to use. For engine back in when through. with dexos‐approved engine oil.
oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on
page 12‑2.
10-12 Vehicle Care
Notice: Use only engine oil Use of Substitute Engine Oils if

that is approved to the dexos dexos is unavailable: In the event
specification or an equivalent that dexos‐approved engine oil is
engine oil of the appropriate not available at an oil change or for
viscosity grade. Engine oils maintaining proper oil level, you
approved to the dexos may use substitute engine oil
specification will show the displaying the API Starburst symbol
dexos symbol on the container. and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.
Failure to use the recommended Use of oils that do not meet the
engine oil or equivalent can dexos specification, however, may
result in engine damage not result in reduced performance under
covered by the vehicle warranty. certain circumstances.
If you are unsure whether the
oil is approved to the dexos Viscosity Grade
specification, ask your service SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
provider. grade for the vehicle. Do not use
other viscosity oils such as
SAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W-50.
Cold Temperature Operation: In an

area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −29°C
(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil should
Vehicle Care 10-13
be used. An oil of this viscosity What to Do with Used Oil Engine Oil Life System
grade will provide easier cold
Used engine oil contains certain When to Change Engine Oil
starting for the engine at extremely
elements that can be unhealthy for
low temperatures. When selecting This vehicle has a computer system
your skin and could even cause
an oil of the appropriate viscosity that indicates when to change the
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
grade, be sure to always select engine oil and filter. This is based
your skin for very long. Clean your
an oil that meets the required on engine revolutions and engine
skin and nails with soap and water,
specification, dexos. See temperature, and not on mileage.
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
“Specification” earlier in this Based on driving conditions, the
properly dispose of clothing or rags
section for more information. mileage at which an oil change is
containing used engine oil. See the
Engine Oil Additives/Engine manufacturer's warnings about the indicated can vary considerably. For
Oil Flushes use and disposal of oil products. the oil life system to work properly,
the system must be reset every time
Do not add anything to the oil. The Used oil can be a threat to the
the oil is changed.
recommended oils with the dexos environment. If you change your
specification and displaying the own oil, be sure to drain all the oil When the system has calculated
dexos certification mark are all that from the filter before disposal. Never that oil life has been diminished,
is needed for good performance and dispose of oil by putting it in the it indicates that an oil change is
engine protection. trash or pouring it on the ground, necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE
into sewers, or into streams or OIL SOON message comes on. See
Engine oil system flushes are not bodies of water. Recycle it by taking Engine Oil Messages on page 5‑26.
recommended and could cause it to a place that collects used oil. Change the oil as soon as possible
engine damage not covered by the within the next 1 000 km (600 mi).
vehicle warranty.
10-14 Vehicle Care
It is possible that, if driving under How to Reset the Engine Oil Or:
the best conditions, the oil life Life System 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN
system might indicate that an oil with the engine off.
change is not necessary for up to a Reset the system whenever the
year. The engine oil and filter must engine oil is changed so that the 2. Fully press and release the
be changed at least once a year system can calculate the next accelerator pedal three times
and, at this time, the system must engine oil change. To reset the within five seconds.
be reset. Your dealer has trained system:
The system is reset when the
service people who will perform this 1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN, CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
work and reset the system. It is also with the engine off. message goes off.
important to check the oil regularly
2. Press the DIC MENU button If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
over the course of an oil drain
to display the Vehicle message comes back on when the
interval and keep it at the proper
Information menu. vehicle is started, the engine oil life
level.
3. Press either the up or down system has not been reset. Repeat
If the system is ever reset the procedure.
arrows to view REMAINING
accidentally, the oil must be
OIL LIFE.
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
since the last oil change. 4. Press the SET/CLEAR button
Remember to reset the oil life until 100% is displayed.
system whenever the oil is changed. 5. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.
Vehicle Care 10-15
Automatic Transmission Change the fluid and filter at the How to Inspect the Engine Air
intervals listed in Scheduled Cleaner/Filter
Fluid Maintenance on page 11‑2, and
be sure to use the fluid listed in To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
How to Check Automatic remove the filter from the vehicle
Transmission Fluid Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11‑6. and lightly shake the filter to release
It is not necessary to check loose dust and dirt. If the filter
the transmission fluid level. remains covered with dirt, a new
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter filter is required. Never use
A transmission fluid leak is the
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak See Engine Compartment Overview compressed air to clean the filter.
occurs, take the vehicle to your on page 10‑6 for the location of the To inspect or replace the engine air
dealer service department and have engine air cleaner/filter. cleaner/filter:
it repaired as soon as possible.
When to Inspect the Engine Air 1. Open the hood. See Hood on
There is a special procedure for Cleaner/Filter page 10‑5.
checking and changing the
transmission fluid. Because this Inspect or replace the air cleaner/ 2. Locate the air filter housing on
procedure is difficult, this should filter at the scheduled maintenance the passenger side of the engine
be done at your dealer service intervals. See Scheduled compartment. See Engine
department. Contact your dealer Maintenance on page 11‑2 for more Compartment Overview on
for additional information or the information. If driving in dusty/dirty page 10‑6.
procedure can be found in the conditions, inspect the filter at each
service manual. To purchase a engine oil change.
service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information
on page 13‑12.
10-16 Vehicle Care
2. Align the air cleaner housing Cooling System

cover tabs to the air cleaner
housing.
3. Install the air cleaner housing
cover using the four screws.
{ WARNING
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you or
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
3. Remove the four air cleaner helps to stop flames if the engine
housing cover screws.
backfires. Use caution when 2.4 L L4 Engine
4. Pull straight up on the cover, and working on the engine and do not
while holding the cover, remove drive with the air cleaner/filter off. A. Engine Cooling Fan (Out
the air cleaner filter. of View)
5. Inspect or replace the air cleaner B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is
filter. Pressure Cap
off, dirt can easily get into the
How to Reinstall Engine Air engine, which could damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter
Cleaner/Filter in place when you are driving.
1. Install the air cleaner filter into
the air cleaner housing. The
outer air cleaner filter seal must
be fitted properly in the air
cleaner housing.
Vehicle Care 10-17
If the coolant inside the coolant If there seems to be no leak, with

surge tank is boiling, do not do the engine on, check to see if the
anything else until it cools down. electric engine cooling fan is
The vehicle should be parked on a running. If the engine is
level surface. overheating, the fan should be
The coolant level should be at the running. If it is not, the vehicle
COLD FILL line. If it is not, the needs service. Turn off the engine.
vehicle may have a leak at the Notice: Using coolant other than
radiator hoses, heater hoses, DEX-COOL® can cause premature
radiator, water pump, or somewhere engine, heater core, or radiator
else in the cooling system. corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing
3.0 L V6 Engine { WARNING sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
or 24 months, whichever occurs
A. Engine Cooling Fans (Out
of View) Heater and radiator hoses, and first. Any repairs would not be
other engine parts, can be very covered by the vehicle warranty.
B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and hot. Do not touch them. If you do, Always use DEX-COOL
Pressure Cap you can be burned. (silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
{ WARNING Do not run the engine if there is a
leak. If you run the engine, it
An electric engine cooling fan could lose all coolant. That could
under the hood can start up even cause an engine fire, and you
when the engine is not running could be burned. Get any leak
and can cause injury. Keep fixed before you drive the vehicle.
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
10-18 Vehicle Care

. Will not damage aluminum parts.
Engine Coolant WARNING (Continued) . Helps keep the proper engine
The cooling system in the vehicle is
temperature.
filled with DEX-COOL® engine With plain water or the wrong
coolant. This coolant is designed to mixture, the engine could get too Notice: If an improper coolant
remain in the vehicle for 5 years or hot but you would not get the mixture is used, the engine could
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever overheat warning. The engine overheat and be badly damaged.
occurs first. The repair cost would not be
could catch fire and you or others
The following explains the cooling could be burned. Use a 50/
Too much water in the mixture
system and how to check and add 50 mixture of clean, drinkable can freeze and crack the engine,
coolant when it is low. If there is a water and DEX-COOL coolant. radiator, heater core, and other
problem with engine overheating,
parts.
see Engine Overheating on
page 10‑21. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, Never dispose of engine coolant by
drinkable water and DEX-COOL putting it in the trash, pouring it on
What to Use coolant. If using this mixture, the ground, or into sewers, streams,
nothing else needs to be added. or bodies of water. Have the coolant
{ WARNING This mixture: changed by an authorized service
. Gives freezing protection down center, familiar with legal
Adding only plain water or some to −37°C (−34°F), outside requirements regarding used
other liquid to the cooling system temperature. coolant disposal. This will help
can be dangerous. Plain water protect the environment and your
. Gives boiling protection up to health.
and other liquids, can boil before
129°C (265°F), engine
the proper coolant mixture will.
temperature.
The coolant warning system is set
for the proper coolant mixture. . Protects against rust and
corrosion.
(Continued)
Vehicle Care 10-19
Checking Coolant How to Add Coolant to the

The vehicle must be on a level Coolant Surge Tank { WARNING
surface when checking the coolant Notice: This vehicle has a Steam and scalding liquids from a
level. specific coolant fill procedure. hot cooling system can blow out
Check to see if coolant is visible in Failure to follow this procedure and burn you badly. They are
the coolant surge tank. If the coolant could cause the engine to under pressure, and if you turn
inside the coolant surge tank is overheat and be severely the coolant surge tank pressure
boiling, do not do anything else until damaged. cap — even a little — they can
it cools down. If coolant is visible If you have not found a problem yet, come out at high speed. Never
but the coolant level is not at or check to see if coolant is visible in turn the cap when the cooling
above the COLD FILL line, add a the coolant surge tank. If coolant system, including the coolant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable is visible but the coolant level is surge tank pressure cap, is hot.
water and DEX-COOL coolant at the not at the COLD FILL line, add a Wait for the cooling system and
coolant surge tank, but be sure the 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable coolant surge tank pressure cap
cooling system is cool before this is water and DEX-COOL coolant at the to cool if you ever have to turn
done. See Cooling System on coolant surge tank, but be sure the the pressure cap.
page 10‑16 for more information. cooling system, including the
The coolant surge tank is located in coolant surge tank pressure cap, is
the engine compartment on the cool before you do it. See Engine
driver side of the vehicle. See Overheating on page 10‑21 for more
Engine Compartment Overview on information.
page 10‑6 for more information on
location.
10-20 Vehicle Care
{ WARNING { WARNING
Adding only plain water or some You can be burned if you spill
other liquid to the cooling system coolant on hot engine parts.
can be dangerous. Plain water Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and other liquids, can boil before and it will burn if the engine parts
1. Remove the coolant surge tank
the proper coolant mixture will. are hot enough. Do not spill
pressure cap when the cooling
The coolant warning system is set coolant on a hot engine.
system, including the coolant
for the proper coolant mixture. surge tank pressure cap and
With plain water or the wrong Notice: In cold weather, water upper radiator hose, is no
mixture, the engine could get too can freeze and crack the engine, longer hot.
hot but you would not get the radiator, heater core and other
overheat warning. The engine Turn the pressure cap slowly
parts. Use the recommended counterclockwise about
could catch fire and you or coolant and the proper coolant
others could be burned. Use a one-quarter of a turn. If you hear
mixture. a hiss, wait for that to stop. This
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
will allow any pressure still left to
water and DEX-COOL coolant.
be vented out the
discharge hose.
2. Keep turning the pressure cap
slowly, and remove it.
Vehicle Care 10-21
By this time, the coolant level Engine Overheating

inside the coolant surge tank
may be lower. If the level is The vehicle has an indicator to warn
lower, add more of the proper of engine overheating. There is an
DEX-COOL coolant mixture to engine coolant temperature warning
the coolant surge tank until the light on the vehicle's instrument
level reaches the COLD panel. See Engine Coolant
FILL line. Temperature Gauge on page 5‑10.
5. Replace the pressure cap. The decision may be made not
Be sure the pressure cap is to lift the hood when this warning
hand-tight. appears, but instead get service
help right away. See Roadside
Check the level in the coolant surge Assistance Program on page 13‑6.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with tank when the cooling system has
the proper DEX-COOL coolant cooled down. If the coolant is not at If the decision to lift the hood is
mixture, to the COLD FILL line. the proper level, repeat Steps 1 made, make sure the vehicle is
4. With the coolant surge tank through 3 and reinstall the pressure parked on a level surface.
pressure cap off, start the cap. If the coolant still is not at the Then check to see if the engine
engine and let it run until the proper level when the system cools cooling fan(s) are running. If the
upper radiator hose can be felt down again, see your dealer. engine is overheating, the fan(s)
getting hot. Watch out for the should be running. If they are not,
engine cooling fan. do not continue to run the engine
and have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Engine damage from
running the engine without
coolant is not covered by the
warranty.
10-22 Vehicle Care
If Steam is Coming from the If No Steam is Coming from 3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
Engine Compartment the Engine Compartment idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off the
If an engine overheat warning is road, shift to P (Park) or
{ WARNING displayed but no steam can be seen N (Neutral) and let the
or heard, the problem may not be engine idle.
Steam from an overheated engine too serious. Sometimes the engine
can burn you badly, even if you can get a little too hot when the If the temperature overheat gauge is
just open the hood. Stay away vehicle: no longer in the overheat zone or an
from the engine if you see or hear .
overheat warning no longer
steam coming from it. Just turn it Climbs a long hill on a hot day. displays, the vehicle can be driven.
off and get everyone away from . Stops after high-speed driving. Continue to drive the vehicle slowly
the vehicle until it cools down. for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
. Idles for long periods in traffic.
Wait until there is no sign of vehicle distance from the vehicle in
steam or coolant before you open
. Tows a trailer. front. If the warning does not come
the hood. If the overheat warning is displayed back on, continue to drive normally.
with no sign of steam: If the warning continues, pull over,
If you keep driving when the
engine is overheated, the liquids 1. Turn the air conditioning off. stop, and park the vehicle
right away.
in it can catch fire. You or others 2. Turn the heater on to the highest
could be badly burned. Stop the temperature and to the highest If there is no sign of steam, idle the
engine if it overheats, and get out fan speed. Open the windows as engine for three minutes while
of the vehicle until the engine necessary. parked. If the warning is still
is cool. displayed, turn off the engine until it
cools down.
Vehicle Care 10-23
Power Steering Fluid When to Check Power Steering 5. Replace the cap and completely
Fluid tighten it.
(2.4L L4 Engine)
The power steering fluid does not 6. Remove the cap again and look
The vehicle has electric power at the fluid level on the dipstick.
steering and does not use power need to be checked unless there is
steering fluid. a leak in the system or you hear an The fluid level should be between
unusual noise. Have the system MAX and MIN line at room
inspected and repaired if there is a temperature. If the fluid is on or
Power Steering Fluid fluid loss. below MIN line, add fluid.
(3.0L V6 Engine)
How to Check Power Steering What to Use
Fluid
To determine what kind of fluid to
To check the power steering fluid: use, refer to Recommended Fluids
1. Turn the engine off and let it and Lubricants on page 11‑6.
cool down. Always use the proper fluid.
2. Remove the engine cover. Refer Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid
to Engine Cover on page 10‑9. may damage the vehicle and the
The power steering fluid reservoir is damages may not be covered by
located toward the rear of the 3. Wipe the cap and the top of the the vehicle's warranty. Always
engine compartment on the reservoir clean. use the correct fluid listed in
passenger side of the vehicle. See Recommended Fluids and
Engine Compartment Overview on 4. Unscrew the cap and wipe the
dipstick with a clean rag. Lubricants on page 11‑6.
page 10‑6 for reservoir location.
10-24 Vehicle Care
Washer Fluid Notice: Brakes

. When using concentrated This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc
What to Use washer fluid, follow the brake pads have built-in wear
Read the manufacturer's manufacturer's instructions indicators that make a high-pitched
instructions before refilling the for adding water. warning sound when the brake pads
windshield washer fluid. If operating . Do not mix water with are worn and new pads are needed.
the vehicle in an area where the The sound can come and go or be
ready-to-use washer fluid.
temperature may fall below freezing, heard all the time the vehicle is
Water can cause the solution
use a fluid that has sufficient to freeze and damage the moving, except when applying the
protection against freezing. washer fluid tank and other brake pedal firmly.
Adding Washer Fluid parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
{ WARNING
. Fill the washer fluid tank only The brake wear warning sound
three-quarters full when it is means that soon the brakes will
very cold. This allows for not work well. That could lead to
fluid expansion if freezing a crash. When the brake wear
occurs, which could damage warning sound is heard, have the
Open the cap with the washer the tank if it is vehicle serviced.
symbol on it and add washer fluid completely full.
until full. See Engine Compartment Notice: Continuing to drive with
Overview on page 10‑6 for reservoir
. Do not use engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the windshield worn-out brake pads could result
location. in costly brake repair.
washer. It can damage the
windshield washer system
and paint.
Vehicle Care 10-25
Some driving conditions or climates Brake Adjustment Brake Fluid

can cause a brake squeal when the
Every time the brakes are applied,
brakes are first applied or lightly
with or without the vehicle moving,
applied. This does not mean
the brakes adjust for wear.
something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are Replacing Brake System Parts
necessary to help prevent brake The braking system on a vehicle is
pulsation. When tires are rotated, complex. Its many parts have to be
inspect brake pads for wear and of top quality and work well together The brake master cylinder reservoir
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the if the vehicle is to have really good is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
proper sequence to torque braking. The vehicle was designed indicated on the reservoir cap. See
specifications in Capacities and and tested with top-quality brake Engine Compartment Overview on
Specifications on page 12‑2. parts. When parts of the braking page 10‑6 for the location of the
Brake linings should always be system are replaced, be sure to get reservoir.
replaced as complete axle sets. new, approved replacement parts.
There are only two reasons why the
If this is not done, the brakes might
Brake Pedal Travel brake fluid level in the reservoir
not work properly. For example,
might go down:
See your dealer if the brake pedal installing disc brake pads that are
does not return to normal height, wrong for the vehicle, can change . The brake fluid level goes down
or if there is a rapid increase in the balance between the front and because of normal brake lining
pedal travel. This could be a sign rear brakes — for the worse. The wear. When new linings are
that brake service might be braking performance expected can installed, the fluid level goes
required. change in many other ways if the back up.
wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.
10-26 Vehicle Care

. A fluid leak in the brake When the brake fluid falls to a low Notice:
hydraulic system can also cause level, the brake warning light comes
a low fluid level. Have the brake
. Using the wrong fluid can
on. See Brake System Warning badly damage brake
hydraulic system fixed, since a Light on page 5‑15.
leak means that sooner or later hydraulic system parts. For
the brakes will not work well. What to Add example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as
Do not top off the brake fluid. Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid engine oil, in the brake
Adding fluid does not correct a leak. from a sealed container. See hydraulic system can
If fluid is added when the linings are Recommended Fluids and damage brake hydraulic
worn, there will be too much fluid Lubricants on page 11‑6. system parts so badly that
when new brake linings are Always clean the brake fluid they will have to be replaced.
installed. Add or remove brake fluid, reservoir cap and the area around Do not let someone put in
as necessary, only when work is the cap before removing it. This the wrong kind of fluid.
done on the brake hydraulic system. helps keep dirt from entering the . If brake fluid is spilled on the
reservoir. vehicle's painted surfaces,
{ WARNING the paint finish can be
If too much brake fluid is added, it
{ WARNING damaged. Be careful not to
spill brake fluid on the
can spill on the engine and burn, With the wrong kind of fluid in the vehicle. If you do, wash it off
if the engine is hot enough. You brake hydraulic system, the immediately.
or others could be burned, and brakes might not work well. This
the vehicle could be damaged. could cause a crash. Always use
Add brake fluid only when work is the proper brake fluid.
done on the brake hydraulic
system.
Vehicle Care 10-27
Battery Infrequent Usage: Remove the How to Check Lubricant

black, negative (−) cable from the
Refer to the replacement number on battery to keep the battery from
the original battery label when a running down.
new battery is needed.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative (−) cable from the
{ DANGER battery or use a battery trickle
Battery posts, terminals, and charger.
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals All-Wheel Drive
known to the State of California to Transfer Case
cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling. When to Check and Change
Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the
Vehicle Storage Refer to the Maintenance Schedule vehicle should be on a level
to determine how often to check the surface.
lubricant and when to change it.
{ WARNING See Scheduled Maintenance on
If the level is below the bottom of
the fill plug hole, located on the
page 11‑2.
Batteries have acid that can burn transfer case, the vehicle will need
you and gas that can explode. some lubricant added. Add enough
You can be badly hurt if you are lubricant to raise the level to the
not careful. See Jump Starting on bottom of the fill plug hole. A fluid
page 10‑72 for tips on working loss could indicate a problem; check
around a battery without and have it repaired, if needed.
getting hurt.
10-28 Vehicle Care
What to Use Do not use the accelerator 1. Before starting this check, be
Refer to Recommended Fluids and pedal, and be ready to turn off sure there is enough room
Lubricants on page 11‑6 to the engine immediately if it around the vehicle. It should be
determine what kind of lubricant starts. parked on a level surface.
to use. 3. Try to start the engine in each 2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
gear. The vehicle should start See Parking Brake on
Starter Switch Check only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). page 9‑38.
If the vehicle starts in any other Be ready to apply the regular
position, contact your dealer for
{ WARNING service.
brake immediately if the vehicle
begins to move.
When you are doing this
Automatic Transmission 3. With the engine off, turn the
inspection, the vehicle could
ignition on, but do not start the
move suddenly. If the vehicle Shift Lock Control engine. Without applying the
moves, you or others could be Function Check regular brake, try to move the
injured. shift lever out of P (Park) with
{ WARNING normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room When you are doing this your dealer for service.
around the vehicle. inspection, the vehicle could
2. Firmly apply both the parking move suddenly. If the vehicle
brake and the regular brake. moves, you or others could be
See Parking Brake on injured.
page 9‑38.
Vehicle Care 10-29
Ignition Transmission WARNING (Continued)

Wiper Blade Replacement
Lock Check Windshield wiper blades should be
While parked, and with the parking of the vehicle in case it begins to inspected for wear and cracking.
brake set, try to turn the ignition to roll. Be ready to apply the regular See Scheduled Maintenance on
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever brake at once should the vehicle page 11‑2 for more information.
position. begin to move. Replacement blades come in
. The ignition should turn to different types and are removed in
LOCK/OFF only when the shift Park on a fairly steep hill, with the different ways. For proper type and
lever is in P (Park). vehicle facing downhill. Keeping length, see Maintenance
your foot on the regular brake, set Replacement Parts on page 11‑8.
. The ignition key should come the parking brake.
out only in LOCK/OFF. Notice: Allowing the wiper blade
. To check the parking brake's arm to touch the windshield when
Contact your dealer if service is holding ability: With the engine no wiper blade is installed could
required. running and the transmission in damage the windshield. Any
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot damage that occurs would not be
Park Brake and P (Park) pressure from the regular brake covered by your warranty. Do not
Mechanism Check pedal. Do this until the vehicle is allow the wiper blade arm to
held by the parking brake only. touch the windshield.
{ WARNING . To check the P (Park) Front Wiper Blade
mechanism's holding ability: Replacement
When you are doing this check, With the engine running, shift to
the vehicle could begin to move. P (Park). Then release the To replace the front wiper blades:
You or others could be injured parking brake followed by the 1. Lift the wiper arm from the
and property could be damaged. regular brake. windshield until no further
Make sure there is room in front Contact your dealer if service is movement is possible.
(Continued) required.
10-30 Vehicle Care
2. Hold the wiper arm at the tip with 5. Align the wiper blade with the
one hand and hold the wiper arm and hold both ends of the
blade at the tip with the arm while gently squeezing until
other hand. the blade snaps into place.
3. Pull down on the wiper blade. Do not apply excessive force
The blade will pull away from during this operation.
2. Press the square button on the the arm. Reposition the blade in the arm
top side, at the end of the wiper and repeat, if blade is not
arm, and pull the wiper blade out correctly positioned.
of the end of the wiper arm.
6. Place the wiper arm with the
3. Install the wiper blade connector wiper blade attached back on
by sliding into the end of the the liftgate glass.
wiper arm until the square button
on the wiper blade clicks into
place with the wiper arm.
4. Place the wiper arm with the
wiper blade in place back on the
windshield.
Rear Wiper Blade Replacement
4. Place the wiper blade into the
To replace the rear wiper blade:
wiper arm aligning the blade
1. Lift the wiper arm from the attachment rivet with the arm
liftgate glass until no further attachment.
movement is possible.
Vehicle Care 10-31

. Should be placed so it is
Headlamp Aiming perpendicular to the wall or
To adjust the vertical aim, do the
following:
The headlamp aiming system has other flat surface.
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
been preset at the factory. . Should not have any snow, ice, page 10‑5 for more information.
If the vehicle is damaged in an or mud on it.
accident, the aim of the headlamps . Should be fully assembled and
may be affected and adjustment all other work stopped while
may be necessary. headlamp aiming is being
It is recommended that a dealer performed.
adjust the headlamps. To re-aim . Should be normally loaded with
the headlamps yourself, use the a full tank of fuel and one person
following procedure. or 75 kg (160 lbs) sitting on the
The vehicle should be properly driver's seat.
prepared as follows. The vehicle: . Tires should be properly inflated.
. Should be placed so the Headlamp aiming is done with the
headlamps are 7.6 m (25 ft) vehicle's low-beam headlamps.
from a light colored wall. The high-beam headlamps will be 2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of
. Must have all four tires on a correctly aimed if the low-beam the low‐beam headlamp.
level surface which is level all headlamps are aimed properly.
3. Measure the distance from the
the way to the wall. ground to the aim dot on the
low‐beam headlamp. Record the
distance.
10-32 Vehicle Care
6. Turn on the low-beam 8. Turn the vertical aiming screw

headlamps and place a piece of until the headlamp beam is
cardboard or equivalent in front aimed to the horizontal tape line.
of the headlamp not being Turn it clockwise or
adjusted. This allows only the counterclockwise to raise or
beam of light from the headlamp lower the angle of the beam.
being adjusted to be seen on the
flat surface.
4. At the wall measure from the

ground upward (A) to the
recorded distance from
Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)
on the wall the width of the
vehicle at the height of the mark
in Step 4. 9. Make sure that the light from the
headlamp is positioned at the
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp bottom edge of the horizontal
to improve beam cut-off when tape line. The lamp on the
aiming. Covering a headlamp may left (A) shows the correct
cause excessive heat build-up headlamp aim. The lamp on the
which may cause damage to the 7. Locate the vertical headlamp
aiming screws, which are under right (B) shows the incorrect
headlamp. headlamp aim.
the hood near each headlamp
assembly. 10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for
the opposite headlamp.
Vehicle Care 10-33
Bulb Replacement Headlamps, Front Turn To replace:
For the proper type of replacement Signal, Sidemarker, and 1. Turn the tire to reach the access
Parking Lamps port cap located on front of
bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
wheel well cover.
page 10‑36.
For any bulb changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact
your dealer.
A. Low Beam Headlamp

A. Screw
B. High Beam headlamp
B. Access Port Cap
C. Park/Turn Signal Lamp
2. Remove screw (A) and turn
D. Side Marker Lamp access port cap (B)
counterclockwise to remove.
10-34 Vehicle Care
3. If replacing low/high headlamp Fog Lamps 4. Push the bulb socket into the
bulb, remove the dust cover cap fog lamp assembly and turn
from the back of the headlamp To replace one of these bulbs: clockwise to lock it into place.
housing by turning the cap 5. Reconnect the bulb socket to the
counterclockwise. electrical connector.
4. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise to remove Taillamps, Turn Signal,
from lamp assembly.
Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
5. Remove the bulb from the and Back-Up Lamps
socket or disconnect bulb
assembly from harness
connector.
6. Install new bulb.
7. Reinstall the lamp socket to
lamp assembly turning 1. Locate the fog lamp assembly
clockwise. under the front facia.
8. Replace the dust cover cap on 2. Disconnect the bulb socket from
headlamps. the electrical connector, turn and
9. Reinstall the wheel well cover pull out the bulb assembly.
access port cap and secure by 3. Remove the old bulb from the
installing screw. bulb socket and push the new
bulb straight into the bulb socket A. Sidemarker
until it connects. B. Stoplamp/Turn Signal Lamp/
Taillamp
C. Back-up Lamp
Vehicle Care 10-35
To replace one of these lamps: 5. Disconnect the lamp wiring License Plate Lamp
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate harness.
To replace one of these bulbs:
(Manual) on page 2‑8 or Liftgate
(Power) on page 2‑8. 1. Open the liftgate partway. See
Liftgate (Manual) on page 2‑8 or
Liftgate (Power) on page 2‑8 for
more information.
6. Turn the bulb socket

counterclockwise and pull it out.
A. Screw 7. Pull the bulb straight out of the
B. Screw Cover socket.
Passenger side shown, driver side
2. Remove the two screw 8. Install the new bulb.
similar
covers (B) from the taillamp 9. Push the bulb socket in and turn
assembly. 2. Push the left end of the lamp
it clockwise.
assembly towards the right.
3. Remove the two screws (A) 10. Reverse steps 2 through 5 to
securing the taillamp assembly. 3. Pull the lamp assembly down to
reinstall lamp assembly.
remove from liftgate.
4. Pull taillamp assembly out of
vehicle body.
10-36 Vehicle Care
5. Pull the bulb (B) straight out of Replacement Bulbs

the bulb socket.
Bulb
6. Push the replacement bulb Exterior Lamp
Number
straight into the bulb socket and
turn the bulb socket clockwise to Back-Up Lamp 921LL
install into lamp assembly.
Fog Lamp Front H11
7. Turn the lamp assembly into
Headlamp
the liftgate engaging the clip 9005LL
High Beam
side first.
8. Push on the lamp side opposite Headlamp
H11
the clip until the lamp assembly Low Beam
A. Bulb Socket snaps into place. License Plate Lamp 168LL
B. Bulb Parking Lamp/Turn
7444NA
C. Lamp Assembly Signal Front
4. Turn the bulb socket (A) Sidemarker Front
194LL
counterclockwise to remove and Rear
from lamp assembly (C). Taillamp/Turn Signal
3157K
Lamp/Stop Lamp
For replacement bulbs not listed

here, contact your dealer.
Vehicle Care 10-37
Electrical System If there is a problem on the road Engine Compartment

and a fuse needs to be replaced,
the same amperage fuse can be
Fuse Block
Fuses borrowed. Choose some feature of
The wiring circuits in the vehicle the vehicle that is not needed to use
are protected from short circuits by and replace it as soon as possible.
fuses. This greatly reduces the There are two fuse blocks in the
chance of damage caused by vehicle: one in the engine
electrical problems. compartment and one in the
Look at the silver-colored band instrument panel.
inside the fuse. If the band is broken There is a fuse puller located in the
or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure engine compartment fuse block.
to replace a bad fuse with a new See Engine Compartment Fuse
one of the identical size and rating. Block on page 10‑37. It can be used
Replace a bad fuse with a new one to easily remove fuses from the fuse
of the identical size and rating. block. To remove the fuse block cover,
squeeze the clips on the cover
and lift it straight up. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 10‑6.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
10-38 Vehicle Care
J-Case Usage
Fuses
6 Power Seat – Left
Instrument Panel
7
Fuse Block 1
8 Rear Defogger
9 Starter
10 AIR Pump Motor
Instrument Panel
11
Fuse Block 2
12 Sunroof
Antilock Brake
13
System Pump
Engine Compartment Fuse Block Instrument Panel
14
Fuse Block 3
The vehicle may not be equipped J-Case Usage Power Windows
with all of the fuses, relays, and Fuses 15
– Left
features shown.
3 Brake Booster Antilock Brake
J-Case Usage 16
Fuses Power Windows – System Module
4
Right
1 Cool Fan 1
Memory Seat
2 Cool Fan 2 5
Module
Vehicle Care 10-39
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage

Transmission 29 Front Wiper Pre–Catalytic
17 Control Module 43 Converter Oxygen
30 Rear Wiper
Battery Sensor
Air Conditioning
18 Trailer Parking Light 31 Transmission
Compressor 44
Control Module
19 AIR Pump Solenoid
32 Rear Latch
45 Mirror
Engine Control
20 33 Heated Mirrors
Module Battery Chassis Control
46
34 Horn Module Ignition
21 Canister Vent
Right High‐Beam 47 Spare
Trailer Left Side 35
22 Headlamp
(If Equipped) 48 Rear Drive Module
Left High‐Beam
23 Lift Gate Module 36 Lift Gate Module
Headlamp 49
Logic
24 Power Lumbar
37 Ignition Even Coil
Instrument Panel
Trailer Right Side 50
25 38 Ignition Odd Coil Fuse Block Ignition
(If Equipped)
39 Windshield Washer 51 Heated Seat – Front
Rear Accessory
26
Power Outlet 40 Front Fog Lamps Chassis Control
52
Post Catalytic Module
Memory Mirror
27
Module 41 Converter Oxygen Engine Control
53
Sensor Module
Regulated Voltage
28 Control Battery Engine Control 54 Rear Vision Camera
42
Sensor Module
10-40 Vehicle Care
Midi Fuse Usage Micro Usage Instrument Panel Fuse

Electric Power
Relays Block
55
Steering 63 Rear Defogger
64 Wiper Speed
Micro Usage
Relays 65 Fog Lamp
56 AIR Pump Solenoid 66 Engine Control
57 Brake Booster 67 Starter
58 Cooling Fan Low 68 Run/Crank
Headlamp
59 Mini Relays Usage
High Beam
69 Cooling Fan High
60 Cooling Fan Control
70 AIR Pump Motor
Wiper On/Off The instrument panel fuse block is
61
Control located on the passenger side panel
Air Conditioning of the center console. To access the
62 fuses, open the fuse panel door
Compressor
from the passenger side by pulling
it out.
Vehicle Care 10-41
To reinstall the door, insert the tabs Mini Fuses Usage

on the top of the door into the
console first, then push the door Steering Wheel
1
back into its original location. Dimming
The vehicle may not be equipped 2 Spare
with all of the fuses, relays, and 3 Spare
features shown.
Body Control
4
Module 1
5 Infotainment
Body Control
6
Module 7
Noise Control
7
Module
Body Control
8
Module 4
9 Radio
Special Equipment
10
Order Battery
Ultrasonic Rear
11 Parking Assist
Instrument Panel Fuse Block Module
10-42 Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage

Heater, Ventilation Sensing and Sensing and
12 and Air Conditioning 22 Diagnostic Module 35 Diagnostic Module
Battery Ignition Battery
Auxiliary Power 23 Spare Data Link
13 36
Front Connection
24 Spare
Heater, Ventilation Instrument Panel
Transmission Gear 37
14 and Air Conditioning Cluster Battery
25 Shift Position
Ignition
Indicator Passenger Sensing
38
15 Display System Module
26 Spare
Body Control 39 Spare
16 27 Spare
Module 5
28 Spare J‐Case Usage
Auxiliary
17 Fuses
Power Rear Body Control
30
Module 3 29 Front Blower Motor
Instrument Panel
18
Cluster Ignition 31 Amplifier Body Control
40
Personal Device Discrete Logic Module 8
19 32
Interface Module Ignition Switch
Body Control Communications Relays Usage
20 33
Module 6 Integration Module Logistic Relay
41
Special Equipment Body Control (If Equipped)
34
21 Order Retained Module 2 Retained Accessory
Accessory Power 42
Power Relay
Vehicle Care 10-43
Wheels and Tires WARNING (Continued) WARNING (Continued)

Tires . Underinflated tires pose the . Improperly repaired tires can
same danger as overloaded cause a crash. Only the
Every new GM vehicle has tires. The resulting crash dealer or an authorized tire
high-quality tires made by a could cause serious injury. service center should repair,
leading tire manufacturer. Check all tires frequently to replace, dismount, and mount
See the warranty manual for maintain the recommended the tires.
information regarding the tire pressure. Tire pressure . Do not spin the tires in
warranty and where to get should be checked when the excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
service. For additional tires are cold. on slippery surfaces such
information refer to the tire . Overinflated tires are more as snow, mud, ice, etc.
manufacturer. likely to be cut, punctured, Excessive spinning may
or broken by a sudden cause the tires to explode.
{ WARNING impact — such as when
hitting a pothole. Keep tires at
. Poorly maintained and the recommended pressure.
improperly used tires are . Worn or old tires can cause a
dangerous. crash. If the tread is badly
. Overloading the tires can worn, replace them.
cause overheating as a result . Replace any tires that have
of too much flexing. There been damaged by impacts
could be a blowout and a with potholes, curbs, etc.
serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 9‑21. (Continued)
(Continued)
10-44 Vehicle Care
Tire Sidewall Labeling and service description. See the Tire Identification Number (TIN).
“Tire Size” illustration later in this The TIN shows the
Useful information about a tire section for more detail. manufacturer and plant code,
is molded into its sidewall. The tire size, and date the tire was
examples below show a typical (B) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria manufactured. The TIN is
passenger vehicle tire and a molded onto both sides of the
compact spare tire sidewall. Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to tire, although only one side may
GM's specific tire performance have the date of manufacture.
criteria have a TPC specification (E) Tire Ply Material : The type
code molded onto the sidewall. of cord and number of plies in
GM's TPC specifications meet the sidewall and under the tread.
or exceed all federal safety (F) Uniform Tire Quality
guidelines. Grading (UTQG): Tire
(C) DOT (Department of manufacturers are required to
Transportation): The grade tires based on three
Department of Transportation performance factors: treadwear,
(DOT) code indicates that traction, and temperature
Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example the tire is in compliance resistance. For more information
with the U.S. Department of see Uniform Tire Quality
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is Transportation Motor Vehicle Grading on page 10‑59.
a combination of letters and Safety Standards.
numbers used to define a (G) Maximum Cold Inflation
particular tire's width, height, (D) Tire Identification Number Load Limit: Maximum load
aspect ratio, construction type, (TIN): The letters and numbers that can be carried and the
following the DOT (Department maximum pressure needed
of Transportation) code are the to support that load.
Vehicle Care 10-45
regular road tire has lost air and (E) Tire Inflation: The
gone flat. If the vehicle has a temporary use tire or compact
compact spare tire, see spare tire should be inflated to
Compact Spare Tire on 420 kPa (60 psi). For more
page 10‑72 and If a Tire Goes information on tire pressure and
Flat on page 10‑62. inflation see Tire Pressure on
(C) Tire Identification Number page 10‑49.
(TIN): The letters and numbers (F) Tire Size: A combination of
following the DOT (Department letters and numbers define a
of Transportation) code is the tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
Tire Identification Number (TIN). construction type, and service
Compact Spare Tire Example The TIN shows the description. The letter T as the
(A) Tire Ply Material: The type manufacturer and plant code, first character in the tire size
of cord and number of plies in tire size, and date the tire was means the tire is for temporary
the sidewall and under the tread. manufactured. The TIN is use only.
molded onto both sides of the (G) TPC Spec (Tire
(B) Temporary Use Only: The tire, although only one side may
compact spare tire or temporary Performance Criteria
have the date of manufacture. Specification): Original
use tire has a tread life of
approximately 5 000 km (D) Maximum Cold Inflation equipment tires designed to
(3,000 mi) and should not be Load Limit: Maximum load GM's specific tire performance
driven at speeds over 105 km/h that can be carried and the criteria have a TPC specification
(65 mph). The compact spare maximum pressure needed to code molded onto the sidewall.
tire is for emergency use when a support that load. GM's TPC specifications meet or
exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
10-46 Vehicle Care
Tire Designations (C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digit the load carrying capacity a tire
number that indicates the tire is certified to carry. The speed
Tire Size height‐to‐width measurements. rating is the maximum speed a
The following is an example of For example, if the tire size tire is certified to carry a load.
a typical passenger vehicle aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
tire size. item C of the illustration, it would Tire Terminology and
mean that the tire's sidewall is Definitions
60 percent as high as it is wide.
Air Pressure: The amount
(D) Construction Code: A of air inside the tire pressing
letter code is used to indicate outward on each square inch
the type of ply construction in of the tire. Air pressure is
the tire. The letter R means expressed in psi (pounds per
(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire: radial ply construction; the square inch) or kPa (kilopascal).
The United States version of a letter D means diagonal or bias
ply construction; and the letter B Accessory Weight: The
metric tire sizing system. The combined weight of optional
letter P as the first character in means belted‐bias ply
construction. accessories. Some examples
the tire size means a passenger of optional accessories are,
vehicle tire engineered to (E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of automatic transmission, power
standards set by the U.S. Tire the wheel in inches. steering, power brakes, power
and Rim Association. (F) Service Description: These windows, power seats, and air
(B) Tire Width: The three‐digit characters represent the load conditioning.
number indicates the tire section index and speed rating of the Aspect Ratio: The relationship
width in millimeters from tire. The load index represents of a tire's height to its width.
sidewall to sidewall.
Vehicle Care 10-47
Belt: A rubber coated layer of maximum capacity of fuel, oil, GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
cords that is located between and coolant, but without Rating for the rear axle. See
the plies and the tread. Cords passengers and cargo. Vehicle Load Limits on
may be made from steel or other DOT Markings: A code molded page 9‑21.
reinforcing materials. into the sidewall of a tire Intended Outboard Sidewall :
Bead: The tire bead contains signifying that the tire is in The side of an asymmetrical tire,
steel wires wrapped by steel compliance with the U.S. that must always face outward
cords that hold the tire onto Department of Transportation when mounted on a vehicle.
the rim. (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire Standards. The DOT code unit for air pressure.
in which the plies are laid at includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: A
alternate angles less than tire used on light duty trucks and
90 degrees to the centerline of designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer, some multipurpose passenger
the tread. vehicles.
production plant, brand, and
Cold Tire Pressure: The date of production. Load Index: An assigned
amount of air pressure in a tire, number ranging from 1 to 279
measured in kPa (kilopascal) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits that corresponds to the load
or psi (pounds per square inch) carrying capacity of a tire.
before a tire has built up heat on page 9‑21.
from driving. See Tire Pressure GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Inflation Pressure:
on page 10‑49. Rating for the front axle. See The maximum air pressure to
Vehicle Load Limits on which a cold tire can be inflated.
Curb Weight: The weight of a The maximum air pressure is
motor vehicle with standard and page 9‑21.
molded onto the sidewall.
optional equipment including the
10-48 Vehicle Care
Maximum Load Rating: The model name molding that is Sidewall: The portion of a tire
load rating for a tire at the higher or deeper than the same between the tread and the bead.
maximum permissible inflation moldings on the other sidewall Speed Rating: An
pressure for that tire. of the tire. alphanumeric code assigned to
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A a tire indicating the maximum
Weight: The sum of curb tire used on passenger cars and speed at which a tire can
weight, accessory weight, some light duty trucks and operate.
vehicle capacity weight, and multipurpose vehicles. Traction: The friction between
production options weight. Recommended Inflation the tire and the road surface.
Normal Occupant Weight: The Pressure: Vehicle The amount of grip provided.
number of occupants a vehicle manufacturer's recommended Tread: The portion of a tire
is designed to seat multiplied by tire inflation pressure as shown that comes into contact with
68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle on the tire placard. See Tire the road.
Load Limits on page 9‑21. Pressure on page 10‑49 and
Vehicle Load Limits on Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
Occupant Distribution : bands, sometimes called wear
Designated seating positions. page 9‑21.
bars, that show across the
Outward Facing Sidewall: The Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tread of a tire when only 1.6 mm
side of an asymmetrical tire that tire in which the ply cords that (1/16 in) of tread remains. See
has a particular side that faces extend to the beads are laid at When It Is Time for New Tires
outward when mounted on a 90 degrees to the centerline of on page 10‑56.
vehicle. The side of the tire that the tread.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
contains a whitewall, bears Rim: A metal support for a tire Grading Standards): A tire
white lettering, or bears and upon which the tire beads information system that provides
manufacturer, brand, and/or are seated. consumers with ratings for a
Vehicle Care 10-49
tire's traction, temperature, equipment tire size and Overinflated tires, or tires
and treadwear. Ratings are recommended inflation pressure. that have too much air, can
determined by tire See “Tire and Loading result in:
manufacturers using Information Label” under Vehicle . Unusual wear.
government testing procedures. Load Limits on page 9‑21.
The ratings are molded into the . Poor handling.
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Pressure . Rough ride.
Tire Quality Grading on Tires need the correct amount of
page 10‑59.
. Needless damage from
air pressure to operate road hazards.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The effectively.
number of designated seating A vehicle-specific Tire and
Notice: Neither tire Loading Information label is
positions multiplied by underinflation nor
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated attached to the vehicle. This
overinflation is good. label shows the vehicle's original
cargo load. See Vehicle Load Underinflated tires, or tires
Limits on page 9‑21. equipment tires and the correct
that do not have enough air, inflation pressures for the tires
Vehicle Maximum Load on the can result in: when they are cold. The
Tire: Load on an individual tire . Tire overloading and recommended cold tire inflation
due to curb weight, accessory over-heating which could pressure, shown on the label, is
weight, occupant weight, and lead to a blowout. the minimum amount of air
cargo weight. pressure needed to support the
. Premature or vehicle's maximum load carrying
Vehicle Placard: A label irregular wear.
permanently attached to a capacity.
vehicle showing the vehicle . Poor handling. For additional information
capacity weight and the original . Reduced fuel economy. regarding how much weight
the vehicle can carry, and an
10-50 Vehicle Care
example of the Tire and Loading looking at them. Radial tires may Be sure to put the valve caps
Information label, see Vehicle look properly inflated even when back on the valve stems. They
Load Limits on page 9‑21. How they are underinflated. Check help prevent leaks by keeping
you load the vehicle affects the tire's inflation pressure when out dirt and moisture.
vehicle handling and ride the tires are cold. Cold means
comfort. Never load the vehicle the vehicle has been sitting for Tire Pressure Monitor
with more weight than it was at least three hours or driven no System
designed to carry. more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
When to Check Remove the valve cap from the (TPMS) uses radio and sensor
tire valve stem. Press the tire technology to check tire pressure
Check the tires once a month or levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
gauge firmly onto the valve to
more. Do not forget to check the the air pressure in your tires and
get a pressure measurement.
compact spare tire, if the vehicle transmit tire pressure readings to
If the cold tire inflation pressure
has one. The compact spare a receiver located in the vehicle.
matches the recommended
should be at 420 kPa (60 psi). Each tire, including the spare
pressure on the Tire and
For additional information (if provided), should be checked
Loading Information label, no
regarding the compact spare monthly when cold and inflated to
further adjustment is necessary.
tire, see Compact Spare Tire on the inflation pressure recommended
If the inflation pressure is low,
page 10‑72. by the vehicle manufacturer on the
add air until you reach the vehicle placard or tire inflation
How to Check recommended amount. pressure label. (If your vehicle has
Use a good quality pocket-type If you overfill the tire, release air tires of a different size than the size
gauge to check tire pressure. by pushing on the metal stem indicated on the vehicle placard or
You cannot tell if the tires are in the center of the tire valve. tire inflation pressure label, you
Re‐check the tire pressure with should determine the proper tire
properly inflated simply by
inflation pressure for those tires.)
the tire gauge.
Vehicle Care 10-51
As an added safety feature, your Your vehicle has also been Always check the TPMS malfunction
vehicle has been equipped with a equipped with a TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tire pressure monitoring system indicator to indicate when the tires or wheels on your vehicle to
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire system is not operating properly. ensure that the replacement or
pressure telltale when one or more The TPMS malfunction indicator is alternate tires and wheels allow the
of your tires is significantly under‐ combined with the low tire pressure TPMS to continue to function
inflated. telltale. When the system detects a properly.
Accordingly, when the low tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for See Tire Pressure Monitor
pressure telltale illuminates, you approximately one minute and then Operation on page 10‑52 for
should stop and check your tires as remain continuously illuminated. additional information.
soon as possible, and inflate them This sequence will continue upon
to the proper pressure. Driving on a subsequent vehicle start‐ups as Federal Communications
significantly under‐inflated tire long as the malfunction exists. Commission (FCC) and
causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator is Industry Canada
lead to tire failure. Under‐inflation illuminated, the system may not be See Radio Frequency Statement on
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire able to detect or signal low tire page 13‑16 for information
tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS regarding Part 15 of the Federal
vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety Communications Commission (FCC)
ability. of reasons, including the installation rules and Industry Canada
Please note that the TPMS is of replacement or alternate tires or Standards RSS-210/220/310.
not a substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent
maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly.
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under‐inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
10-52 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure Monitor as soon as possible and inflate the A Tire and Loading Information label
tires to the recommended pressure shows the size of the original
Operation shown on the tire loading equipment tires and the correct
This vehicle may have a Tire information label. See Vehicle Load inflation pressure for the tires when
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). Limits on page 9‑21. they are cold. See Vehicle Load
The TPMS is designed to warn the A message to check the pressure in Limits on page 9‑21, for an example
driver when a low tire pressure a specific tire displays in the Driver of the Tire and Loading Information
condition exists. TPMS sensors are Information Center (DIC). The low label and its location. Also see Tire
mounted onto each tire and wheel tire pressure warning light and the Pressure on page 10‑49.
assembly, excluding the spare tire DIC warning message come on at The TPMS can warn about a
and wheel assembly. The TPMS each ignition cycle until the tires are low tire pressure condition but it
sensors monitor the air pressure in inflated to the correct inflation does not replace normal tire
the tires and transmits the tire pressure. Using the DIC, tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection
pressure readings to a receiver pressure levels can be viewed. For on page 10‑55, Tire Rotation on
located in the vehicle. additional information and details page 10‑55 and Tires on
about the DIC operation and page 10‑43.
displays see Driver Information Notice: Tire sealant materials are
Center (DIC) on page 5‑20. not all the same. A non-approved
The low tire pressure warning light tire sealant could damage the
may come on in cool weather when TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor
the vehicle is first started, and then damage caused by using an
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This incorrect tire sealant is not
When a low tire pressure condition could be an early indicator that the covered by the vehicle warranty.
is detected, the TPMS illuminates air pressure is getting low and Always use only the
the low tire pressure warning light needs to be inflated to the proper GM-approved tire sealant
located on the instrument cluster. pressure. available through your dealer or
If the warning light comes on, stop included in the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-53
TPMS Malfunction Light and

. The TPMS sensor matching . Operating electronic devices or
Message process was not done or not being near facilities using radio
completed successfully after wave frequencies similar to the
The TPMS will not function properly rotating the tires. The TPMS could cause the TPMS
if one or more of the TPMS sensors malfunction light and the DIC sensors to malfunction.
are missing or inoperable. When the message should go off after
system detects a malfunction, the If the TPMS is not functioning
successfully completing the properly, it cannot detect or signal a
low tire pressure warning light sensor matching process. See
flashes for about one minute and low tire condition. See your dealer
"TPMS Sensor Matching for service if the TPMS malfunction
then stays on for the remainder of Process" later in this section
the ignition cycle. A DIC warning light and DIC message comes on
message also displays. The low tire
. One or more TPMS sensors are and stays on.
pressure warning light and DIC missing or damaged. The DIC
message and the TPMS TPMS Sensor Matching
warning message come on at each Process
ignition cycle until the problem is malfunction light should go off
corrected. Some of the conditions when the TPMS sensors are Each TPMS sensor has a unique
that can cause these to come installed and the sensor identification code. The identification
on are: matching process is performed code needs to be matched to a new
successfully. See your dealer tire/wheel position after rotating the
. One of the road tires has been for service. tires or replacing one or more of the
replaced with the spare tire. TPMS sensors. The TPMS sensor
The spare tire does not have a
. Replacement tires or wheels do
not match the original equipment matching process should also be
TPMS sensor. The malfunction performed after replacing a spare
light and DIC message should tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
other than those recommended tire with a road tire containing the
go off after the road tire is TPMS sensor. The malfunction
replaced and the sensor could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying light and the DIC message should
matching process is performed go off at the next ignition cycle.
successfully. See "TPMS Sensor New Tires on page 10‑57.
Matching Process" later in this
section.
10-54 Vehicle Care
The sensors are matched to the 4. Press the SET/CLR button to 8. Proceed to the passenger side
tire/wheel positions, using a TPMS begin the sensor matching front tire, and repeat the
relearn tool, in the following order: process. procedure in Step 7.
driver side front tire, passenger side A message requesting 9. Proceed to the passenger side
front tire, passenger side rear tire, acceptance of the process rear tire, and repeat the
and driver side rear. See your should display. procedure in Step 7.
dealer for service or to purchase a
relearn tool. 5. Press the SET/CLR button again 10. Proceed to the driver side rear
to confirm the selection. tire, and repeat the procedure
There are two minutes to match in Step 7. The horn sounds two
the first tire/wheel position, and The horn sounds twice to signal
the receiver is in relearn mode times to indicate the sensor
five minutes overall to match all identification code has been
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes and the TIRE LEARNING
ACTIVE message displays on matched to the driver side rear
longer, the matching process tire, and the TPMS sensor
stops and must be restarted. the DIC screen.
matching process is no longer
The TPMS sensor matching 6. Start with the driver side active. The TIRE LEARNING
process is: front tire. ACTIVE message on the DIC
1. Set the parking brake. 7. Place the relearn tool against display screen goes off.
the tire sidewall, near the valve 11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with stem. Then press the button to
the engine off. activate the TPMS sensor. 12. Set all four tires to the
3. Use the MENU button to select A horn chirp confirms that the recommended air pressure
the Vehicle Information Menu in sensor identification code has level as indicated on the Tire
the Driver Information Center been matched to this tire and and Loading Information label.
(DIC). Use the arrow keys to wheel position.
scroll to the Tire Pressure
screen.
Vehicle Care 10-55
Tire Inspection
. The tire has a puncture, cut, See When It Is Time for New
or other damage that cannot Tires on page 10‑56 and Wheel
GM recommends that the tires, be repaired well because of Replacement on page 10‑61.
including the spare tire, if the the size or location of the
vehicle has one, be inspected damage.
for signs of wear or damage at
least once a month. Tire Rotation
Replace the tire if: Tires should be rotated every
. The indicators at three or 12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
more places around the tire Scheduled Maintenance on
can be seen. page 11‑2.
. There is cord or fabric The purpose of a regular tire
showing through the tire's rotation is to achieve a uniform
rubber. wear for all tires on the vehicle.
This will ensure that the vehicle
. The tread or sidewall is continues to perform most like it When rotating the vehicle's tires,
cracked, cut, or snagged did when the tires were new. always use the correct rotation
deep enough to show cord pattern shown here.
or fabric. Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate the tires as soon Do not include the compact
. The tire has a bump, bulge, as possible and check wheel spare tire in the tire rotation.
or split. alignment. Also check for
damaged tires or wheels.
10-56 Vehicle Care
After the tires have been

WARNING (Continued)
When It Is Time for New
rotated, adjust the front and rear Tires
inflation pressures as shown on When changing a wheel, remove
the Tire and Loading Information Factors such as maintenance,
any rust or dirt from places where temperatures, driving speeds,
label. See Tire Pressure on the wheel attaches to the vehicle. vehicle loading, and road conditions
page 10‑49 and Vehicle Load In an emergency, use a cloth or a affect the wear rate of the tires.
Limits on page 9‑21. paper towel to do this; but be sure
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor to use a scraper or wire brush
System. See Tire Pressure later, if needed, to get all the rust
Monitor Operation on or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 10‑62.
page 10‑52.
Make certain that all wheel nuts
Lightly coat the center of the
are properly tightened. See
wheel hub with wheel bearing
“Wheel Nut Torque” under
grease after a wheel change or
tire rotation to prevent corrosion
page 12‑2.
or rust build-up. Do not get
grease on the flat wheel
{ WARNING mounting surface or on the Treadwear indicators are one way
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the wheel nuts or bolts. to tell when it is time for new tires.
parts to which it is fastened, can Treadwear indicators appear when
make wheel nuts become loose the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
after time. The wheel could or less of tread remaining. See Tire
come off and cause an accident. Inspection on page 10‑55 and Tire
(Continued) Rotation on page 10‑55 for more
information.
Vehicle Care 10-57
The rubber in tires ages over time. Parking for an extended period can GM's exclusive TPC Spec
This also applies for the spare tire, cause flat spots on the tires that system considers over a dozen
if the vehicle has one, even if it is may result in vibrations while critical specifications that impact
never used. Multiple conditions driving. When storing a vehicle for the overall performance of the
including temperatures, loading at least a month, remove the tires
vehicle, including brake system
conditions, and inflation pressure or raise the vehicle to reduce the
maintenance affect how fast aging weight from the tires. performance, ride and handling,
takes place. Tires will typically need traction control, and tire
to be replaced due to wear before Buying New Tires pressure monitoring
they may need to be replaced performance. GM's TPC Spec
due to age. Consult the tire GM has developed and matched number is molded onto the tire's
manufacturer for more information specific tires for the vehicle. The sidewall near the tire size. If the
on when tires should be replaced. original equipment tires installed tires have an all‐season tread
on the vehicle, when it was new, design, the TPC Spec number
Vehicle Storage were designed to meet General will be followed by an MS for
Tires age when stored normally Motors Tire Performance Criteria mud and snow. See Tire
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park Specification (TPC Spec) Sidewall Labeling on page 10‑44
a vehicle that will be stored for at system rating. If you need
least a month in a cool, dry, clean for additional information.
replacement tires, GM strongly
area away from direct sunlight to GM recommends replacing tires
slow aging. This area should be
recommends that you get tires
with the same TPC Spec rating. in sets of four. This is because
free of grease, gasoline, or other uniform tread depth on all tires
substances that can deteriorate This way, the vehicle will
continue to have tires that are will help keep the vehicle
rubber.
designed to give the same performing most like it did when
performance and vehicle safety, the tires were new. Replacing
during normal use, as the less than a full set of tires can
original tires. affect the braking and handling
performance of the vehicle.
10-58 Vehicle Care
See Tire Inspection on If you must replace the vehicle's

page 10‑55 and Tire Rotation on WARNING (Continued) tires with those that do not have
page 10‑55 for information on a crash. Using tires of different a TPC Spec number, make sure
proper tire rotation. sizes, brands, or types may they are the same size, load
also cause damage to the range, speed rating, and
{ WARNING vehicle. Be sure to use the construction type (radial and
correct size, brand, and type bias‐belted tires) as the vehicle's
Tires could explode during original tires.
improper service. Attempting to of tires on all wheels. It is all
mount or dismount a tire could right to drive with the compact Vehicles that have a tire
cause injury or death. Only your spare temporarily, as it was pressure monitoring system
dealer or authorized tire service developed for use on the could give an inaccurate
center should mount or dismount vehicle. See Compact Spare low‐pressure warning if non‐TPC
the tires. Tire on page 10‑72. Spec rated tires are installed on
the vehicle. Non‐TPC Spec
rated tires may give a low‐
{ WARNING pressure warning that is higher
{ WARNING or lower than the proper warning
Mixing tires could cause you Using bias-ply tires on the level you would get with TPC
to lose control while driving. vehicle may cause the wheel Spec rated tires. See Tire
If you mix tires of different rim flanges to develop cracks Pressure Monitor System on
sizes, brands, or types (radial after many miles of driving. page 10‑50.
and bias-belted tires), the A tire and/or wheel could fail
vehicle may not handle suddenly and cause a crash.
properly, and you could have Use only radial-ply tires with
(Continued) the wheels on the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-59
The vehicle's original equipment Uniform Tire Quality

tires are listed on the Tire and { WARNING Grading
Loading Information label. See If different sized wheels are used,
Vehicle Load Limits on Quality grades can be found
there may not be an acceptable
page 9‑21 for more information level of performance and safety if
where applicable on the tire
about the Tire and Loading tires not recommended for those sidewall between tread shoulder
Information label and its location wheels are selected. This and maximum section width.
on the vehicle. increases the chance of a crash For example:
and serious injury. Only use GM Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Different Size Tires and specific wheel and tire systems Temperature A
Wheels developed for the vehicle, and
have them properly installed by a The following information relates
If wheels or tires are installed that GM certified technician. to the system developed by the
are a different size than the original United States National Highway
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle Traffic Safety Administration
performance, including its braking, See Buying New Tires on
page 10‑57 and Accessories and (NHTSA), which grades tires
ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover Modifications on page 10‑3 for by treadwear, traction, and
may be affected. If the vehicle has additional information. temperature performance. This
electronic systems such as antilock applies only to vehicles sold in
brakes, rollover airbags, traction the United States. The grades
control, and electronic stability are molded on the sidewalls of
control, the performance of these most passenger car tires. The
systems can also be affected. Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG) system does not apply
to deep tread, winter-type snow
10-60 Vehicle Care
tires, space-saver, or temporary specified government test Warning: The traction grade
use spare tires, tires with course. For example, a tire assigned to this tire is based on
nominal rim diameters of graded 150 would wear one and straight-ahead braking traction
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), a half (1½) times as well on the tests, and does not include
or to some limited-production government course as a tire acceleration, cornering,
tires. graded 100. The relative hydroplaning, or peak traction
While the tires available on performance of tires depends characteristics.
General Motors passenger cars upon the actual conditions of
Temperature – A, B, C
and light trucks may vary with their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the The temperature grades are
respect to these grades, they
norm due to variations in driving A (the highest), B, and C,
must also conform to federal
habits, service practices and representing the tire's resistance
safety requirements and
differences in road to the generation of heat and its
additional General Motors Tire
characteristics and climate. ability to dissipate heat when
Performance Criteria (TPC)
tested under controlled
standards. Traction – AA, A, B, C conditions on a specified indoor
All Passenger Car Tires Must The traction grades, from laboratory test wheel. Sustained
Conform to Federal Safety highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the
Requirements In Addition To and C. Those grades represent material of the tire to degenerate
These Grades. the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and
Treadwear pavement as measured under excessive temperature can
controlled conditions on lead to sudden tire failure. The
The treadwear grade is a specified government test grade C corresponds to a level
comparative rating based on the surfaces of asphalt and of performance which all
wear rate of the tire when tested concrete. A tire marked C may passenger car tires must meet
under controlled conditions on a have poor traction performance. under the Federal Motor Safety
Vehicle Care 10-61
Standard No. 109. Grades B and wear or if the vehicle is pulling to Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel
A represent higher levels of one side or the other. If the vehicle nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
performance on the laboratory vibrates when driving on a smooth System (TPMS) sensors with new
test wheel than the minimum road, the tires and wheels might GM original equipment parts.
need to be rebalanced. See your
required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire is
dealer for proper diagnosis. { WARNING
established for a tire that is Wheel Replacement Using the wrong replacement
properly inflated and not wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
overloaded. Excessive speed, Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or nuts can be dangerous. It could
underinflation, or excessive affect the braking and handling of
loading, either separately or in corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
combination, can cause heat wheel nuts should be replaced. and cause loss of control, causing
buildup and possible tire failure. If the wheel leaks air, replace it. a crash. Always use the correct
Some aluminum wheels can be wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
Wheel Alignment and Tire repaired. See your dealer if any of nuts for replacement.
Balance these conditions exist.
The tires and wheels were aligned Your dealer will know the kind of Notice: The wrong wheel can
and balanced at the factory to wheel that is needed. also cause problems with bearing
provide the longest tire life and best life, brake cooling, speedometer
Each new wheel should have the
overall performance. Adjustments to or odometer calibration,
same load-carrying capacity,
wheel alignment and tire balancing headlamp aim, bumper height,
diameter, width, offset, and be
will not be necessary on a regular vehicle ground clearance, and tire
mounted the same way as the
basis. However, check the or tire chain clearance to the
one it replaces.
alignment if there is unusual tire body and chassis.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
10-62 Vehicle Care
Used Replacement Wheels

WARNING (Continued)
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout
{ WARNING The area damaged by the tire while you are driving, especially if
chains could cause you to lose you maintain the vehicle's tires
Replacing a wheel with a used
control of the vehicle and you or properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is
one is dangerous. How it has
others may be injured in a crash. much more likely to leak out slowly.
been used or how far it has been But if you should ever have a
driven may be unknown. It could A Type S low-profile cable can blowout, here are a few tips about
fail suddenly and cause a crash. be used only if the cable what to expect and what to do:
When replacing wheels, use a manufacturer recommends it for
new GM original equipment If a front tire fails, the flat tire
use on the vehicle, the tire size
wheel. creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
combination, and road conditions. toward that side. Take your foot off
Follow the manufacturer's the accelerator pedal and grip the
Tire Chains instructions. To help avoid steering wheel firmly. Steer to
damage to the vehicle, drive maintain lane position, and then
slowly, readjust or remove the gently brake to a stop, well off the
{ WARNING cable if it is contacting the vehicle road, if possible.
Do not use tire chains. There is and do not spin the vehicle's tires.
A rear blowout, particularly on a
not enough clearance. Tire chains Install the cables on the front tires
curve, acts much like a skid and
used on a vehicle without the only. Cables should not be may require the same correction
proper amount of clearance can installed on the spare tire or on you would use in a skid. In any rear
cause damage to the brakes, the optional 19-inch tire. blowout remove your foot from the
suspension or other vehicle parts. accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle
(Continued) under control by steering the
way you want the vehicle to go.
Vehicle Care 10-63
It may be very bumpy and noisy, but

you can still steer. Gently brake to a { WARNING { WARNING
stop, well off the road, if possible.
Lifting a vehicle and getting under Changing a tire can be
it to do maintenance or repairs is dangerous. The vehicle can slip
{ WARNING dangerous without the off the jack and roll over or fall
Driving on a flat tire will cause appropriate safety equipment and causing injury or death. Find a
permanent damage to the tire. training. If a jack is provided with level place to change the tire.
Re-inflating a tire after it has the vehicle, it is designed only for To help prevent the vehicle from
been driven on while severely changing a flat tire. If it is used for moving:
underinflated or flat may cause a anything else, you or others could 1. Set the parking brake firmly.
blowout and a serious crash. be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack 2. Put an automatic
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire transmission shift lever in
that has been driven on while is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire. P (Park), or shift a manual
severely underinflated or flat. transmission to 1 (First) or
Have your dealer or an authorized R (Reverse).
tire service center repair or If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
replace the flat tire as soon as 3. Turn off the engine and do
and wheel damage by driving slowly
not restart while the vehicle
possible. to a level place, well off the road,
is raised.
if possible. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard 4. Do not allow passengers to
Warning Flashers on page 6‑3. remain in the vehicle.
5. Place wheel blocks on both
sides of the tire at the
opposite corner of the tire
being changed.
10-64 Vehicle Care
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B), Tire Changing

use the following example as a
guide to assist in the placement of Removing the Spare Tire and
wheel blocks (A). Tools
To access the spare tire and tools:
1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate
(Manual) on page 2‑8 or Liftgate
(Power) on page 2‑8.
2. Lift the load floor up.
4. Turn the retainer nut

A. Wheel Block counterclockwise and remove
the spare tire.
B. Flat Tire
5. Place the spare tire next to the
The following information explains tire being changed.
how to repair or change a tire.
3. Remove the extension (A),

wheel wrench (B) and jack (C).
Place the tools next to the tire
being changed.
Vehicle Care 10-65
Removing the Flat Tire and Notice: Make sure that the jack
Installing the Spare Tire lift head is in the correct position
or you may damage your vehicle.
1. Do a safety check before The repairs would not be covered
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes by your warranty.
Flat on page 10‑62 for more
information.
2. For vehicles with wheel nut
caps, turn the wheel wrench
counterclockwise to loosen and
remove them.
Do not try to remove plastic caps
from the cover or center cap. 4. Turn the wheel wrench
3. For vehicles with a wheel cover counterclockwise to loosen all
or center cap, pull the cover or the wheel nuts, but do not
center cap away from the wheel remove them yet.
to remove it. Store the wheel 5. Place the jack near the flat tire.
cover in the cargo area until you Front
have the flat tire repaired or
replaced.
10-66 Vehicle Care
{ WARNING
Getting under a vehicle when it is
jacked up is dangerous. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed.
Never get under a vehicle when
it is supported only by a jack.
Rear
{ WARNING
Place the jack notch (A) under
6. Position the jack lift head at the the frame rail seam (B). Raising the vehicle with the jack
jack location nearest the flat tire. improperly positioned can
7. Put the compact spare tire
The location is indicated by a damage the vehicle and even
near you.
mark on the bottom edge of the make the vehicle fall. To help
front and rear door plastic avoid personal injury and vehicle
molding. The jack must not be damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
used in any other position. head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-67
{ WARNING
Lifting a vehicle and getting
under it to do maintenance or
repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
8. Fit the jack handle extension 9. Insert the other end of the jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
onto the jack by sliding the hook handle into the wrench.
use it for changing a flat tire. through the end of the jack.
10. Place the jack under the

vehicle.
10-68 Vehicle Care
{ WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure
11. Raise the vehicle by turning the 12. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
to use a scraper or wire brush
jack handle clockwise. Raise 13. Remove the flat tire.
the vehicle far enough off the later, if needed, to get all the rust
ground so there is enough or dirt off. See If a Tire Goes Flat
room for the road tire to clear on page 10‑62.
the ground.
Vehicle Care 10-69
16. Reinstall the wheel nuts. Notice: Improperly tightened

Tighten each nut by hand until wheel nuts can lead to brake
the wheel is held against pulsation and rotor damage. To
the hub. avoid expensive brake repairs,
17. Lower the vehicle by turning evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the jack handle the proper sequence and to the
counterclockwise. proper torque specification. See
page 12‑2 for the wheel nut
{ WARNING torque specification.
Wheel nuts that are improperly or
incorrectly tightened can cause
14. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheels to become loose or
the wheel bolts, mounting come off. The wheel nuts should
surfaces, and spare wheel. be tightened with a torque wrench
15. Place the compact spare tire to the proper torque specification
on the wheel-mounting surface. after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the
{ WARNING aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel
Never use oil or grease on bolts nuts. See Capacities and
or nuts because the nuts might Specifications on page 12‑2 for
come loose. The vehicle's wheel original equipment wheel nut
18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in
could fall off, causing a crash. torque specifications. a crisscross sequence, as
shown.
10-70 Vehicle Care
19. Lower the jack all the way and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire To store the flat tire:
remove the jack from under the and Tools
vehicle.
20. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly { WARNING
with the wheel wrench.
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
When reinstalling the wheel cover
equipment in the passenger
or center cap on the full-size tire,
compartment of the vehicle could
tighten all five plastic caps hand
snug with the aid of the wheel cause injury. In a sudden stop or
wrench and tighten them with collision, loose equipment could
the wheel wrench an additional strike someone. Store all these in
one‐quarter of a turn. the proper place.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit
on the vehicle's compact spare. 1. Remove the cable package. The
If you try to put a wheel cover on cable is stored in a plastic bag
the compact spare, the cover or under the compact spare tire.
the spare could be damaged.
2. Remove the small center cap by
tapping the back of the cap with
the extension of the shaft, if the
vehicle has aluminum wheels.
3. Put the flat tire in the rear
storage area with the valve stem
pointing toward the rear of the
vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-71
4. Pull the cable (A) through the 5. Hook the cable onto the outside 8. Make sure the metal tube is
door striker (D) then the center portion of the liftgate hinges (B). centered at the striker. Push the
of the wheel (C). 6. Hook the other end of the cable tube toward the front of the
onto the outside portion of the vehicle.
liftgate hinge on the other side of 9. Close the liftgate and make sure
the vehicle. it is latched properly.
7. Pull on the cable to make sure it The compact spare is for temporary
is secure. use only. Replace the compact
spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as you can.
10-72 Vehicle Care
Compact Spare Tire tire repaired or replaced at your Jump Starting

convenience. Of course, it is best to
replace the spare with a full-size tire For more information about the
{ WARNING as soon as possible. The spare tire vehicle battery, see Battery on
will last longer and be in good page 10‑27.
Driving with more than one
shape in case it is needed again. Jump starting can be used on
compact spare tire at a time could
result in loss of braking and Notice: When the compact spare vehicles with run‐down batteries by
handling. This could lead to a is installed, do not take the using jumper cables and another
crash and you or others could be vehicle through an automatic vehicle.
injured. Use only one compact car wash with guide rails. The
spare tire at a time. compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the
{ WARNING
tire, wheel and other parts of the Batteries can hurt you. They can
If this vehicle has a compact spare vehicle. be dangerous because:
tire, it was fully inflated when the
vehicle was new; however, it can Do not use the compact spare on . They contain acid that can
lose air after a time. Check the other vehicles. burn you.
inflation pressure regularly. It should Do not mix the compact spare tire . They contain gas that can
be 420 kPa (60 psi). or wheel with other wheels or tires. explode or ignite.
After installing the compact spare They will not fit. Keep the spare tire . They contain enough
on the vehicle, stop as soon as and its wheel together.
electricity to burn you.
possible and make sure the spare Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare. Using them can If you do not follow these steps
compact spare is made to perform damage the vehicle and can exactly, some or all of these
well at speeds up to 105 km/h damage the chains too. Do not things can hurt you.
(65 mph) for distances up to use tire chains on the compact
5 000 km (3,000 mi), so you can spare.
finish your trip and have the full-size
Vehicle Care 10-73
Be sure to use the following steps to 1. The vehicle used to jump start
{ WARNING do it safely. Ignoring these steps must have 12-volt battery with a
could result in costly damage to the negative ground.
Using an open flame near a vehicle that would not be covered
battery can cause battery gas to Notice: Only use a vehicle that
by the warranty. has a 12-volt system with a
explode. People have been hurt
doing this, and some have been Trying to start the vehicle by negative ground for jump
blinded. Use a flashlight if you pushing or pulling it will not work, starting. If the other vehicle does
need more light. and it could damage the vehicle. not have a 12-volt system with a
Notice: If the radio or other negative ground, both vehicles
Be sure the battery has enough can be damaged.
accessories are left on during the
water. You do not need to add
jump starting procedure, they 2. The vehicles should be close
water to the battery installed in could be damaged. The repairs enough for the jumper cables to
your new vehicle. But if a battery would not be covered by the reach, but the vehicles should
has filler caps, be sure the right warranty. Always turn off the not be touching. Touching could
amount of fluid is there. If it is low, radio and other accessories when cause grounding and possible
add water to take care of that jump starting the vehicle. electrical system damage.
first. If you do not, explosive gas
could be present. Notice: If the jumper cables are Put both vehicles in P (Park) and
connected or removed in the set the parking brake firmly.
Battery fluid contains acid that wrong order, electrical shorting 3. Unplug accessories plugged into
can burn you. Do not get it on may occur and damage the the cigarette lighter or the
you. If you accidentally get it in vehicle. The repairs would not be accessory power outlet. Turn off
your eyes or on your skin, flush covered by the vehicle warranty. the radio and all lamps that are
the place with water and get Always connect and remove the not needed. Turn off the ignition
medical help immediately. jumper cables in the correct on both vehicles.
order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or
other metal.
10-74 Vehicle Care
4. Locate the positive (+) and 5. The remote positive (+) 8. Do not let the other end touch
negative (−) terminals on both terminal (A) is located on the metal. Connect it to the
vehicles. Some vehicles have underhood fuse block, on the positive (+) terminal of the
remote jump starting terminals. driver side. Lift the red cap to good battery. Use a remote
uncover the terminal. positive (+) terminal if the
The remote negative (−) vehicle has one.
terminal (B) is a stud behind the 9. Connect the black negative (−)
metal tab stamped with GND (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal
near the driver side strut tower. of the good battery. Use a
6. The jumper cables should be in remote negative (−) terminal if
good working condition with no the vehicle has one.
loose or missing insulation. The Do not let the other end touch
vehicles could be damaged if anything until the next step. The
they are not. other end of the negative (−)
7. Connect the red positive (+) cable does not go to the dead
cable to the positive (+) terminal battery. It goes to a heavy,
on the vehicle with the dead unpainted metal engine part or
{ WARNING battery. Use a remote to a remote negative (−) terminal
on the vehicle with the dead
positive (+) terminal if the
An electric fan can start up even vehicle has one. battery.
when the engine is not running 10. Connect the other end of the
and can injure you. Keep hands, negative (−) cable away from
clothing and tools away from any the dead battery, but not near
underhood electric fan. engine parts that move.
Vehicle Care 10-75
11. Start the vehicle with the good To disconnect the jumper cables
battery and run the engine. from both vehicles,
12. Press the unlock symbol on 1. Disconnect the black
the remote keyless entry negative (−) cable from the
transmitter to disarm the vehicle that had the dead
security system, if equipped. battery.
13. Try to start the vehicle that had 2. Disconnect the black
the dead battery. If it will not negative (−) cable from the
start after a few tries, it needs vehicle with the good battery.
service. 3. Disconnect the red positive (+)
Notice: If the jumper cables are cable from the vehicle with the
connected or removed in the Jumper Cable Removal good battery.
wrong order, electrical shorting 4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
may occur and damage the cable from the other vehicle.
Part or Remote Negative (−)
vehicle. The repairs would not be
Terminal 5. Return the underhood fuse block
Always connect and remove the B. Good Battery or Remote cover to its original position,
jumper cables in the correct Positive (+) and Remote if applicable.
order, making sure that the Negative (−) Terminals
cables do not touch each other C. Dead Battery or Remote
or other metal. Positive (+) Terminal
10-76 Vehicle Care

. Is the proper towing equipment
Towing Recreational Vehicle going to be used? See your
Towing dealer or trailering professional
Towing the Vehicle Recreational vehicle towing means for additional advice and
Notice: To avoid damage, the towing the vehicle behind another equipment recommendations.
disabled vehicle should be towed vehicle – such as behind a motor . Is the vehicle ready to be
with all four wheels off the home. The two most common types towed? Just as preparing the
ground. Care must be taken with of recreational vehicle towing are vehicle for a long trip, make sure
vehicles that have low ground known as dinghy towing and dolly the vehicle is prepared to be
clearance and/or special towing. Dinghy towing is towing the towed.
equipment. Always flatbed on a vehicle with all four wheels on the
car carrier. ground. Dolly towing is towing the Dinghy Towing
vehicle with two wheels on the Front-wheel‐drive and
Consult your dealer or a
ground and two wheels up on a all-wheel-drive vehicles may be
professional towing service if the
device known as a dolly. dinghy towed from the front. These
disabled vehicle must be towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program Here are some important things to vehicles can also be towed by
on page 13‑6. consider before recreational vehicle placing them on a platform trailer
towing: with all four wheels off of the
To tow the vehicle behind another ground. For other towing options,
vehicle for recreational purposes, . What is the towing capacity of see “Dolly Towing” following in this
such as behind a motor home, see the towing vehicle? Be sure to section.
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in this read the tow vehicle
section. manufacturer's For vehicles being dinghy towed,
recommendations. the vehicle should be run at the
.
beginning of each day and at each
What is the distance that will be RV fuel stop for about five minutes.
travelled? Some vehicles have This will ensure proper lubrication of
restrictions on how far and how transmission components.
long they can tow.
Vehicle Care 10-77
6. To prevent the battery from Once the destination has been

draining while the vehicle is reached:
being towed, remove fuse 32, 1. Set the parking brake.
the Discrete Logic Ignition
Switch fuse, from the instrument 2. Shift the transmission to
panel fuse block and store it in a P (Park).
safe location. See Instrument 3. Turn the ignition key to
Panel Fuse Block on LOCK/OFF.
page 10‑40.
4. Install fuse 32, the Discrete
Notice: If the vehicle is towed Logic Ignition Switch fuse. See
without performing each of the Instrument Panel Fuse Block on
steps listed under “Dinghy page 10‑40.
To tow the vehicle from the front Towing,” the automatic
transmission could be damaged. 5. Start the engine and let it idle for
with all four wheels on the ground:
Be sure to follow all steps of the more than three minutes before
1. Position the vehicle that will be dinghy towing procedure prior to driving the vehicle.
towed and secure it to the and after towing the vehicle. Notice: Too much or too
towing vehicle.
Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is little fluid can damage the
2. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN. exceeded while towing the transmission. Be sure that the
3. Shift the transmission to vehicle, it could be damaged. transmission fluid is at the
N (Neutral). Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph) proper level before towing with
while towing the vehicle. all four wheels on the ground.
4. Turn the ignition key to
ACC/ACCESSORY.
5. Turn all accessories off.
10-78 Vehicle Care
Notice: Do not tow a vehicle with Dolly Towing (Front-Wheel‐ Towing the Vehicle From
the front drive wheels on the Drive Vehicles) the Rear
ground if one of the front tires is
a compact spare tire. Towing with
two different tire sizes on the
front of the vehicle can cause
severe damage to the
transmission.
Dolly Towing (All-Wheel‐Drive
Vehicles)
All-wheel‐drive vehicles should not
be towed with two wheels on the
ground. To properly tow these
vehicles, they should be placed on
a platform trailer with all four wheels To tow the vehicle from the front
off of the ground or dinghy towed with the rear wheels on the ground,
from the front. do the following:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
5. Follow the dolly manufacturer's
instructions for preparing the
vehicle and dolly for towing.
6. Release the parking brake.
Vehicle Care 10-79
Appearance Care Notice: Machine compounding

or aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
Exterior Care may damage it. Use only
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/ non-abrasive waxes and polishes
that are made for a basecoat/
Lenses
clearcoat paint finish on the
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a vehicle.
soft cloth, and a car washing soap
Foreign materials such as calcium
to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
chloride and other salts, ice melting
Follow instructions under “Washing
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
the Vehicle” later in this section.
bird droppings, chemicals from
Notice: Towing the vehicle from Finish Care industrial chimneys, etc., can
the rear could damage it. Also, damage the vehicle's finish if they
repairs would not be covered by Occasional waxing or mild polishing remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle warranty. Never have of the vehicle by hand may be the vehicle as soon as possible.
the vehicle towed from the rear. necessary to remove residue from If necessary, use non-abrasive
the paint finish. Approved cleaning cleaners that are marked safe for
products can be obtained from your painted surfaces to remove foreign
dealer. matter.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/ Exterior painted surfaces are
clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat subject to aging, weather, and
gives more depth and gloss to the chemical fallout that can take their
colored basecoat. Always use toll over a period of years. To keep
waxes and polishes that are the paint finish looking new, keep
non-abrasive and made for a the vehicle garaged or covered
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. whenever possible.
10-80 Vehicle Care
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Approved cleaning products can High pressure car washes could
Parts be obtained from your dealer. cause water to enter the vehicle.
Bright metal parts should be Follow all manufacturer Avoid using high pressure washes
cleaned regularly to keep their directions regarding correct closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the
luster. Wash with water or use product usage, necessary safety surface of the vehicle. Use of power
chrome polish on chrome or precautions, and appropriate washers exceeding 8,274 kPa
stainless steel trim, if necessary. disposal of any vehicle care (1,200 psi) can result in damage
product. Certain cleaners contain or removal of paint and decals.
Use special care with aluminum chemicals that can damage the
trim. To avoid damaging protective Notice: Conveyor systems on
emblems or nameplates on the some automatic car washes could
trim, never use auto or chrome vehicle. Check the cleaning
polish, steam, or caustic soap to damage the vehicle. There may
product label. If it states that it not be enough clearance for the
clean aluminum. A coating of should not be used on plastic
wax, rubbed to high polish, is undercarriage. Check with the car
parts, do not use it on the vehicle wash manager before using the
recommended for all bright metal or damage may occur and it
parts. automatic car wash.
would not be covered by the
warranty. Weatherstrips
Washing the Vehicle
Rinse the vehicle well, before Silicone grease on weatherstrips will
To preserve the vehicle's finish,
washing and after, to remove all make them last longer, seal better,
keep it clean by washing it often.
cleaning agents completely. If they and not stick or squeak. Apply
Do not wash the vehicle in direct are allowed to dry on the surface, silicone grease with a clean cloth.
sunlight and use a car they could stain. During very cold, damp weather
washing soap. frequent application may be
Dry the finish with a soft, clean
Notice: Do not use cleaning chamois or an all-cotton towel to required. See Recommended Fluids
agents that are petroleum based avoid surface scratches and water and Lubricants on page 11‑6.
or that contain acid or abrasives, spotting.
as they can damage the paint,
metal, or plastic on the vehicle.
Vehicle Care 10-81
Wheels and Trim — Aluminum The repairs would not be covered Windshield and Wiper Blades
or Chrome by the vehicle warranty. Use only
Clean the outside of the windshield
approved cleaners on aluminum
The vehicle may have either with glass cleaner.
or chrome-plated wheels.
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Clean the rubber blades using a
Notice: Never drive a vehicle that
Keep the wheels clean using a soft, lint‐free cloth or paper towel soaked
has aluminum or chrome-plated
clean cloth with mild soap and with windshield washer fluid or a
wheels through an automatic car
water. Rinse with clean water. After mild detergent. Wash the windshield
wash that uses silicone carbide
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft, thoroughly when cleaning the
tire cleaning brushes, as this
clean towel. A wax may then be blades. Bugs, road grime, sap,
could cause damage. The repairs
applied. and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
would not be covered by the
treatments may cause wiper
Notice: Chrome wheels and other vehicle warranty.
streaking. Replace the wiper blades
chrome trim may be damaged if Notice: Driving the vehicle if they are worn or damaged.
the vehicle is not washed after through an automatic car wash
driving on roads that have been Wipers can be damaged by:
that has silicone carbide tire
sprayed with magnesium, calcium cleaning brushes, could damage . Extreme dusty conditions
or sodium chloride. These the aluminum or chrome-plated
chlorides are used on roads for
. Sand and salt
wheels. The repairs would not be
conditions such as ice and dust. covered by the vehicle warranty. . Heat and sun
Always wash the chrome with Never drive a vehicle that has .
soap and water after exposure. Snow and ice, without proper
aluminum or chrome-plated removal
Notice: Do not use strong soaps, wheels through an automatic car
chemicals, abrasive polishes, wash that uses silicone carbide
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners tire cleaning brushes.
that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, because
the surface could be damaged.
10-82 Vehicle Care
Tires Finish Damage Dirt packed in close areas of the

frame should be loosened before
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to Any stone chips, fractures, or deep
being flushed. Your dealer or an
clean the tires. scratches in the finish should be
underbody car washing system
Notice: Using petroleum-based repaired right away. Bare metal will
can do this.
tire dressing products on the corrode quickly and may develop
vehicle may damage the paint into major repair expense. Chemical Paint Spotting
finish and/or tires. When applying Minor chips and scratches can be Some weather and atmospheric
a tire dressing, always wipe off repaired with touch-up materials conditions can create a chemical
any overspray from all painted available from your dealer. Larger fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall
surfaces on the vehicle. areas of finish damage can be upon and attack painted surfaces on
corrected in your dealer's body and the vehicle. This damage can take
Sheet Metal Damage paint shop. two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped
If the vehicle is damaged and discolorations, and small, irregular
requires sheet metal repair or
Underbody Maintenance
dark spots etched into the paint
replacement, make sure the body Chemicals used for ice and snow surface.
repair shop applies anti-corrosion removal and dust control can collect
material to parts repaired or on the underbody. If these are not Interior Care
replaced to restore corrosion removed, corrosion and rust can
protection. develop on the underbody parts The interior will continue to look
such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan, its best if it is cleaned often. Dust
Original manufacturer replacement and dirt can accumulate on the
parts will provide the corrosion and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection. upholstery and cause damage to
protection while maintaining the the carpet, fabric, leather, and
vehicle warranty. At least every spring, flush these plastic surfaces. Stains should be
materials from the underbody removed quickly as extreme heat
with plain water. Clean any areas could cause them to set rapidly.
where mud and debris can collect.
Vehicle Care 10-83
Lighter colored interiors may Notice: Using abrasive cleaners

. Never apply heavy pressure or
require more frequent cleaning. when cleaning glass surfaces on rub aggressively with a cleaning
Newspapers and garments that can the vehicle, could scratch the cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
transfer color to home furnishings glass and/or cause damage damage the interior and does
can also transfer color to the to the rear window defogger. not improve the effectiveness of
interior. When cleaning the glass on the soil removal.
Remove dust from small buttons vehicle, use only a soft cloth and . Avoid laundry detergents or
and knobs with a small brush with glass cleaner. dishwashing soaps with
soft bristles. Cleaners can contain solvents that degreasers. Using too much
can become concentrated in the soap will leave a residue that
Your dealer has products for leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
cleaning the interior. When cleaning interior. Before using cleaners, read
and adhere to all safety instructions For liquid cleaners, about
the interior, only use cleaners 20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of
specifically designed for the on the label. While cleaning the
interior, maintain adequate water is a good guide. Use only
surfaces that are being cleaned. mild, neutral-pH soaps.
Permanent damage can result from ventilation by opening the doors
using cleaners on surfaces for and windows. . Do not heavily saturate the
which they were not intended. Apply Do not clean the interior using the upholstery while cleaning.
the cleaner directly to the cleaning following cleaners or techniques: . Cleaners that contain solvents
cloth to prevent over-spray. Remove . Never use a knife or any other can damage the interior.
any accidental over-spray from sharp object to remove a soil
other surfaces immediately. Fabric/Carpet
from any interior surface.
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft
. Never use a stiff brush. It can brush attachment to remove dust
cause damage. and loose dirt. A canister vacuum
with rotating brushes in the nozzle
may only be used on floor carpet
10-84 Vehicle Care
and carpeted floor mats. For soils, 4. Continue to gently rub the To remove dust, a soft cloth
always try to remove them first with soiled area. dampened with water can be used.
plain water or club soda. Before 5. If the soil is not completely If a more thorough cleaning is
cleaning, gently remove as much of removed, use a mild soap necessary, a soft cloth dampened
the soil as possible using one of the solution and repeat the cleaning with a mild soap solution can be
following techniques: process with plain water. used. Your dealer has a GM
. For liquids: gently blot the approved leather cleaner available
If any of the soil remains, a that provides superior cleaning
remaining soil with a paper commercial fabric cleaner or spot
towel. Allow the soil to absorb performance when used regularly
lifter may be necessary. Test a small on finished automotive leathers.
into the paper towel until no hidden area for colorfastness before
more can be removed. Allow the leather to dry naturally.
using a commercial upholstery Do not use heat, steam, spot lifters
. For solid dry soils: remove as cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally or spot removers, or shoe polish on
much as possible and then cleaned area gives any impression leather. Many commercial leather
vacuum. that a ring formation may result, cleaners and coatings that are sold
To clean: clean the entire surface. to preserve and protect leather
A paper towel can be used to blot may permanently change the
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white appearance and feel of the leather
cloth with water or club soda. excess moisture from the fabric or
carpet after the cleaning process. and are not recommended. Do not
2. Remove excess moisture. use silicone or wax-based products,
Leather or those containing organic solvents
3. Start on the outside edge of the to clean the interior because they
soil and gently rub toward the Leather, and lighter colored leather
in particular, will need more frequent can alter the appearance by
center. Continue cleaning, using increasing the gloss in a
a clean area of the cloth each cleaning to prevent the buildup of
dust, dirt, and colors transferred non-uniform manner.
time it becomes soiled.
from other items so that these do
not become permanent stains.
Vehicle Care 10-85
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and windshield and even make it difficult Floor Mats
Other Plastic Surfaces to see through the windshield under
certain conditions.
To remove dust, a soft cloth
Notice: Air fresheners contain
{ WARNING
dampened with water can be used.
If a more thorough cleaning is solvents that may cause damage If a floor mat is the wrong size or
necessary, a clean soft cloth to plastics and painted surfaces. is not properly installed, it can
dampened with a mild soap solution Follow the manufacturer’s interfere with the accelerator
can be used to gently remove dust instructions when using air pedal and/or brake pedal.
and dirt. Never use spot lifters or fresheners in the vehicle. If air Interference with the pedals can
removers on plastic surfaces. Many freshener comes in contact with cause unintended acceleration
commercial cleaners and coatings paint or a plastic surface, blot and/or increased stopping
that are sold to preserve and immediately with a soft cloth. distance which can cause a crash
protect soft plastic surfaces Damage caused by using air and injury. Make sure the floor
may permanently change the fresheners would not be covered mat does not interfere with the
appearance and feel of the interior by the vehicle warranty.
accelerator or brake pedal.
and are not recommended. Do not Care of Safety Belts
use silicone or wax-based products,
or those containing organic solvents Keep belts clean and dry. Use the following guidelines for
to clean the interior because they proper floor mat usage.
can alter the appearance by
increasing the gloss in a
{ WARNING . The original equipment floor
mats were designed for your
non-uniform manner. Do not bleach or dye safety belts. vehicle. If the floor mats need
Some commercial products may It may severely weaken them. In replacing, it is recommended
increase gloss on the instrument a crash, they might not be able to that GM certified floor mats be
panel. The increase in gloss may provide adequate protection. purchased. Non-GM floor mats
cause annoying reflections in the Clean safety belts only with mild may not fit properly and may
soap and lukewarm water.
10-86 Vehicle Care
interfere with the accelerator or Removing and Replacing the 2. Reinstall by lining up the floor
brake pedal. Always check that Floor Mat mat retainer openings over the
the floor mats do not interfere carpet retainers and snap into
with the pedals. position.
. Use the floor mat with the 3. Make sure the floor mat is
correct side up. Do not turn properly secured and verify that
it over. it does not interfere with the
. Do not place anything on top of accelerator or brake pedal.
the driver side floor mat.
. Use only a single floor mat on
the driver side.
. Do not place one floor mat on
top of another.
The driver side floor mat is held in

place by two retainers.
1. Pull up on the rear of the floor
mat to unlock each retainer and
remove.
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information Scheduled Maintenance. To keep

the vehicle in good condition, see
Maintenance Notice: Maintenance intervals,
checks, inspections,
your dealer.
The maintenance schedule is for
recommended fluids, and
vehicles that:
General Information lubricants are necessary to keep
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 this vehicle in good working . Carry passengers and cargo
condition. Damage caused by within recommended limits on
Scheduled Maintenance failure to follow scheduled the Tire and Loading Information
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2 maintenance might not be label. See Vehicle Load Limits
covered by the vehicle warranty. on page 9‑21.
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts As the vehicle owner, you are . Are driven on reasonable road
Recommended Fluids and responsible for the scheduled surfaces within legal driving
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 maintenance in this section. We limits.
Maintenance Replacement recommend having your dealer . Are driven off-road in the
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 perform these services. Proper recommended manner. See
vehicle maintenance helps to keep Off-Road Driving on page 9‑7.
Maintenance Records the vehicle in good working
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9 condition, improves fuel economy,
. Use the recommended fuel. See
and reduces vehicle emissions for Recommended Fuel on
better air quality. page 9‑51.
Because of all the different ways
people use vehicles, maintenance
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
Please read the information under
11-2 Service and Maintenance
The proper replacement parts, Scheduled

{ WARNING fluids, and lubricants to use are
Performing maintenance work can
listed in Recommended Fluids and Maintenance
Lubricants on page 11‑6 and
be dangerous. Some jobs can Maintenance Replacement Parts on When the Change Engine Oil
cause serious injury. Perform page 11‑8. We recommend the use Soon Message Displays
maintenance work only if you of genuine parts from your dealer. Change engine oil and filter. See
have the required know-how and Engine Oil on page 10‑10. An
the proper tools and equipment. Rotation of New Tires
Emission Control Service.
If in doubt, see your dealer to To maintain ride, handling, and
have a qualified technician do the performance of the vehicle, it is When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL
work. See Doing Your Own important that the first rotation SOON message displays, service is
Service Work on page 10‑4. service for new tires be performed. required for the vehicle as soon as
Tires should be rotated every possible, within the next 1 000 km/
12 000 km/7,500 miles. See Tire 600 miles. If driving under the best
At your dealer, you can be certain Rotation on page 10‑55. conditions, the engine oil life system
that you will receive the highest might not indicate the need for
level of service available. Your vehicle service for more than a year.
dealer has specially trained service The engine oil and filter must be
technicians, uses genuine changed at least once a year and
replacement parts, as well as, up‐to‐ the oil life system must be reset.
date tools and equipment to ensure Your dealer has trained service
fast and accurate diagnostics. technicians who will perform this
work and reset the system. If the
engine oil life system is reset
accidentally, service the vehicle
within 5 000 km/3,000 miles since
the last service. Reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed. damaged wiper blade

. Body hinges and latches, key
See Engine Oil Life System on replacement. See Wiper Blade lock cylinders, folding seat
page 10‑13. Replacement on page 10‑29. hardware, and sunroof
(if equipped) lubrication. See
Every Engine Oil Change . Tire inflation pressures check. Recommended Fluids and
See Tire Pressure on Lubricants on page 11‑6. More
. Change engine oil and filter. page 10‑49.
Reset oil life system. See frequent lubrication may be
Engine Oil on page 10‑10 and
. Tire wear inspection. See Tire required when the vehicle is
Engine Oil Life System on Inspection on page 10‑55. exposed to a corrosive
page 10‑13. An Emission environment. Applying silicone
. Rotate tires if necessary. See
Control Service. grease on weatherstrips with a
Tire Rotation on page 10‑55.
clean cloth makes them last
. Engine coolant level check. See . Fluids visual leak check longer, seal better, and not stick
Engine Coolant on page 10‑18. (or every 12 months, whichever or squeak.
. Engine cooling system occurs first). A leak in any . Restraint system component
inspection. Visual inspection of system must be repaired and the
check. See Safety System
hoses, pipes, fittings, and fluid level checked.
Check on page 3‑22.
clamps and replacement, . Engine air cleaner filter .
if needed. Fuel system inspection for
inspection. See Engine Air
damage or leaks.
. Windshield washer fluid level Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑15.
check. See Washer Fluid on
. Exhaust system and nearby heat
. Brake system inspection
page 10‑24. shields inspection for loose or
(or every 12 months, whichever
damaged components.
. Windshield wiper blade occurs first).
inspection for wear, cracking, . Steering and suspension
or contamination and windshield inspection. Visual inspection for
and wiper blade cleaning, damaged, loose, or missing
if contaminated. See Exterior parts or signs of wear.
Care on page 10‑79. Worn or
Additional Required Services Once a Year First Engine Oil Change After
. See Starter Switch Check on Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles
Every 12 000 km/7,500 Miles
page 10‑28. . Passenger compartment air
. Rotate tires. Tires should be filter replacement (or every
rotated every 12 000 km/
. See Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Control Function 24 months, whichever occurs
7,500 miles. See Tire Rotation first). More frequent replacement
on page 10‑55. Check on page 10‑28.
may be needed if you drive
. See Ignition Transmission Lock
At Each Fuel Stop in areas with heavy traffic,
Check on page 10‑29. areas with poor air quality,
. Engine oil level check. See or areas with high dust levels.
Engine Oil on page 10‑10.
. See Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check on Replacement may also be
. Engine coolant level check. See page 10‑29. needed if you notice reduced air
Engine Coolant on page 10‑18. flow, windows fogging up,
. Accelerator pedal check for or odors. Your dealer can help
. Windshield washer fluid level damage, high effort, or binding. you determine when it is the
check. See Washer Fluid on Replace if needed. right time to replace the filter.
page 10‑24. . Underbody flushing service.
Once a Month . Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/Liftglass
. Tire inflation check. See Tire Support Gas Strut Service:
Pressure on page 10‑49. Visually inspect gas strut,
. Tire wear inspection. See Tire if equipped, for signs of wear,
Inspection on page 10‑55. cracks, or other damage. Check
the hold open ability of the gas
. Sunroof track and seal strut. Contact your dealer if
inspection, if equipped. See service is required.
Sunroof on page 2‑18.
First Engine Oil Change After

. Evaporative control system First Engine Oil Change After
Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles inspection. Check all fuel and Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles
vapor lines and hoses for proper
. Engine air cleaner filter hook‐up, routing, and condition.
. Automatic transmission fluid
replacement. See Engine Air Check that the purge valve, change (normal service). See
Cleaner/Filter on page 10‑15. if the vehicle has one, works Automatic Transmission Fluid on
. Automatic transmission fluid properly. Replace as needed. An page 10‑15.
change (severe service) for Emission Control Service. The . Transfer case fluid change
vehicles mainly driven in heavy U.S. Environmental Protection (normal service).
city traffic in hot weather, in hilly Agency or the California Air . Spark plug replacement and
or mountainous terrain, when Resources Board has
spark plug wires inspection. An
frequently towing a trailer, determined that the failure to
Emission Control Service.
or used for taxi, police, perform this maintenance item
or delivery service. See will not nullify the emission First Engine Oil Change After
Automatic Transmission Fluid on warranty or limit recall liability Every 240 000 km/150,000 Miles
page 10‑15. prior to the completion of the . Engine cooling system drain,
vehicle's useful life. We,
. Transfer case fluid change flush, and refill (or every five
however, urge that all
(severe service) for vehicles years, whichever occurs first).
recommended maintenance
mainly driven in hilly or See Cooling System on
services be performed at the
mountainous terrain, when page 10‑16. An Emission
indicated intervals and the
frequently towing a trailer, Control Service.
maintenance be recorded.
or used for taxi, police, . Engine drive belts inspection for
or delivery service. fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage (or every
10 years, whichever occurs
first). Replace, if needed.
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos specification. Oils
meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos certification
Engine Oil mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos
certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil on
page 10‑10.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
Engine Coolant
See Engine Coolant on page 10‑18.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806, in
Hydraulic Brake System
Canada 88862807).
Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Hydraulic Power Steering System
DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
(V6 engines only)
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive) Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No. 88861950, in Canada 88861951).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Key Lock Cylinders
Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Hood, Door, and Folding Seat Hinges
Canada 10953474).
Power Liftgate Actuator Ball Joint Multi-Purpose Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Weatherstrip Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 25899727 A3138C
Engine Oil Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G
3.0L V6 Engine 89017525 PF63
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 20901295 CF177
Spark Plugs
2.4L L4 Engine 12620540 41-108
3.0L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109
Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 60 cm (23.6 in) 20794123 —
Passenger Side – 42.5 cm (16.7 in) 20794124 —
Rear – 32.5 cm (12.8 in) 25788783 —
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
Maintenance Record (cont.)

Odometer
Reading

Odometer
Reading

Odometer
Reading
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12‑2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4 Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
. Model designation.
This legal identifier is in the front . Paint information.
corner of the instrument panel, on .
the left side of the vehicle. It can be Production options and special
seen through the windshield from equipment.
outside. The VIN also appears on Do not remove this label from the
the Vehicle Certification and Service vehicle.
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Metric English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Engine Cooling System
2.4L L4 Engine 7.8 L 8.2 qt
3.0L V6 Engine 10.2 L 10.8 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
2.4L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt
3.0L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt
Fuel Tank
2.4L L4 Engine 71.1 L 18.8 gal
3.0L V6 Engine 79.1 L 20.9 gal
Technical Data 12-3
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Transmission Fluid (Drain and Refill)
2.4L L4 6–Speed Automatic* 8.5 L 9.0 qt
3.0L V6 6–Speed Automatic* 9.0 L 9.5 qt
Wheel Nut Torque 190 Y 140 lb ft
*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑15 for information on checking fluid level.
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
2.4L L4 C Automatic 0.9 mm (0.035 in)
3.0L V6 5 Automatic 1.1 mm (0.043 in)
12-4 Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
3.0L V6 Engine
2.4L L4 Engine
Customer Information 13-1
Customer Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information
Information the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Customer Satisfaction
Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure
Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Customer Satisfaction Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 important to the dealer and to
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
Customer Assistance General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
with the sales transaction or the
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be
Customer Assistance for Text resolved by the dealer's sales or
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4 however, despite the best intentions
GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14 of all concerned, misunderstandings
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 can occur. If your concern has not
Roadside Assistance OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-15 been resolved to your satisfaction,
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 the following steps should be taken:
Scheduling Service Radio Frequency
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16 STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Courtesy Transportation Radio Frequency with a member of dealership
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 management. Normally, concerns
Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9 can be quickly resolved at that level.
Service Publications If the matter has already been
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-12 reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of the dealership or the general
manager.
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, 40 days. If you do not agree with the
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will decision given in your case, you
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's may reject it and proceed with any
resolved by the dealership without facility. That is why we suggest other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. to you.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In Both General Motors and the dealer Program using the toll-free
Canada, call General Motors of are committed to making sure you telephone number or write them at
Canada Customer Communication are completely satisfied with the the following address:
Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English), new vehicle. However, if you
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). BBB Auto Line Program
continue to remain unsatisfied after Council of Better Business
We encourage you to call the following the procedure outlined in Bureaus, Inc.
toll-free number in order to give your Steps One and Two, you can file 4200 Wilson Boulevard
inquiry prompt attention. Have the with the Better Business Bureau Suite 800
following information available to (BBB) Auto Line® Program to Arlington, VA 22203-1838
give the Customer Assistance enforce your rights.
representative: Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
. Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered
Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all
from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of
title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage, and other
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves
be required to resort to this informal the right to change eligibility
. Dealership name and location. limitations and/or discontinue its
dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the participation in this program.
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Assistance

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Offices
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call Chevrolet encourages customers
procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer to call the toll-free number for
and Two, General Motors of Canada Communication Centre, assistance. However, if a customer
Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-3777 (English), wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
participation in a no-charge 1-800-263-7854 (French), the letter should be addressed to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program. or write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited United States
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
has committed to binding arbitration c/o Customer Communication Chevrolet Motor Division
of owner disputes involving Centre Chevrolet Customer Assistance
factory-related vehicle service General Motors of Canada Limited Center
claims. The program provides for Mail Code: CA1-163-005 P.O. Box 33170
the review of the facts involved by 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Detroit, MI 48232-5170
an impartial third party arbiter, and Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 www.Chevrolet.com
may include an informal hearing
before the arbiter. The program is The inquiry should be accompanied 1-800-222-1020
designed so that the entire dispute by the Vehicle Identification 1-800-833-2438 (For Text
settlement process, from the time Number (VIN). Telephone Devices (TTYs))
you file your complaint to the final Roadside Assistance:
decision, should be completed in 1-800-243-8872
about 70 days. We believe our From Puerto Rico:
impartial program offers advantages 1-800-496-9992 (English)
over courts in most jurisdictions 1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge. From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada Mexico, Central America, and Online Owner Center

General Motors of Canada Limited Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Chevrolet Owner Center (U.S.)
Customer Communication Centre,
Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Virgin Islands) www.chevyownercenter.com
1908 Colonel Sam Drive General Motors de Mexico, S. de Information and services
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 R.L. de C.V. customized for your specific
www.gm.ca Customer Assistance Center vehicle — all in one convenient
Av. Ejercito Nacional #843 place.
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French) Col. Granada . Digital owner manual, warranty
1-800-263-3830 (For Text C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F. information, and more.
Telephone devices (TTYs)) 01-800-466-0800 . Storage for online service and
Roadside Assistance: Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800 maintenance records.
1-800-268-6800
. Chevrolet dealer locator for
Overseas Customer Assistance for service nationwide.
Please contact the local General Text Telephone (TTY) . Exclusive privileges and offers.
Motors Business Unit. Users . Recall notices for your specific
To assist customers who are deaf, vehicle.
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired . OnStar and GM Cardmember
and who use Text Telephones
Services Earnings summaries.
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY
user in the U.S. can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
Other Helpful Links Here are a few of the valuable tools GM Mobility
and services you will have
Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com
access to:
Reimbursement Program
Chevrolet Merchandise —
www.chevymall.com
. My Showroom: Find and save
information on vehicles and
Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/ current offers in your area.
pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do . My Dealers: Save details such
. FAQ as address and phone number
. Contact Us for each of your preferred GM
dealers. This program is available to
My GM Canada www.gm.ca qualified applicants for cost
. My Driveway: Access quick
My GM Canada is a links to parts and service reimbursement of eligible
password-protected section of estimates, check trade-in aftermarket adaptive equipment
www.gm.ca where you can save values, or schedule a service required for the vehicle, such as
information on GM vehicles, get appointment by adding the hand controls or a wheelchair/
personalized offers, and use handy vehicles you own to your scooter lift for the vehicle.
tools and forms with greater ease. driveway profile. For more information on the limited
. My Preferences: Manage your offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
profile and use tools and forms call the GM Mobility Assistance
with greater ease. Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
To sign up, visit the My GM.ca Telephone (TTY) users, call
section within www.gm.ca. 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also has

. Location of the vehicle. Chevrolet and General Motors of
a Mobility Program. Call . Model, year, color, and license Canada Limited reserve the right to
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for plate number of the vehicle. limit services or payment to an
details. TTY users call owner or driver if they decide the
1-800-263-3830.
. Odometer reading, Vehicle claims are made too often, or the
Identification Number (VIN), and same type of claim is made many
delivery date of the vehicle.
Roadside Assistance times.
Program
. Description of the problem.
Services Provided
For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call Coverage . Emergency Fuel Delivery:
1‐800‐243‐8872; (Text Telephone Services are provided up to 5 years/ Delivery of enough fuel for the
(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438). 160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever vehicle to get to the nearest
For Canadian‐purchased vehicles, comes first. service station.
call 1-800-268-6800. In the U.S., anyone driving the . Lock‐Out Service: Service to
Service is available 24 hours a day, vehicle is covered. In Canada, a unlock the vehicle if you are
365 days a year. person driving the vehicle without locked out. A remote unlock may
permission from the owner is not be available if you have OnStar.
Calling for Assistance covered. For security reasons, the driver
When calling Roadside Assistance, must present identification
Roadside Assistance is not a part of
have the following information before this service is given.
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ready: Chevrolet and General Motors of . Emergency Tow from a Public
. Your name, home address, and Canada Limited reserve the right to Road or Highway: Tow to the
home telephone number. make any changes or discontinue nearest Chevrolet dealer for
the Roadside Assistance program at warranty service, or if the vehicle
. Telephone number of your any time without notification. was in a crash and cannot be
location. driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the
sand, mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service to Services Specific to the repair orders. Once
change a flat tire with the spare Canadian-Purchased Vehicles authorization has been received,
tire. The spare tire, if equipped, the Roadside Assistance advisor
must be in good condition and . Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement will help to make arrangements
properly inflated. It is the owner's is approximately $5 Canadian. and explain how to receive
responsibility for the repair or Diesel fuel delivery may be payment.
replacement of the tire if it is not restricted. Propane and other
covered by the warranty. fuels are not provided through . Alternative Service: If
this service. assistance cannot be provided
. Battery Jump Start: Service to right away, the Roadside
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle
jump start a dead battery. Assistance advisor may give
registration is required. permission to get local
Services Not Included in . Trip Routing Service: Detailed emergency road service. You will
Roadside Assistance receive payment, up to $100,
maps of North America are
. Impound towing caused by provided when requested either after sending the original receipt
violation of any laws. with the most direct route or the to Roadside Assistance.
. Legal fines. most scenic route. There is a Mechanical failures may be
limit of six requests per year. covered, however any cost for
. Mounting, dismounting, Additional travel information is parts and labor for repairs not
or changing of snow tires, also available. Allow three covered by the warranty are the
chains, or other traction devices. weeks for delivery. owner responsibility.
. Towing or services for vehicles . Trip Interruption Benefits and
driven on a non-public road or Assistance: Must be over
highway. 250 kilometers from where your
trip was started to qualify.
General Motors of
Canada Limited requires
pre-authorization, original
detailed receipts, and a copy of
Scheduling Service Courtesy Transportation Transportation Options

Appointments Program Warranty service can generally be
completed while you wait. However,
When the vehicle requires warranty To enhance your ownership
if you are unable to wait, GM helps
service, contact the dealer and experience, we and our participating
to minimize inconvenience by
request an appointment. By dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
providing several transportation
scheduling a service appointment Transportation, a customer support
options. Depending on the
and advising the service consultant program for vehicles with the
circumstances, the dealer can
of your transportation needs, the Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
offer one of the following:
dealer can help minimize your Coverage period in Canada),
inconvenience. extended powertrain, and/or Shuttle Service
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled hybrid‐specific warranties in both
Shuttle service is the preferred
into the service department the U.S. and Canada.
means of offering Courtesy
immediately, keep driving it until it Several Courtesy Transportation Transportation. Dealers may provide
can be scheduled for service, options are available to assist in shuttle service to get you to your
unless, of course, the problem is reducing inconvenience when destination with minimal interruption
safety related. If it is, please call the warranty repairs are required. of your daily schedule. This includes
dealership, let them know this, and Courtesy Transportation is not a one‐way or round‐trip shuttle service
ask for instructions. part of the New Vehicle Limited within reasonable time and distance
If the dealer requests you to bring Warranty. A separate booklet parameters of the dealer's area.
the vehicle for service, you are entitled “Warranty and Owner
urged to do so as early in the work Assistance Information” furnished
day as possible to allow for the with each new vehicle provides
same-day repair. detailed warranty coverage
information.
Public Transportation or Fuel Rental reimbursement will be limited General Motors reserves the
Reimbursement and must be supported by original right to unilaterally modify,
If the vehicle requires overnight receipts. This requires that you sign change, or discontinue Courtesy
warranty repairs, and public and complete a rental agreement Transportation at any time and to
transportation is used instead of the and meet state/provincial, local, and resolve all questions of claim
dealer's shuttle service, the expense rental vehicle provider requirements. eligibility pursuant to the terms and
must be supported by original Requirements vary and may conditions described herein at its
receipts and can only be up to the include minimum age requirements, sole discretion.
maximum amount allowed by GM insurance coverage, credit card,
for shuttle service. In addition, for etc. You are responsible for fuel Collision Damage Repair
U.S. customers, should you arrange usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage If the vehicle is involved in a
transportation through a friend or collision and it is damaged, have the
relative, limited reimbursement for fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the damage repaired by a qualified
reasonable fuel expenses may be technician using the proper
available. Claim amounts should repair.
equipment and quality replacement
reflect actual costs and be It may not be possible to provide a parts. Poorly performed collision
supported by original receipts. See like vehicle as a courtesy rental. repairs diminish the vehicle resale
the dealer for information regarding value, and safety performance can
the allowance amounts for Additional Program
be compromised in subsequent
reimbursement of fuel or other Information collisions.
transportation costs. All program options, such as shuttle
Courtesy Rental Vehicle service, may not be available at
every dealer. Please contact the
The dealer may arrange to provide dealer for specific information
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or about availability. All Courtesy
reimburse you for a rental vehicle Transportation arrangements will be
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept administered by appropriate dealer
for an overnight warranty repair. personnel.
Collision Parts Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any center that has GM-trained
related failures are not covered by technicians and comparable
Genuine GM Collision parts are new
that warranty. equipment.
parts made with the same materials
and construction methods as the Aftermarket collision parts are also Insuring The Vehicle
parts with which the vehicle was available. These are made by
originally built. Genuine GM companies other than GM and may Protect your investment in the GM
Collision parts are the best choice to not have been tested for the vehicle. vehicle with comprehensive and
ensure that the vehicle's designed As a result, these parts may fit collision insurance coverage. There
appearance, durability, and safety poorly, exhibit premature durability/ are significant differences in the
are preserved. The use of Genuine corrosion problems, and may not quality of coverage afforded by
GM parts can help maintain the GM perform properly in subsequent various insurance policy terms.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. collisions. Aftermarket parts are not Many insurance policies provide
covered by the GM New Vehicle reduced protection to the GM
Recycled original equipment parts vehicle by limiting compensation for
Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
may also be used for repair. These damage repairs by using
failure related to such parts is not
parts are typically removed from aftermarket collision parts. Some
covered by that warranty.
vehicles that were total losses in insurance companies will not
prior crashes. In most cases, the Repair Facility specify aftermarket collision parts.
parts being recycled are from When purchasing insurance, we
undamaged sections of the vehicle. GM also recommends that you
choose a collision repair facility that recommend that you ensure that the
A recycled original equipment GM vehicle will be repaired with GM
part may be an acceptable choice to meets your needs before you ever
need collision repairs. The dealer original equipment collision parts.
maintain the vehicle's originally If such insurance coverage is not
designed appearance and safety may have a collision repair center
with GM-trained technicians and available from your current
performance; however, the history of insurance carrier, consider switching
these parts is not known. Such parts state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
able to recommend a collision repair to another insurance carrier.
are not covered by the GM New
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing Gather the following information: Managing the Vehicle Damage
company may require you to have . Driver name, address, and Repair Process
insurance that ensures repairs with telephone number.
Genuine GM Original Equipment In the event that the vehicle requires
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or . Driver license number. damage repairs, GM recommends
Genuine Manufacturer replacement .
that you take an active role in its
Owner name, address, and repair. If you have a pre-determined
parts. Read the lease carefully, as telephone number.
you may be charged at the end of repair facility of choice, take the
the lease for poor quality repairs.
. Vehicle license plate number. vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any
. Vehicle make, model, and
If a Crash Occurs model year.
required replacement collision parts
be original equipment parts, either
If there has been an injury, call . Vehicle Identification new Genuine GM parts or recycled
emergency services for help. Do not
Number (VIN). original GM parts. Remember,
leave the scene of a crash until all
. Insurance company and policy recycled parts will not be covered by
matters have been taken care of.
number. the GM vehicle warranty.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are . General description of the Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
instructed to move it by a police damage to the other vehicle. but you must live with the repair.
officer. Depending on your policy limits,
Choose a reputable repair facility your insurance company may
Give only the necessary information that uses quality replacement parts. initially value the repair using
to police and other parties involved See “Collision Parts” earlier in this aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
in the crash. section. the repair professional, and insist on
For emergency towing see If the airbag has inflated, see What Genuine GM parts. Remember,
Roadside Assistance Program on Will You See After an Airbag if the vehicle is leased, you may be
page 13‑6. Inflates? on page 3‑29. obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
If another party's insurance Each bulletin contains instructions Current and Past Models
company is paying for the repairs, to assist in the diagnosis and
Technical Service Bulletins and
you are not obligated to accept a service of the vehicle.
Manuals are available for current
repair valuation based on that
Owner Information and past model GM vehicles.
insurance company's collision policy
repair limits, as you have no Owner publications are written ORDER TOLL FREE:
contractual limits with that company. specifically for owners and intended 1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday
In such cases, you can have control to provide basic operational 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
of the repair and parts choices as information about the vehicle. The For Credit Card Orders Only
long as the cost stays within Owner Manual includes the (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
reasonable limits. Maintenance Schedule for all Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
models.
Service Publications In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Or write to:
Ordering Information Owner Manual, and Warranty Helm, Incorporated
Booklet. P.O. Box 07130
Service Manuals Detroit, MI 48207
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
Service Manuals have the diagnosis $35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and Prices are subject to change without
and repair information on the shipping fees. notice and without incurring
engines, transmission, axle, obligation. Allow ample time for
suspension, brakes, electrical, Without Portfolio: Owner delivery.
steering, body, etc. Manual only.
All listed prices are quoted in U.S.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
Service Bulletins funds. Make checks payable in U.S.
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and funds.
Service Bulletins give additional shipping fees.
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Reporting Safety However, NHTSA cannot Reporting Safety Defects

become involved in individual to the Canadian
Defects problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
Government
Reporting Safety Defects If you live in Canada, and you
To contact NHTSA, you may call
to the United States the Vehicle Safety Hotline
believe that the vehicle has a safety
defect, notify Transport Canada
Government toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 immediately, and notify General
If you believe that your vehicle (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to Motors of Canada Limited. Call
has a defect which could cause http://www.safercar.gov; or them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
a crash or could cause injury or write to: Transport Canada
death, you should immediately Administrator, NHTSA Road Safety Branch
inform the National Highway 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E. 2780 Sheffield Road
Traffic Safety Administration Washington, D.C. 20590 Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
You can also obtain other
General Motors.
information about motor
If NHTSA receives similar vehicle safety from
complaints, it may open an http://www.safercar.gov.
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.
Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data Event Data Recorders

to General Motors Recording and This vehicle has an Event Data
In addition to notifying NHTSA Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
(or Transport Canada) in a situation
Privacy of an EDR is to record, in certain
like this, notify General Motors. This GM vehicle has a number of crash or near crash-like situations,
sophisticated computers that record such as an airbag deployment or
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write: hitting a road obstacle, data that will
information about the vehicle’s
Chevrolet Motor Division performance and how it is driven. assist in understanding how a
Chevrolet Customer Assistance For example, the vehicle uses vehicle's systems performed. The
Center computer modules to monitor and EDR is designed to record data
P.O. Box 33170 control engine and transmission related to vehicle dynamics and
Detroit, MI 48232-5170 performance, to monitor the safety systems for a short period of
conditions for airbag deployment time, typically 30 seconds or less.
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 The EDR in this vehicle is designed
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 and deploy airbags in a crash, and,
if so equipped, to provide antilock to record such data as:
(French), or write:
braking to help the driver control the . How various systems in the
General Motors of Canada Limited vehicle. These modules may store vehicle were operating.
Customer Communication Centre, data to help the dealer technician
Mail Code: CA1-163-005 service the vehicle. Some modules
. Whether or not the driver and
1908 Colonel Sam Drive may also store data about how you passenger safety belts were
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 operate the vehicle, such as rate of buckled/fastened.
fuel consumption or average speed. . How far, if at all, the driver was
These modules may also retain the pressing the accelerator and/or
owner’s personal preferences, such brake pedal.
as radio pre-sets, seat positions, . How fast the vehicle was
and temperature settings. traveling.
This data can help provide a better law enforcement, that have the OnStar®
understanding of the circumstances special equipment, can read the
in which crashes and injuries occur. information if they have access to If the vehicle is equipped with an
the vehicle or the EDR. active OnStar system, that system
Important: EDR data is recorded may also record data in crash or
by the vehicle only if a non-trivial GM will not access this data or near crash‐like situations. The
crash situation occurs; no data is share it with others except: with the OnStar Terms and Conditions
recorded by the EDR under normal consent of the vehicle owner or, provides information on data
driving conditions and no personal if the vehicle is leased, with the collection and use and is available
data (e.g., name, gender, age, consent of the lessee; in response in the OnStar glove box kit, at
and crash location) is recorded. to an official request by police or www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
However, other parties, such similar government office; as part of www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by
as law enforcement, could combine GM's defense of litigation through
pressing the Q button and
the EDR data with the type of the discovery process; or, as
personally identifying data routinely required by law. Data that GM speaking to an advisor.
acquired during a crash collects or receives may also be
investigation. used for GM research needs or may Navigation System
To read data recorded by an EDR, be made available to others for If the vehicle has a navigation
special equipment is required, and research purposes, where a need is system, use of the system may
access to the vehicle or the EDR is shown and the data is not tied to a result in the storage of destinations,
needed. In addition to the vehicle specific vehicle or vehicle owner. addresses, telephone numbers, and
manufacturer, other parties, such as other trip information. Refer to the
navigation system operating manual
for information on stored data and
for deletion instructions.
Radio Frequency Radio Frequency

Identification (RFID) Statement
RFID technology is used in some This vehicle has systems that
vehicles for functions such as tire operate on a radio frequency that
pressure monitoring and ignition comply with Part 15 of the Federal
system security, as well as in Communications Commission (FCC)
connection with conveniences such rules and with Industry Canada
as key fobs for remote door locking/ Standards RSS‐210/220/310.
unlocking and starting, and Operation is subject to the following
in-vehicle transmitters for garage two conditions:
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record 1. The device may not cause
personal information or link with any interference.
other GM system containing 2. The device must accept any
personal information. interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
INDEX i-1
A Airbags Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

Adding Equipment to the CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
Accessories and
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Passenger Status Indicator . . . 5-11 Audio System
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Add-On Electrical
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-41
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Adjustments
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24 Automatic
Lumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Alarm System Climate Control System . . . . . . . . 8-3
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-15
Anti-Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-27, 9-37 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-34
Air Filter, Passenger
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Antenna Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Multi-Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18 Shift Lock Control
Airbag System
Anti-Theft Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . 7-27, 7-30
How Does an Airbag
Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-28
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Passenger Sensing
Antilock Brake B
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
What Makes an Airbag
Appearance Care Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79 Voltage and Charging
What Will You See After
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
an Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Assistance Program, Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-29
When Should an Airbag
Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-26
i-2 INDEX
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-43, 7-44, 7-48 C Check

Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-15 Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 Ignition
California
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37 Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-29
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-52
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39 Child Restraints
Perchlorate Materials
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Infants and Young
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Lower Anchors and
Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-46
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-46
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iv
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Capacities and
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52, 3-54
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34, 6-4 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
Carbon Monoxide
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Cleaning
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Headlamps, Front Turn Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Signal, Sidemarker, and Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1
Cargo
Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-35 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Tie Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Cautions, Danger, and
Sidemarker, Stoplamps, Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5, 5-6
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v
and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . 10-34 Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-1
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Charging
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
INDEX i-3
Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 D Driving

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14 Characteristics and
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9
Coolant Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57
Danger, Warnings, and
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v
Engine Temperature Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Daytime Running
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .9-18
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25 If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-21
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Courtesy Transportation Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . 7-27, 7-30
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Cover Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Door
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42 Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20 Driving for Better Fuel
Drive Systems
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-27, 9-37
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 DVD
Driver Information
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Rear Seat Entertainment
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-32
Text Telephone (TTY) DVD/CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4
Customer Information
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-12
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
i-4 INDEX
E Engine (cont.) Fluid

Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33 Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-15
E85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
ECO Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Economy Mode
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-33 Fog Lamps
Electrical Equipment,
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . 10-34, 6-4
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64
Engine Oil Front Fog Lamps
Electrical System
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Engine Compartment
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26 Front Seats
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-63 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Instrument Panel Fuse
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52
Engine
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1 E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-53
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Economy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Check and Service Engine
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 F Filling a Portable Fuel
Features Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-56
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Filter, Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-52
Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-52
Coolant Temperature
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3 Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-19
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-51
Cooling System Messages . . .5-25
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64 Requirements, California . . . . .9-52
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85 System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
INDEX i-5
Fuel Economy General Information Headlamps (cont.)

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25 Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-57 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-20
Engine Compartment Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37 GM Mobility Reimbursement Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Instrument Panel Fuse Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Heater
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
H Heating and Air
G Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3 Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-3
Gasoline Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-52 Headlamps Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Gauges Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-18
Engine Coolant Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Daytime Running Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 How to Wear Safety Belts
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Headlamps, Front Turn
Warning Lights and Signal, Sidemarker, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Parking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
i-6 INDEX
I L Lights
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-44
Antilock Brake System
Ignition Transmission Lock Lamps
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29 Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-15
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Infants and Young Children, Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40 License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-13
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Instrument Panel Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii LATCH System
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Replacing Parts After a
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
J Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-10
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 LATCH, Lower Anchors and
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Liftgate
K Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Traction Control System
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-27 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Light
Keyless Entry StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3 Locks
Lighting
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
INDEX i-7
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Messages (cont.) N

Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-19 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-25
Navigation
Lower Anchors and Tethers Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-25
Vehicle Data Recording
for Children (LATCH Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46 Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Object Detection System . . . . .5-27
M Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-27 O
Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Object Detection System
Maintenance
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Maintenance Schedule
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Recommended Fluids and
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
Mirrors Oil
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-13
Automatic Dimming Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-13
Mass Storage Media (MEM) . . . 7-23
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Messages
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-38
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Anti-Theft Alarm System . . . . . .5-28
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14 OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Battery Voltage and
Monitor System, Tire Operation, Infotainment
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
i-8 INDEX
Outlets Perchlorate Materials R

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Radio Frequency
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Personalization
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-16
Overview, Infotainment Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3, 7-5 Phone
Radios
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-43, 7-44, 7-48
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
P Power
CD/DVD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-20
Park Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32 Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-30
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
Parking Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41
Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45 Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Rear Seat Entertainment
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Brake and P (Park) Pregnancy, Using Safety
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-41
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-29 Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-32 Privacy
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-46
Passenger Airbag Status Radio Frequency
Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-4
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Passenger Compartment Air Program
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-31 Proposition 65 Warning,
Recommended Fluids and
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
INDEX i-9
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51 Reporting Safety Defects S

Records Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
Recreational Vehicle U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76 Restraints
How to Wear Safety Belts
Reimbursement Program, Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Retained Accessory
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Ride Control Systems
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Replacing After a Crash . . . . . .3-23
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36 Roads
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-22
Replacement Parts Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Safety Defects Reporting
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37 Roadside Assistance
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-37 Roof
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Replacing LATCH System Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Replacing Safety Belt Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
System Parts After a Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Running the Vehicle While
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-8
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33
i-10 INDEX
Seats Service (cont.) Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-8 Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-6 Shift Lock Control Function Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-3 Check, Automatic Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Storage
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Shifting Mass Media (MEM) . . . . . . . . . . .7-23
Securing Child Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31 Storage Areas
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52, 3-54 Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32 Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Security Sidemarker Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-34 Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Signals, Turn and Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Service Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Accessories and Spare Tire Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72 Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4 Specifications and Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13 Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v
Maintenance, General StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . . . 5-16 System
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1 Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39 Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Publications Ordering Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
INDEX i-11
T Tires (cont.) Trailer

Terminology and Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .9-64
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60
Taillamps
Uniform Tire Quality Transmission
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59 Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4
Wheel Alignment and Tire Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-13
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-61 Transportation Program,
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5, 5-6
When It Is Time for New Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Tires
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Turn and Lane-Change
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Towing Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-57 Turn Signal
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-63 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-57
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-76 U
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-60 Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-45
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .9-64 Uniform Tire Quality
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-52
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76 Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Traction Using this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-40
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Control System (TCS)/
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-50
StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
i-12 INDEX
V W Windshield
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Vehicle Warning
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iv Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-29
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Wipers
Identification Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21 Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . . v
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23 Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-29 Wheels
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Alignment and Tire
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Vehicle Care Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49 When It Is Time for New
Vehicle Identification Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Service Parts Identification Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-44
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

2011_chevrolet_equinox

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2011_chevrolet_equinox

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual - 2011 Black plate (1,1)

2011 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

2011 Chevrolet Equinox Owner Manual M

Please refer to the purchase worldwide patents issued &

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Using this Manual Symbols

Vehicle Symbol Chart B : Engine Coolant Temperature J : OnStar®

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

H. Infotainment on page 7‑2. Q. Shift Lever. See Shifting Into

Initial Drive Remote Keyless Entry Q: Press to lock all doors.

Remote Vehicle Start Canceling a Remote Start

Starting the Vehicle . Press / until the parking lamps

Liftgate Power Liftgate Operation Notice: If you open the liftgate

Windows Pushing or pulling the switch part of To adjust the seat:

The power window controls are on

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:

Safety Belts Sensing System for The passenger airbag status

Refer to the following sections for

Mirror Adjustment 3. Return the selector switch to the Steering Wheel

Interior Lighting For more information on interior 5 : Turns on the headlamps,

Climate Control System E. Defrost

Automatic Climate Control System Parking Brake

To release the parking brake, hold To use this feature:

Bluetooth® Steering Wheel Controls $ c : Press to silence the

Ultrasonic Parking Assist Roof Rack System Power Outlets

Performance and StabiliTrak® System Tire Pressure Monitor

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors and Doors

2-2 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-3

2-4 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-5

2-6 Keys, Doors and Windows

Conditions in Which Remote Start This feature allows your dealer to

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-7

2-8 Keys, Doors and Windows

Doors WARNING (Continued)

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-9

On vehicles with a power liftgate,

2-10 Keys, Doors and Windows

mounted cargo during power

Manual operation of a liftgate that Do not force the liftgate open or

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-11

2-12 Keys, Doors and Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-13

2-14 Keys, Doors and Windows

Exterior Mirrors Power Mirrors 2. Press the arrows on the control

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-15

2-16 Keys, Doors and Windows

Windows Power Windows

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-17

ACC/ACCESSORY, or in Retained Window Lockout

2-18 Keys, Doors and Windows

Sun Visors Roof

Keys, Doors and Windows 2-19

Express-open/Express-close Periodically open the sunroof and

2-20 Keys, Doors and Windows

Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats and Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-22

3-2 Seats and Restraints

Seats and Restraints 3-3

Front Seats Power Seat Adjustment